


* o 






^ %.. 










^ o x 















. 






,\V •/> 



- 









,-V 






o. v 



: ,<>** 



% ,/' 









^ V* 



OO' 






{* * 



vv 



< 



# v 



o> -^ " 



* 8 1 














-p 














-V 






o 



-^^ 



.v\ y ^n 






• 



.v* ! 












■^ * 






' ^ 1 u , \ ^ 






,^ ^ 


















s a\ 



^ 



^ 9 



& ^ 









■ 



HYPNOTISM 



Its Facts, Theories and Related Phenomena, 
with Explanatory Anecdotes, Descrip- 
tions and Reminiscences 



BY 

CARL SEXTUS 



Illustrate* 



Fifth Revised Edition 




BOSTON 
DANA ESTES & COMPANY 

PUBLISHERS 



55a 



Copyright, 1893, BY Carl Sextus 

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 



PREFACE. 

Many of my friends have often urged me to publish my experiences 
and reminiscences in the field of Hypnotism. In answer to this demand 
I herewith present this work to the public. 

On account of the justified curiosity and great interest aroused by 
these still mysterious phenomena, I believe that this book will be of 
service to all interested in Hypnotism. The burning questions of 
Hypnotism and its related phenomena, with all their mysticism and 
perplexity of character, are exciting much attention and calling for 
explanations among enlightened and thinking men and women the 
world over. 

I have done my best to explain, in as clear and significant.a manner 
as I can, everything connected with the phenomena mentioned. 

Furthermore, I have, to the best of my ability, endeavored to show 
the relation of Hypnotism to society — its significance morally and 
legally; its importance as a factor in medical science — as a new and 
effective method of cure. I hope sincerely to have met with some 
degree of success. If the reader finds matter not only for ephemeral 
interest, but also explanations of hitherto more or less unexplained 
questions, in the so-called occult realm, that will in the future direct 
his attention more carefully to this subject, my ambition is attained. 

Little reference is made to all the tedious and tiresome, and, for 
most people, well-known facts about Mesmer and his difficulties with 
the authorities in Vienna, and the report of the Royal French Investi- 
gation Committee about Mesmer and Dr. D'Eslon. I have named the 
so-called Mesmerism and Hypnotism " Puysegurian Somnambulism," 
after the French Marquis M. de Puysegur, because all my inquiries 
have shown that he was the real discoverer of artificial somnambulism; 
and we owe to the untiring exertions, the assiduous labors and the 

published works of this noble Frenchman, the fact that Hypnotism 

iii 



IV PREFACE. 

to-day is known and appreciated. I have included everything that I 

deemed to be of interest to the science. I have also added some 

opinions on this subject from celebrated European and American 

scientists, editors, etc. 

That the contents of this book may the more easily be understood I 

have secured a series of originally-designed illustrations, which bring 

*o the eye, in realistic form, many interesting operations and their 

results. 

CARL SEXTUS. 
Chicago, 1893. 



CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

CHAPTER L— Puysegurian Somnambulism.— Hypnotic Science — Some Facts 
Relating to Its Discovery and Subsequent Development — How Subjects are 
Influenced — The Tests — The Curiosities of Somnambulism as Developed by 
Skilled Hypnotists — Its Use and Abuse — Father Gassner as a Hypnotist — The 
Different Degrees of Hypnotism — The Hindoo Science — How to Hypnotize 
Animals — The Advance of the Science — Treatment of Diseases 9-32 

CHAPTER n. — Hypnotism as a Remedy. — Its Development as a Science — 
Cures Claimed to be Effected where Ordinary Medical Skill was Impotent — 
Curious Limitations of the Operator's Power — Opinions of Specialists — Pater 
Faria as a Hypnotist — Disorders Removed by Suggestion — Is Hypnotism 
Immoral ? — Southerners Easily Influenced 33- 51 

CHAPTER III.— Hypnotism.— Also Called Mesmerism, or Artificial Somnam- 
bulism S2-62 

CHAPTER IV.— Hypnotic Methods and Conditions. — Special Remarks Re- 
garding "Hypnotism" and "Phenomena" Relating Thereto — Clear and 
Practical Methods by which Hypnotism May Be Produced — A Double Con- 
scious State is an Interesting One with Hypnotic Individuals — A Striking 
Example is that of King Lear — Psychological Impressions — Important Sugges- 
tions — Alcoholic Trance — Strange Things that Men Do Under the Influence of 
Drink 63- 77 

CHAPTER V. — Hypnotism Defended. — Popular Misapprehensions Concerning 
Hypnotism — The Dangers of Hypnotism Easily Avoided by Care on the Part 
of the Hypnotized — Practical Value of Hypnotism in the Healing Art 78- 86 

CHAPTER VI.— Hypnotic Clairvoyance.— The Mystery Practiced by Magi- 
cians of Egypt — Experiment in Clairvoyance — A Strange Seance in Egypt — ■ 
Extract from Lane's "Work on Egypt — Author's Comments on the Above — 
Clairvoyant Experiments in Gothenburg, Sweden — A Gypsy Palmister Proves \f 
an Excellent Clairvoyant and Predicts for the Danish Royal Family Its Future 
Destiny S7- 97 

CHAPTER VII. — Crystal Visions. — Marvelous Experiments Produced by 

Looking Into a Tumbler of Water and a Plain Crystal 9S-107 

CHAPTER VIII. — Magnets and Od. — Mineral and Personal Magnetism as 
Methods of Cure — The Art of Manipulations and Passes by the Hands on the 
Diseased Part of the Body and the Cure of Diseases — Mental Electricity, also 
Called Nerve Ether or Life Electro-Dynamism 10S-124 

CHAPTER IX. — Hypnotism and Animals.— A Queer Method by which to 
Magnetize Serpents, Employed with Great Success by the Mojowee and 
Apache Indians— Hypnotized Snakes — Rattlers and Copperheads Magnetized 
or Fascinated by Music — A Texas Snake Charmer — He Doesn't Like "Work and 

Prefers to Play with Rattlesnakes 125-136 

V 



VI CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER X.— Hypnotic Miscellanies.— By George Lutken, M. D.— Testi- 
monial — Hypnotism and the Meaning- and Use Thereof, by Viggo Bendz, M. D. 
— The Mysterious Soul-Power or Will-Power; also Called Telepathy or 
Mental Telegraphy — Telepathy 137-178 

CHAPTER XI, — Natural Somnambulism or Sleep -Walking. — The Different 
States of Somnambulism and the Phenomena in Relation thereto — Idio-Som- 
nambulism — The Oracle and the Delphian Cavern — The Different Preparations 
Used— Partly from an Ancient Author — Nitrous Oxide— The Effect of Its 
Inhalation — The Different States or Degrees of Somnambulism in Connection 
with Those of Natural Sleep — The Influence of Music on the Somnambulist — 
Interesting Experiments — The Instinct of the Somnambulist — Somnambulism 
and Its Peculiarities — The Strange Effect of Spontaneous Somnambulism on 
Peculiar Individuals— Sleep-Walking, by D. Hack Tuke, M. D., LL. D., 
London — Also by James Esdaile, M. D., Civil Assistant Surgeon, U. C. S., 
Bengal, India — Also by Winhart, the Well-Known German Physician and 
Scientist — Freak of a Somnambulist — He Gets His Knife and Starts to Dissect 
His Room-mate while Asleep 179-234 

CHAPTER XII. — Introduction of Hypnotism in Chicago. — Hypnotism 
Introduced Into Well- Known Chicago Residences — It is Now Appreciated and 
Understood, Not Merely as a Means of Entertainment; but It is also Recog- 
nized and Recommended as a Method by which Numerous Diseases are Cured 
— Interesting Cases Present Themselves Daily at my Office — People Wish, not 
Merely Treatment for Troublesome Diseases, but also Apply in Order to Have 
Their Talents Developed Through Hypnotic Influence — Generally Very Excel- 
lent Results are Reached — Peculiar Double State During the Hypnotic 
Condition — The Facts Show that the Majority of People Can Be Hypnotized — 
If not Immediately, by the First Attempt, They Can Always Be More or Less 
Influenced by Repeated Experiments — At Least Sixty Per Cent. Can Be Hyp- 
notized if the Right Method is Employed and the Party Concerned is Willing — 
Young and Vigorous People in General are More Susceptible to Hypnotism — 
Even in the Nineteenth Century "We Find People in Chicago Who Consider 
Hypnotism Demoniacal — The Visible Symptoms in Partial and Perfect Hypnose. 235-278 

PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS-a^o Herald, January 26, 1890— Chicago 
Sunday Press, November 22, 1891 — Chicago Sunday Tribune, February 23, 1890 
— Progressive Thinker, June 11, 1892 — Sunday Liter Ocean, January 19, 1890 — 
The Germania Monthly Magazhie, March 7, i8go—Religio-Philosqphical Jour- 
nal, February 13, 1892 — Progressive Thinker, January 28, 1892 — Nordisk Folke- 
blad, February 23, 1890— Chicago Inter Ocean, May 9, 1889— Chicago Daily 
Herald, February 7, 1890— Progressive Thinker, February 6, 1892 — Chicago 
Sunday Herald, August 17, 1890— Daily Skandinaven, February 23, 1889 — 
Chicago Illustreret Ugeblad, February 28, 1889 279-304 



LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 

PAGE 

Carl Sextus (Portrait) Frontispiece. 

Anton Mesmer (Portrait) 1 1 

Father Gassner as a Hypnotist 13 

Polished Horn with Glass Prism in the Center 14 

Zinc Button with a Copper Wire Through the Center 14 

A Practical Modern Method 15 

The Ideal-Fascinator of the Middle Ages 16 

The Old Fascinating Method. The Puyseguarian Method 17 

Hypnotized Lobster— Cataleptic State 21 

Hypnotized Hen — Lethargic State 22 

Hypnotized Hen — Cataleptic State 1 23 

Hunter Hypnotizing (Charming) a Snake 24 

A Hypnotized Tea Party 26 

Prof. Carl Hanson, Hypnotist (Portrait) 2S 

Dr. John Bovee Dodds, Hypnotist (Portrait) 30 

Catalepsy in Eyelids and Hands, Cannot Close the Eyelids and Cannot Open the Hands 35 

The Symbol 37 

Hypnotism at Hospital de la Charite 39 

Self -Induced Trance 41 

M. Liebault, Professor of Physiology of Nancy University, France (Portrait) 42 

The Original Home of Hypnotism 44 

Experimental Hypnotism at la Salpetriere 45 

Pater Faria (The Brahmin) Giving a Hypnotic Seance in Paris 47 

Prof. J. M. Charcot (Portrait) 54 

Persian Magic Mirror 58 

Cabalistic Magic Mirror 59 

Chiron Fascinating Esculapius, B. C. 92S 61 

Hysterical Cataleptic 62 

Mr. F. W. H. Myers, Secretary of the Society of Psychical Research, London, Eng. 

(Portrait) 83 

The Magic Krystal. From a Painting by Mr. Frank Dicksee, R. A., in the Royal 

English Academy 86 

Magic Mirror 89 

India. — Past Ideal Home of Hypnotism, Present Home of Ideal Hypnotism 97 

Bunch of Magnetic Rods, for Passes Over the Body— After Mesmer's Model 109 

Egyptian Cabalistic Magic Mirror 114 

Modern Manipulations .' 116 

Oriental Manipulations— After the Bath 1 iS 

Japanese Magnetic Healer 120 

The Good Samaritan Pouring Wine and Oil on the Wounds— With Manipulations 122 

Dr. Albert Reibmayr's Method— Vienna 123 

Charming Wisely— Frank Kerr and His Snakes 12S 

The Moorish Horse Fascinator Hypnotizing the Horse 131 



Vlll LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 

PAGE 

An Egyptian Snake Charmer 133 

Brazilian Turtle Charmer „ 135 

Viggo Bendz, M. D 165 

Prof. R. A. Campbell (Portrait) . 171 

A Sleep-Walker 180 

A Sleep- Walker Carefully Avoiding the Water-Tub Placed at His Bedside 184 

Dreaming About the Moon 188 

Supposed Witches in Auto-Hypnotic Somnambulistic State 190 

In Ecstacy — Believing Themselves Flying Through the Air on Broomsticks and 

Having Communications with Satan 191 

Flying Witches 193-194 

Pythia, the Delphian Oracle, Seated on the Tripod Over the Sacred Cavern 197 

Somnambulist — Playing While Asleep 201 

Somnambulist — A Judge Tries a Case While Asleep . 203 

Hypnotic Seance at the Residence of Mr. Robert Lindblom — The Fascinated Subject 

Following the Movements of the Operator's Hand 236 

The Subject Has Forgotten Her Name 238 

Drawing the Subject Backwards 240 

Unconscious Self -Induced Trance 243 

Pleasing Effect of the North Pole of a Magnet. Dr. Luy's Experiment in Hypnotism. 245 

Hypnotizing by Passes Only, Without Touching the Subject 246 

The Subject Cannot Strike 247 

Telling of the Absent 248 

Imitating the Hypnotist 251 

Charcot Lecturing upon Hypnotism 254 

Dr. Charcot Experimenting in Hypnotism at the La Salpetriere 257 

Major Jno. C. Bundy 263 

The Orator 265 

Face Muscles Cataleptic— Cannot Close Their Mouths 267 

These Colored Subjects Had It Suggested to Them, While in a Hypnotic State, that at 
a Certain Time in the Future, When They were Seemingly Awake, They Could 
Wash Themselves White with a Cake of Soap. They are Now Carrying Out that 

Suggestion, Much to the Amusement of Their Associates 275 

From Lethargy to Catalepsy , 282 

The Somnambulic State 2S3 

Cataleptic and Somnambulic 284 

Thought It Smelled Sweetly 286 

A Cataleptic Hand 287 

Believes Himself a Cripple , - 288 




PUYSEGURIAN SOnNAMBULISM. 

HYPNOTIC SCIENCE SOME FACTS RELAT- 

ITS DISCOVERY AND SUBSEQUENT 

VELOPMENT HOW SUBJECTS ARE IN- 

D THE TESTS THE CURIOSITIES 

SOMNAMBULISM AS DEVELOPED BY 

HYPNOTISTS ITS USE AND ABUSE 

GASSNER AS A HYPNOTIST. 



FLUENCE 



"There are more things in heaven and earth, Horatio, 
Than are dreamt of in your philosophy."— HAMLET. 

It is to one of Mesmer's disciples, the French Marquis 
Armond Jacques Marc Chastend dePuysdgur, that the discovery 
of animal magnetism, or artificial somnambulism, properly be- 
longs ; and it ought, therefore, to bear the name of Puysegurian 
Somnambulism. In May, 1784, M.de Puysegur, living in retire- 
ment on his estates at Buzancy, near Soessons, employed his 
leisure in magnetizing peasants, after the manner of his master, 
and on one occasion he chanced to observe the production of an 
entirely new phenomenon. A young peasant named Victor, 23 
years of age, who had been suffering four days from inflam- 
mation of the lungs, was magnetized into a peaceful sleep, un- 
accompanied by convulsions or other suffering. While in that 
condition he spoke aloud, and his mind was busied about his 
private affairs. It was easy to change the direction of his 



IO PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 

thoughts, and to inspire him with cheerful sentiments — when he 
became happy, and imagined that he was engaged in rifle prac- 
tice, or that he was dancing at a village fete. 

In his normal condition he was simple and foolish, but during 
the crisis his intelligence was remarkable ; there was no need of 
speaking to him to enable him to understand and reply to the 
thoughts of those present. He himself indicated the treatment 
necessary for his illness ; and he was soon cured. 

This is a brief account of Peasant Victor's case. The news 
of his recovery was rapidly spread abroad, and from all sides 
there came a large number of sick people demanding relief. 

The phenomenon was repeated, to the physician's delight, 
and he wrote : " My head is turned with joy, now that I see 
what good I am doing." 

Dr. Frederick Anton Mesmer of Switzerland, who, in Paris, 
performed a number of- cures, and caused an immense sensation, 
nevertheless performed his cures in such an extreme manner 
that they frequently resulted in causing a hysterical condition. 
The state into which his patients were brought was different 
from the placid, pleasant, refreshing somnambulistic state that 
Puysegur produced on his patients; and their method of pro- 
cedure were also very different. 

Mesmer did all in his power to produce an ecstatic condition 
or crisis, for through that he was able to cure; while Puysegur 
after having by his manipulations discovered somnambulism, did 
all in his power to avoid a crisis. 

It is possible that Mesmer also was acquainted with the state 
Puysegur produced, but it is a fact that Mesmer never employed 
it in his practice ; and he never informed anyone of his knowl- 
edge thereof. 

Puysegur was the first who brought this discovery before 
the great public. He also taught several of his disciples the same 
method; consequently, in justice to Puysegur, he should be 
credited with the discovery of Puysegurian Somnambulism. 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 



I I 



At the time that attention was being called to Mesmer and 
Puysegur there appeared in Southern Germany Father Gassner, 
a Jesuit priest, who effected some wonderful cures. His method 
consisted of the patient being ushered into a semi-dark room, 
and then, from a portiere, Father Gassner emerged with out- 
stretched hands, carrying the crucifix held aloft. Directing his 
gaze sharply on the patient, he exclaimed in thundering tones 
in Latin: 




ANTON MESMER. 

"Detur mihi evidens signum prcestigice praeternaturalis ^ 
frczcipio hoc in nomine yesu ! " — If the individual was at all 
susceptible he would fall into the crisis or unconscious state. 

At a seance given by Father Gassner he treated a young 
woman, and by means of his strong voice, his commanding tones 
pronouncing his string of Latin words, his penetrating look and 
his raised crucifix, he put her in a complete condition a la Mes- 
mer. His proper experiments now commenced. He cried out, 
"Agitetur brachium sinistrum ! " As he commanded, her left 



12 PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 

arm commenced to move, at first slower, then faster. The 
father cried out, "cesset ! " and the arm suddenly become still. 
"Agitetur caput!" — The woman flung her head to both sides. 
Then the father raised the crucifix again. The consequence of 
this was that she made the most terrible grimaces, and she 
jumped around in the room as one possessed. Suddenly the 
father pronounced "cesset ! " and she became still again. Father 
Gassner commanded her to speak Latin. She answered: "JVon 
possum" (I can't). He commanded ' that her pulse shall beat 
very slow. Hofmedicus Bottinger from Mergenthal, examined 
the pulse, and he declared that it was beating very slowly. 
Father Gassner commanded the pulse to beat very quickly, and 
certainly it was increased to fifty beats in the minute more than 
normal (normal beating is about eighty). After that the father 
commanded her to be very quiet, feel well, not to speak, not to 
move the muscles of the face, and also to lie down on the floor 
to die, slowly, little by little, but only for a short time, when he 
would call her back to life. Her pulse beat slower and slower, 
until it could no longer be felt. After a short time of this pro- 
cedure, as commanded, she appeared dead. Everyone present 
pressed around her to examine her pulse. " She is entirely 
dead," one of them cried out. " Look at the death sweat," said 
another. " The pulse no longer beats," said Hofmedicus Bot- 
tinger. After a few minutes Father Gassner cried out with a 
voice of thunder, " But now I command you in the Lord's name 
to return to life." A new examination by Hofmedicus Bottinger 
showed that the pulse had commenced to beat. Her features 
were relaxing. She commenced to move, and at last raising 
herself with a glad and delighted face, she declared that she felt 
herself released from all those pains she had before the treat- 
ment, and that she now felt herself entirely well. As we will 
see Father Gassner was a cunning hypnotist. He knew how 
to capture the public with his miracles. The good people he 
treated did not know that it was but simple hypnotism. It was 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 



<3 



very natural that the young girl and several others he treated 
should understand his Latin, as she had been educated in the 
cloister. Occasionally he spoke German (the priest was Ger- 



r T -^ 



m 

T2m 



p-^m 






Mm 




^\0f^ 



FATHER GASSNER AS A HYPNOTIST. 

man). Gassner was a very wise man, much ahead of his time, 
and he took advantage of it. Among the many powerful men. 



H 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 



who signed the narrative of this seance, I will especially men- 
tion Carl Albrecht, Prince of Hohenlohe-Waldenburg ; Ludvig 
Eugene, Duke of Wurtemberg; and Ludvig Joseph, Bishop of 
Freisingen. 

DIFFERENT METHODS OF HYPNOTIZING. 

If I wish to hypnotize a class, or to try a larger number, I 
use a zinc button with a copper wire through the centre, which 
I request the individual to hold in his closed right hand, resting 
the hand on the right knee. In the left hand, which he holds 
open, I place a small crystal, set in horn, that is polished to a 
shining black, the left arm and hand resting partly on the chest. 





POLISHED HORN WITH GLASS 
PRISM IN THE CENTER. 



ZINC BUTTON WITH A COP- 
PER WIRE THROUGH THE 
CENTER. 



The subject is requested to gaze continually and intently on the 
crystal prism, and not to undertake any motions whatever, keep- 
ing the same position in which I place him, and to fix his whole 
attention on sleep. After a lapse of seven or eight minutes I 
commence to make my passes over the subject; at the end of 
two or three manipulations I command him to close his eyes; I 
perform one or two passes more, from the head downward to 
the knee ; placing my left hand on his forehead, then press a cer- 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 



l 5 



tain place with my thumb, at the same time pressing with my 
right hand the subject's right thumb. 

Another and very effective method, one I often employ 
when I hypnotize one person — singly, is to let the subject gaze 
fixedly at a lighted candle for about three minutes, held at such 
a height that it requires considerable effort on the part of the 
subject to look at it. The subject must not wink the eyelids 
any more than is absolutely necessary, and must draw the breath 




A PRACTICAL MODERN METHOD. 

deep and in a measured time. The subject is told before com- 
mencing to hold the mouth open about one inch, with the tongue 
curved, the tip resting parallel with the lower teeth. At the end 
pf about three minutes I raise the left hand over the back part 
of the subject's head, and with my fingers spread apart, make 
two or three passes downward along the spinal nerves, after 



16 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 



which I command the subject to close the eyes. I then perform 
one or two more manipulations until full sleep is secured. 

My third method is the fascinating method, which consists 
principally in making the subject press his hands strongly on 
mine. Suddenly I push him backward and quickly glance into 
his eyes. Surprised he recoils, and immediately the impression 
of his eyes indicates to me his degree of susceptibility. The 
subject understands by the sternness of the hypnotist's eyes on 




THE IDEAL. FASCINNATOR OF THE MIDDLE AGES. 



his that his eyes must remain attached to the operator's, and 
follow them everywhere. He thinks himself drawn toward 
him ; it is a psychical suggestive fascination, and in no wise 
physical. 

There is also the Donato method. The subject is asked to 
kneel before the operator, and to look steadily into his eyes. 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 



l 7 



Standing before him the operator places his hand on the sub- 
ject's forehead, and inclines his head slightly backward. As 
soon as he tries to straighten forward he directs at the subject's 
eyes an imperative glance which, if he is susceptible to his in- 
fluence, hypnotizes him. 

If sensitive persons are experimented with they can also* be 
brought into the hypnotic state by having them occupy a com- 
fortable position, closing the eyes, and keeping the right hand 




THE OLD FASCINATING METHOD. THE PUYSEGURIAN 
METHOD. 

closed tightly around their own left wrists. Then perform manip- 
ulations from the head downward to the feet, for about ten to 
fifteen minutes. 

These are the visible agencies by which the operator pro- 
duces hypnotism ; and it may seem very easy ; but often it is 



l8 PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 

very difficult to produce hypnosis if the conditions are un- 
favorable. 

It follows, as a matter of course, that the one who wishes to 
be hypnotized must give himself up completely to the operator, 
and consequently follow the operator's instructions, and not en- 
deavor to work against sleep when it commences to make its 
appearance. 

Everybody can not be a hypnotist. To be one requires a 
strong and sound constitution, a determined will, and a large 
practice to learn to concentrate that will. 

There are, of course, a number of people who possess con- 
siderable power in that line if they had it developed properly ; 
and many would only waste their time by devoting themselves 
exclusively to hypnotism ; because if one does not possess spe- 
cial ability in that direction it will avail but little to attempt it. 
A person can not make an excellent musician, singer or author 
by practice simply; he must necessarily have some talent as a 
foundation upon which to build. 

During a hypnotizing it is necessary to have perfect silence 
in the room where the seance is held ; the temperature must be 
moderate and normal ; and under no circumstances should there 
be any draft or tobacco odor. 

THE DIFFERENT DEGREES OF HYPNOTISM. 

The first degree of hypnotism is somnolence, recognizable 
by a feeling of numbness in the body, and light, stupefying 
symptoms in the head. 

The second degree is light 'sleep. Persons in this state of 
hypnose still hear everything that is said in their presence, and 
have not altogether lost the sense of feeling. 

The third degree is deep sleep. The subject on being 
awakened remembers what has been suggested to him and per- 
formed by him during the sleep. 

The fourth degree is very deep sleep. The subject's own 
individuality is completely isolated. He is only en rapport with 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 19 

the hypnotist. The fifth degree is catalepsy. In this state the 
hypnotist produces catalepsy in one certain muscle, or certain 
part of the body where he desires catalepsy or lameness to ap- 
pear. 

The sixth degree is somnambulism. This condition presents, 
besides the former degrees of phenomena strengthened, also a 
number of varied symptoms. In this state clairvoyance is often 
developed. 

It is needless to remark that it requires an expert to be able 
immediately to discern the different conditions, and by his 
knowledge of the science to understand how to bring the sub- 
ject easily from one state to the other. This knowledge is espe- 
cially beneficial to the hypnotist or physician who intends to 
employ hypnotism in the curing of disease. There it depends 
largely on producing the conditions best adapted to the patient's 
complaint, and in knowing the moment most opportune to give 
suggestions, which are used in the majority of cases. 

Regarding the susceptibility of hypnotic influence, it is very 
interesting to note the great differences in the percentage of 
nationalties. The first on the list to be mentioned are the French, 
with about fifty per cent.; next come the English and Scandin- 
avians with about forty per cent. ; Germans about twenty-five 
per cent. ; while of the Dutch there are only fifteen per cent. A 
very susceptible nation, although far up north, are the inhabit- 
ants of the Hundred Islands. I have found that about forty per 
cent, of the Finlanders can be influenced. The conditions of the 
climate, the mode of living and degree of civilization certainly 
play a prominent part. The Latin races are more easily in- 
fluenced than the Teutonic races. The Sout 1 Americans are 
more susceptible than the North Americans. In the eastern 
countries, especially in the East Indies, the susceptibility is 
larger than in any other country on the earth ; in fact the people 
there are all susceptible to hypnotic influence. This we must 
attribute partly to their tender, dreaming disposition, and partly 



20 PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 

to their climate and their entire mode of living, as well as to 
their education. 

The fakirs of India have great dexterity in hypnotizing ; but 
then it is an art which they have practiced and cultivated for sev- 
eral thousand years, while we have advanced in practical know- 
ledge and invented railroads, steamers, telegraphs and telephones. 

While the inhabitants of the East Indies never waste a 
thought on such matters as accumulating money, they cultivate 
their occult sciences and never think of to-morrow. They en- 
tertain positive scorn for all earthly goods. 

THE HINDOO SCIENCE. 

To be sure we do not possess the two thousand years' ex- 
perience which the Hindoos have. The peculiar rules and doc- 
trines of the hypnotizers, the Yogis, are laid down in several 
holy books, especially in the old Sanscrit work, the "Yoga 
Satra." However, there have been a few Europeans who pos- 
sessed singular talent in that direction, and during several years 
stay and association with these learned men of India, they be- 
came initiated into all the mysteries of those who were there the 
cause of creating wonder and astonishment throughout the mod- 
ern world of Europe, such as, for example, the Count de Saint 
Germain. 

HOW TO HYPNOTIZE ANIMALS. 

That the majority of animals can be hypnotized is some- 
thing a number of people have only a very limited knowledge 
of, although it is easily done, and also of great interest to all 
who think seriously on such matters — especially for scientists. 
I have experimented with quite a number of the larger ani- 
mals, such as horses and dogs, and always had complete suc- 
cess. Some animals can easily be brought into the hypnotic 
state. This has long been known. The bringing of animals 
into the hypnotic condition is easily accomplished, because the 
methods are very practical ; we can almost call them mechani- 
cal. They immediately produce their effect; it is not neces- 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 21 

sary to follow all the rules such as for hypnotizing- people. So 
far as some of the animals are concerned, it evidently plays a 
prominent part that they have a great respect for us, who at all 
events to a certain extent are the animals' god, As early as 
1646, Father Athanasius Kircher relates in a book entitled 
u Ars Magna Lucis et Umbi'ce" that if a cock with his legs 
tied together be placed before a line made upon the floor with 



HYPNOTIZED LOBSTER CATALEPTIC STATE. 

white chalk, he becomes at the end of a few moments perfectly 
motionless ; if the string be untied and he is excited, he does 
not issue from the cataleptic state. This experiment may be 
of still earlier date, since it has been ascribed to Daniel Schreuter 
(1636). However this may be, in many countries the hypno- 
tization of poultry became a source of popular amusement. 



22 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 



In 1S72, Czermark carefully repeated these experiments; he 
hypnotized a cock without making use of the chalk line, keep- 
ing the animal immovable. He extended the experiments to other 
animals, to sparrows, pigeons, rabbits, salamanders and crabs. 

Preyer, of the University of Jena (Germany,) whose treatise 
on the subject is the most complete that we possess, ascribed 
most of the phenomena observed under the conditions to fear. 
For instance, if a lizard's tail or a frog's foot is suddenly 
pinched, the animal becomes paralyzed, sometimes for several 
minutes, and is incapable of moving its limbs. Gentle and pro- 
tracted excitement is needed to effect hypnosis of animals. 




HYPNOTIZED HEN LETHARGIC STATE. 

If the nostrils of a guinea pig are kept for some time slightly 
compressed with a pair of pincers, the animal becomes hyp- 
notic, and is thrown into such a stupor that it can be placed in 
the most ridiculous position without being awakened. This 
arbitrary distinction between catalepsy and hypnotism has not 
been generally accepted. We need only note that many 
animals can be hypnotized either by a brief or strong excite- 
ment of the skin, or by a repeated and fainter action of the 
same kind. The experiments on the frog are interesting and 
easy to reproduce. Henkel has shown that if a lively frog is 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 



2 3 



lightly held between the fingers, with the thumb on the belly 
and the four fingers on the back, the animal becomes perfectly 
motionless at the end of two or three minutes ; it may be 
stretched upon its back or placed in all sorts of positions with- 
out making any attempts at defense or escape. 

The same paralytic state may be produced by gently scratch- 
ing the frog's back. If a pigeon is placed on its left side and 
held in that position a couple of minutes, it will then remain 
motionless until released from the position in which it was 
placed. 




HYPNOTIZED HEN CATALEPTIC STATE. 

Another curious practice is : When a hen has laid a number 
of eggs in a nest of her own selection and has begun to sit 
and there is any reason for transferring her to any other nest, 
the hen's head is put under her wing and she is swung to and 
fro until she is put to sleep. This is soon done ; and she is then 
placed in the nest designed for her ; when she awakes she has 
no recollection of her own nest and readily adopts the strange 
eggs. By means of this process hens may sometimes be made 
to sit which have previously shown a disinclination to do so. 
This modification of instinct by suggestion seems to show that 



24 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 




HUNTER HYPNOTIZING (CHARMING) A SNAKE. 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 25 

the educational use of suggestion is not ( so absurd as some 
authors assert it to be. Some species of snakes are put in a 
cataleptic state by a suddenly light touch of a stick or by 
light pressure between the fingers on the neck. The interest- 
ing experiment the author has performed when a school-boy. 
This cataleptic condition will cease by blowing on the neck of 
the snake. (The reader will remember the same method of 
blowing is used in relieving a hypnotic person of the catalep- 
tic state.) 

The snake represented in the illustration is not venomous, 
and is found generally in northern Europe. In the Scandina- 
vian countries it is called " steel-snake," on account of getting 
into this peculiar condition. If hit too hard it will go to 
pieces like glass. 

That a number of people can be hypnotized at the same 
time you will see by the following instantaneous photograph 
representing a tea-party, where the ladies are brought from 
the somnambulistic into the cataleptic state by a word, or by a 
motion of my hands. They remain as motionless as statues in 
the position they were when I induced catalepsy. The sub- 
jects retain the same position until by an exclamation or motion 
I release them. In the above condition subjects are always 
found to be unconscious and so completely under control that 
a lighted candle can be held very close to the open eye without 
any winking of the eyelids or contraction whatever of the 
pupils of the eye, which in a normal condition would occur 
immediately. I will here remark that to produce phenomena 
of a similar nature on several persons at the same time and 
without any wavering on the part of the hypnotist it is neces- 
sary on several previous occasions to have tested and thereby 
ascertained the subject's susceptibility to hypnotic influence, 
also that the operator can, during the hypnosis, bring the sub- 
ject from one state into the other where the deeper degrees of 
sleep are produced. 



26 



PUYSKGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 



SIGN OF THE HYPNOTIC STATE. 

The most usual sign of this state is as follows : The eye< 
balls generally turn slightly upward, the breathing has a labor- 




A HYPNOTIZED TEA PARTY. 



ous sound, the hands and forehead being a little cold, other- 
wise nothing abnormal. Usually the temperature rises, and 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 27 

the pulse accelerates about 10 beats per minute. The phenome- 
non is interesting ; in fact, it is remarkable. 

Let us bear in mind the famous scene in Macbeth ; 

Doctor : You see, her eyes are open. 

Gentlemen : Ay, but their sense is shut. 

As we know it was toward the end of the last century that 
Mesmer discovered the germs of a science which is still in 
embryo, but which had already been perceived by Maxwell in 
1673, by Paracelsus in the sixteenth century, and by Van Hel- 
mont in 1630. [Anton Mesmer was by nature a very liberal 
man, and cured numerous poor people gratis, although by his 
colleagues he was often unjustly criticised. J Count de Saint Ger- 
main was in 1769 appointed French Minister and Ambassador 
to Copenhagen, Denmark. Reports about this peculiar indi- 
vidual said that he was not only a clever diplomat, but also 
possessed a power to fascinate people, could heal diseased 
parts by the touch of his hand, and at times was capable of 
placing himself in a clairvoyant state. 

THE ADVANCE OF THE SCIENCE. 

But in spite of the efforts of the pioneers in favor of hyp- 
notism, as well as Mesmer's and Puysegur's persevering 
efforts later on to bring hypnotism to its proper use , hypno- 
tism seemed to have been partly forgotten, when the French 
physicians, Du Patet in 1821, and De Foissac in 1825, brought 
the subject up again, by employing hypnotism largely in their 
practice. Then hypnotism again dropped into oblivion for a 
number of years. 

The next one to call attention to it was Dr. James Braid, a 
surgeon of Manchester, England. After incredulously wit- 
nessing experiments, 1841, by La Fontaine, a French traveling 
hypnotist, he became interested in the science, and later on 
employed hypnotism in all cases possible. 

Following his example, came Dr. Esdaile, Presidency Sur- 
geon of Bengal, at Calcutta, who employed hypnotism in 



28 PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 

nearly all his operations upon the natives for six years, ending 
1 85 1. He performed no less than 256 operations, some of 
them being very dangerous. 

Mr. Carl Hansen, the well-known Danish hypnotist, was 
born in Odense, Denmark, in 1833. As a boy he magnetized 
others, an ability which he inherited from his mother. When 
a youth of sixteen years he went to Copenhagen, where he 
continued his experiments. He relates that he often succeeded 
in transferring his own thoughts and ideas to the subject while 
he was in normal sleep; so that he dreamt exactly the same 
that Hansen was thinking of. In 1853 Hansen went to Aus- 
tralia and thence to Mauritius and the Capeland, Africa. 
Originally he was a business man; but he sometimes experi- 
mented both in public and in private ; and in the above named 
places he founded societies for hypnotism. In 1863 ne returned 
to Denmark, and gave public seances — first in Copenhagen, 
and later on in Sweden, Holland, France, Belgium and Russia. 
Finally he went to Germany, and though he met with oppo- 
sition in many places, he at last succeeded in convincing many 
scientists, psychologists and physicians, Thiers and Zollner in 
Leipzic, Mathieson in Rostock, Weiggert, Freckner etc., 
that he was no pretender. In Greifswalde he engaged a hall 
in which he was going to give his lecture and seance. There 
was a crowd of students who crowded the hall, and when 
Hansen commenced his seance with some introductory remarks 
about hypnotism, they greeted him with laughter and scorn- 
ful shouts. He then said that he always preferred to show his 
experiments in university towns, because in those places he 
could reckon upon a good reception from the students, as they, 
for the sake of science, listened with careful interest. " But after 
this reception," he added ironically, " I have reason to suppose 
that the semesters are closed, and only a few students are pres- 
ent here to-night." Those words caused, of course, the great- 
est exasperation. They undertook to drive him away ; but he 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 29 

induced a couple of those who made the most noise to come 
upon the platform and submit to his method of inducing the 
hypnotic condition; A tall fat fellow, who had been the 
worst of them, was soon brought under Hansen's influence; 
and he made him in return pass through the whole series of the 
well known experiments, such as eating potatoes as apples, 
dance a polka, dandle a bundle of clothes as if it were a little 
baby, and finally to beg pardon for his foolish behavior. I 
regard it unnecessary to state that the humor of the audience 
turned to the advantage of the magnetist. 

Mr. Hansen, my countryman, is not only a skillful magne- 
tizer, but he is, at the same time, an amiable gentleman. I 
have several times during my travels had the pleasure of meet- 
ing this distinguished colleague in the field of hypnotism ; and 
I have then had opportunity to enter with him upon many an 
interesting conversation from which I have derived much inter- 
esting and valuable knowledge. 

The well known English physician, Hack Tuke, studied 
with great interest Carl Hansen's experiments, and described 
them in his book about "Natural and Artificial Somnambulism." 
„ Hypnotism received an effectual advance when the prominent 
Parisian, Dr. Charcot, after Hansen's seances in 1S69, in Paris 
began his investigations that later on proved to be so satisfac- 
tory, that he employed hypnotism at his hospital, La Salpetriere, 
where he performed cures by the thousand. As especially de- 
serving mention, I name Professor Liebault, professor of phy- 
siology; Ch. Richet, Professor Bernheim, Beaunes, Delboeuf , 
Berjon, Facachan, Mabille, Liegeois, Forel, Bremaund, Chas. 
Fere, Alfred Binet. In America, Wm. B. Fahnstock, M. 
D., and the celebrated New York physician, Hammond, 
and John Bovee Dods, who, in 1850, gave a series 
of lectures on Hypnotism in the House of Representatives, 
Washington, D. C. The works of Charles Richet, 1875, also 
Charcot, 1S78, Paris, France, regarding hypnotism, were 



30 PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 

the cause of considerable interest throughout the whole scien- 
tific world. 

We are now justified in saying that hypnotism is established 
and not to be abandoned as long as science exists. 

The German physicians, R. Hajdenhain in 1880, Gruntzen 
and Bergen in 1S81, were awakened to the value and interest 
of hypnotism by Carl Hansen's seances in Leipsic, Breslau, 
Berlin, and other cities. 

The reason why hypnotism has become properly recognized 
within the last twenty years, is that several scientists have 
adopted the science with great alacrity. Those few who in 
olden time practiced hypnotism were unjustly criticised and 
ridiculed, even to the extent of being completely shunned by 
some of their colleagues. 

Now, I am happy to say in that regard, times have changed 
for the better. It is no longer a crime to heal by hypnotism. 
But it also requires a great deal of earnest study, energy, and a 
fair amount of natural qualification. 

A fact that is not generally known is that not everybody 
possesses the gift to become a competent hypnotist, although at 
the present time, having the knowledge of the science through 
popular works and close study of the phenomena by practical 
hypnotists, including some hospitals in Europe, the physicians 
have numerous opportunities to ascertain the secrets of hypno- 
tism. In practical, skeptical America, the physicians have now 
commenced to evince more interest in this science. It has 
pleased me to note reports in scientific journals in regard to 
remarkable cures performed through hypnotism. 

I can readily comprehend how many of the conservative doc- 
tors do not follow the progress this science has made with very 
pleasant feelings. It is always unpleasant for certain people to 
recognize what they cannot perform themselves, and as before 
mentioned, not every one can become a hypnotist, be he an M. 
D. or not, if he is without the necessary natural qualifications. 



PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 31 

Such conditions have made it very difficult to introduce hyp- 
notism, although during my four year's stay here in America 
I have personally had the satisfaction of curing a large number 
of sufferers through hypnotism, and when the patients had 
been unable to derive any benefit from medical aid. 

TREATMENT OF DISEASES. 

The diseases for the treatment of which hypnotism is espe- 
cially adapted are neuralgia, insomnia, sick headache, morphine, 
alcohol and opium habit, etc. 

To the sensation my cures have caused in Northern Europe, 
the local medical journals can testify. While in Europe I was 
called on to treat a member of the royal family, and cured 
the patient successfully of a very disagreeable nervous disease, 
in which case medicine was proven to have no effect. 

I had also the satisfaction of being the means of introducing 
hypnotism in Sweden, 1SS3-S4, where Chief Royal Librarian 
C. F. Klemming, Professor Anton Nystrom, M. D., and others 
were the first to study and adopt my method. In Norway, 
1885, I also aroused the interest of physicians. 

In my native country, Denmark, in 18S6-87-8S, my seances 
also inspired enthusiasm for the art, and I taught some very 
prominent physicians there — among them George Lutkin, 
M. D., Viggo Bendz, M. D., and Herman Schwartz, M. D. 
Hypnotism is there, as in France, employed extensively. 

During the last thirteen years, devoted entirely to the science 
of hypnotism, I have succeeded in curing thousands of cases. 

The great danger with which hypnotism is believed to be 
attended or followed is ridiculously exaggerated, and the reason 
is, I think, that many of those who have written on this subject 
have had very little practical knowledge of it. 

There is no danger whatever in hypnotism when the hyp- 
notist makes it a positive rule never to hypnotize anybody unless 
friends or relatives of the subject are present as witnesses, in. a 



32 PUYSEGURIAN SOMNAMBULISM. 

position to control what occurs and note the suggestions given 
to the subject. 

I will here state to all those timid individuals that hypnotic 
conditions cannot be used as a mask by the hypnotist to commit 
crimes against humanity, as people usually believe. Because it 
is a fact that even if the subjects are in the deepest degree of 
sleep, they cannot be compelled to do anything immoral or 
criminal — if the subject is an honest and upright person. The 
above has been proven by numerous experiments, and the sub- 
jects who are hypnotized positively refuse to obey where it is 
against their own morals and character. 

They will even awaken if anything very disagreeable is 
suggested. 

Another very effectual rule can be followed to the satisfac- 
tion of those hypnotized, namely, to limit the hypnotist's power. 
Let him give the subject a suggestion during the hypnotic 
sleep. " You shall never be placed under my control without 
being perfectly willing, as in case of sickness should you desire 
it ; otherwise it will be impossible for me or any other hypnotist 
to hypnotize you." 

After such suggestions it is an absolute impossibility to hyp- 
notize the person, even by employing the most effectual meth- 
ods, without his or her perfect willingness to be influenced. 

In conclusion, remember what Colton Lacon says: The 
greatest friend to truth is time, her greatest enemy is prejudice, 
and her constant co?nj>anion is humility. 






CHAPTER II. 



HYPNOTISn AS A REMEDY. 

ITS DEVELOPMENT AS A SCIENCE CURES CLAIMED TO BE 

EFFECTED WHERE ORDINARY MEDICAL SKILL WAS 

IMPOTENT CURIOUS LIMITATIONS OF THE 

OPERATOR'S POWER OPINIONS OF 

SPECIALISTS PATER FARIA 

AS A HYPNOTIST. 

Hypnotism (from the Greek word hypnos, sleep) is the 
science of the sleep-like state which is manifested by various 
phenomena, and is produced by a special influence on the 
nervous system exerted by another, and also, though more 
rarely, by spontaneous action. 

To put anyone into such a state is to hypnotize that one. 
The sleeper is hypnotized, is in hypnosis, is in the hypnotic 
state. 

It was James Braid, M. D., the celebrated Manchester sur- 
geon and eye specialist, "who named the science. During his 
investigations in mesmerism he succeeded in accomplishing 
a number of phenomena similar to those until then called mes- 
merism, after Frederik Anton Mesmer, but which Braid called 
by the new name of hypnotism. He commenced his investi- 
gations in November, 1841, but did not publish the results 
until 1843. 

Following came Dr. Azam, teacher at the school of medicine 
in Bordeaux, France, who published a work on hypnotism in 
i860. Dr. Azam had his results witnessed by two of his 

33 



34 HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 

friends, Broca and Verneuil, who were members of the scien- 
tific faculty in Paris, and who later on achieved great fame. 
Singular as it may seem, it was by means of this new name 
that the science gained a new entrance into France, hypno- 
tism's original home. In June, 1859, ^ r * Azam was called to 
attend a young lady who was supposed to have attacks of 
insanity, and who displayed peculiar symptoms of spontaneous 
catalepsy, anasthesia and hyperesthesia. He exhibited the 
patient to several physicians. One of them, Dr. Baving, said 
that he, in an article about sleep, had read that the English sur- 
geon, Braid, had discovered a remedy by which he could produce 
symptoms that were analogous to those noticed in the hysteri- 
cal young lady. Azam procured Braid's Neurypnology, and 
commenced a number of experiments that placed him in a 
position to duplicate the results accomplished by Braid. 

It must be remarked here that fortune especially favored 
him, for his subject proved to be of an unusually susceptible 
temperament. He succeded in curing her according to Braid's 
method, and this encouraged him to further experiments in that 
direction. 

Between 1843 and 1878 there was published, besides Braid's 
and Azam's memoirs, a number of excellent works, of which 
I will especially mention Phillip's, De Marquais', Geraud- 
Teulon's, Charpignon's and Liebault's. 

INVARIABLY FORGET WHEN THEY AWAKE. 

The French hypnotist remarks properly : " The different 
qualifications that I have ascribed to somnambulism are very 
seldom found united in one individual ; only the last (loss of 
recollection on awaking) is a constant and particular evidence 
of somnambulism." 

There are also somnambulists whose eyes are open, who hear 
very well, and who are in rapport with all the surroundings ; 
but we must remember ,they are only in the second or third 



HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 



35 



degree of hypnotism (and we know there are six degrees). 
There are others in whom only one of the senses are strength- 
ened, and who only receive disturbed sense impressions, and 
last, there are those who only speak or express themselves with 
the utmost difficulty. But so far we have not been able to find 
one instance where the somnambulist has been able in a waking 
condition to recollect anything regarding his experiences in the 
somnambulistic state. 

The above distinction is of more than ordinary importance, as 




CATALEPSY IN EYELIDS AND HANDS — CANNOT CLOSE THE 
EYELIDS AND CANNOT OPEN THE HANDS. 

it draws a perceptible line between the somnambulistic expres- 
sion and dreams. 

All the thoughts we have had while we slept, and those we 
remember on awaking, are only dreams. It is consequently 
far from the truth that participation in somnambulistic phe- 
nomena tends to confirm the subject's belief; on the contrary, it 



36 HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 

assists in banishing that belief. This explains, also, how some 
celebrated physicians in olden time have been able to establish 
that the soul during sleep is in a better condition to describe the 
diseases and to predict dangers that threatened the body. 
They had, however, investigated somnambulism quite thor- 
oughly ; but they had not been able to distinguish the differ- 
ence between somnambulism and normal sleep. 

Abbot Faria, a Portuguese priest (Brahmin he called him- 
self), immediately on his arrival in Paris from India created an 
immense sensation. " We do not produce somnambulism," he 
says in language that is as far from being as elegant as his 
own personal self, " each time we desire it, but only when we 
happen to find one especially adapted to such conditions ; that is, 
one who is a natural somnambulist. In these individuals we do 
not create the somnambulistic sleep, but only develop their nat- 
ural tendencies. The investigations we have made in regard 
to several persons, showing that during the somnambulistic 
sleep at a certain distance they follow all the movements of the 
operator, are not sufficient to justify the meaning and use of the 
word animal magnetism, and there is no legitimate right to asso- 
ciate this common expression with somnambulism." 

It was furthermore Faria's opinion that the lethargic sleep, 
or somnambulism, did not in any way differ from the normal 
sleep ; a conclusion that in our time has been brought forward 
again, but without gaining any great number of followers. 

That even the ablest critic can be criticised Faria knew and 
admitted ; and he therefore considered it necessary to strengthen 
his doctrine by the statements of some views from which we 
respectfully dissent. Doctor Tourett sarcastically remarks that 
Faria was not skilled in medicine ; but what matters that ? 
Would not the continuous existing theory concerning fluids or 
juices be able to afford him an explanation ? " Sleep," he says, 
" has its different degrees ; the deepest sleep is what we have 
called somnambulism. This exists only where the blood is 



HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 37 

universally easy flowing, and, as this condition has its own 
peculiar degrees, so also has somnambulism its perfection of 
scales. Easy-flowing blood does not alone effect the more or 
less deep sleep, but also its more or less rapid appearance. 
Usually that state of blood circulation is only evidence of weak- 
ness; and experience has taught me that the loss of a certain 
amount of this fluid made somnambulists of those who had not 




THE SYMBOL. 

previously any disposition to it. So here we have the true 
cause of what we call natural somnambulism." 

Faria was probably not altogether wrong, for we see that in 
females — and it is usually they who are most easily hypnotized 
— we very often find a distinct anomi (loss of blood). Never- 
theless, it is impossible to set up this doctrine as a general 
validity, or to accept it in the exact letter. Faria judged as 



$8 HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 

above, that we can only develop as somnambulists those who 
are so by nature; that the sleep produced by the magnetizer's 
unspoken command must be ascribed to somnambulism, forced 
out through himself, and not, as supposed, by some outside 
power; therefore, to produce sleep, Faria was obliged to em- 
ploy a method that differed widely from those employed by 
previous operators. " The method," Faria says, " that I em- 
ploy to bring people into the sleep is very simple. I consider 
it above all reasonable doubt that we cannot compel those to be 
somnambulists that are not naturally so, and we must therefore 
endeavor to develop those who are susceptible on each occasion 
that they in good faith offer themselves." 

COMMANDED TO SLEEP. 

"According to outward appearance, as I will try later on to 
describe, I avail myself in advance of those who possess the 
required dispositions; and when. I have them seated comfort- 
ably in a chair, I exclaim in a determined and clear voice the 
word ' Sleep'; or I show to them at a little distance my open 
hand, and command them to gaze sharply at it without moving 
the eyes; but I allow them to wink the eyelids when they feel 
the necessity. In the first place, I command them to close the 
eyes. And I invariably notice, when in a determined tone 
of voice I order them to sleep, a visible tremor in all their 
limbs, upon which they go to sleep. This tremor is positive 
evidence not alone of their natural dispositions but also of their 
good will to give themselves up. Secondly, when I perceive 
they do not wink the eyelids any more I slowly advance with 
my open hand until within a few inches of their eyes. Then 
when I notice that the eyelids do not naturally close I perform 
one more operation which I will immediately explain : 

"Before developing new somnambulists, I always take the 
precaution to let several developed somnambulists go into the 
condition — my aim being thereby to inspire confidence in those 



HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 



39 



who are willing to try and who are natural somnambulists; 
because when they notice the ease with which the others sit 
down, there is no longer any fear regarding the coming sleep. 
Usually these persons are affected by an overwhelming fear, in 
spite of their entire willingness to become influenced. They 
often have attacks of cramps, nervous trembling and hard 
breathing. These attacks are the crisis, in which originates 
what is so erroneously termed healing, which are not, as claimed, 




HYPNOTISM AT HOSPITAL DE LA CHARITE- 

from magnetism. If the operator does not watch closely and 
is not able immediately to bring the patient back to his normal 
state there is a liability of leaving dangerous effects, which may 
later on render special treatment necessary. When the de- 
scribed methods do not have the desired effect, I slightly touch 
the subject on the crown of the head, the temples, root of the 
nose, the abdomen, over the heart, both knees and on both feet. 
Experience has taught me that a light pressure on the parts 
where the blood is especially easy flowing always produces an 



4-0 HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 

effect (concentration) that is sufficient to dull the senses and 
will power when there is no direct resistance present." 

It must be admitted that this development is very interesting 
and contains more than the germs to the whole of Braid's the- 
ory — and of the theory concerning the power of imagination or 
suggestion in consequence of the same. 

The phenomena observed by Faria in his subjects do not dif- 
fer in the main points from those of Puysegur and the other 
operators or their somnambulist subjects; and this is the case 
especially in regard to the complete loss of memory about 
everything on awakening. 

Faria adds : " During the somnambulistic sleep the eyes are, 
as a rule, closed. There are, nevertheless, somnambulists who 
sleep with open eyes ; and my experience has proved^to me 
that these latter are somnambulists by nature." Their open 
eyes remain fixed and immovable and they seem to be perfectly 
sightless. There are a few who move their eyes and see what 
occurs in their surroundings, still without being able to have 
any recollection whatever when they are awakened. 

MADE THEM BELIEVE WATER WAS WINE. 

As an advocate of the identity of somnambulism and normal 
sleep, Faria made a study of lethargy ; and he was one of the 
first who in a few lines described this interesting condition, 
which Azam also investigated. This is the state in which we 
nearly always find a certain double individuality of the person. 
It must be remarked that Faria claimed positively that there 
were no dangers attached when using his methods; and that 
subjects thus caused to sleep and brought under influence will 
by no means suffer any unpleasant effects. 

Abbot Faria was famous in Paris, and there was great 
demand for tickets to the seances given by this great man, not- 
withstanding that he was tanned by the scorching sun of India, 
and that he spoke the French language as poorly as he wrote it. 



HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 



4 1 



During these seances he caused his somnambulists to sleep 
and was one of the first to practice the mysterious influence, 
suggestion, in a manner, if we dare say, rather scientific, as he 
compelled his subjects to enjoy large quantities of water, in the 
belief that it was the best select wines. Abbot Farias' retreat 
did neither injure magnetism nor interfere with its progress. 
Thanks to several prominent scientific men (especially du 
Potet, 1 82 1, whose " Traite Complet du Magnetisme " is a rare 
and valuable contribution), there was proclaimed for Mesmer's 
discoveries a more medical and scientific direction. 




SELF-INDUCED TRANCE. 



Du Potet magnetized the patients in the Hotel Dieu hospital ; 
and he was successful in convincing several very eminent 
physicians., Alexander Bertrand, formerly a pupil of the 
Polytechnic school, gave a seance to which people crowded 



42 HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 

from all sides. Nevertheless several of the learned societies, 
in reference to Bailey's celebrated report, continually condemned 
magnetism. 

Dr. H. Bernheim, a professor of the faculty of medicine at 
Nancy, says in his work, " Suggestive Therapeutics" : " In 
reality we must come down to i860 to find the doctrine of sug- 
gestion entirely freed from all the elements which falsified it 
even in the hands of Braid himself, and applied in the simplest 
manner to therapeutics. Durand de Gross, like Abbot Faria, 
had already employed simple vocal suggestions, speech, in the 
productions of hypnotic phenomena. Mr. Liebault conceived 
the idea of applying the same vocal suggestions to thera- 
peutics. 

" The patient is put to sleep by means of suggestion — -that is, 
by making the idea of sleep penetrate the mind. He is treated 
by means of suggestion — that is, by making the idea of cure 
penetrate the mind. The subject being hypnotized, Mr. Lie- 
bault's method consists in affirming in a loud voice the disap- 
pearance of his symptoms. We try to make him believe that 
these symptoms no longer exist, or that they will disappear, 
that the pain will vanish, that feeling will come back to his 
limbs, that his muscular strength will increase, and that his 
appetite will be restored. 

" We profit by the special psychical receptivity created by 
the hypnosis, by the cerebral docility, by the exalted ideo- 
motor, ideo-sensitive, ideo-sensorial, reflex activity, in order to 
provoke useful reflexes, to persuade the brain to do what it can 
to transform the accepted idea in reality." 

Such is the method of therapautic suggestion of which M. 
Liebault is the founder. He was the first to clearly establish 
that the cures obtained by all magnetizers, and even by Braid's 
hypnotic operations, are not the work either of a mysterious 
fluid or of physiological modification due to special manipula- 
tions, but the work of suggestion alone. 



HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 43 

The whole system of magnetic medicine is only the medi- 
cine of imagination; the imagination being put into such a 
condition by the hypnosis that it cannot escape the suggestion. 

M. Liebault's method was ignored a long time, even by the 
physicians at Nancy. In 1S84 Charles Rickett was satisfied to 
say that magnetism often had advantages, that it calms nervous 
agitation and that it may cure or benefit certain insomnias. 

Since 1882 I have experimented with the suggestive method 
which I have seen used by M. Liebault, though timidly at first 
and without confidence. 

DISORDERS REMOVED BY SUGGESTION. 

Now it is daily used in my clinic; I practice it before my 
students, perhaps no day passes in which I do not show them 
some functional trouble, pain, paresis, uneasiness, insomnia 
either moderated or instantly suppressed by suggestion. 

Dr. J. R. Buchanan, in his work on Therapeutic Sarcog- 
riomy, remarks in regard to Dr. Esdaile : " How widely dif- 
ferent from the monotonous imbecility of Deleuze is the prac- 
tical exposition by Dr. James Esdaile of his medical and surgical 
application of animal magnetism in India, in the volume, ' Mes- 
merism in India,' published in 1846, showing his observations 
during six years, a work which no candid person can read 
without realizing the guilty folly of the medical profession in 
ignoring and opposing so valuable a portion of therapeutics. 
It was his intention at first to communicate his observations 
only to the medical profession, but he soon felt it his duty to 
give them to the public." 

Dr. Esdaile's report embraces seventy-three surgical opera- 
tions and eighteen medical cases treated by mesmerism with 
complete success, and shows how simple is the practice and 
how brilliant are the results in India. A student of sar- 
cognomy in that climate, even if he dispensed with medi- 
cine entirely, would have a brilliantly successful prac- 



44 



HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 



tice that might astonish the adherents of the old regime. 
Dr. Esdaile regrets that the public should wait for a 
professional sanction of mesmerism ; for, says he, medical men 
in general as yet know nothing about it ; and there is nothing 
in their previous knowledge, however great and varied, that 
bears upon the subject. I fear that not many of this genera- 
tion will live to benefit by mesmerism if they wait till it is 
admitted into the pharmacopoea. He speaks of the opprobrious 
language applied to those who succeed in curing diseases with- 
out medicine, and adds: In my estimation the genuine medical 




THE ORIGINAL HOME OF HYPNOTISM. 

quack is he who, professing to cure disease, yet allows his 
patients to suffer and perish by ignorantly or presumptuously 
dismissing any promising or possible means, of which the father 
of medicine thought very differently from his degenerate sons. 



HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 



45 



I will remark concerning Esdaile's methods of hypnotizing : 
Esdaile usually had the patient led into a semi-dark room, 
where he was then requested to lie down upon his back upon a 




EXPERIMENTAL HYPNOTISM AT LA SALPETRIERE. 



low couch. At the head of the couch the operator, who was 
generally a native, placed himself. This colored operator bent 
himself forward over the patient's face, constantly directing his 



40 HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 

gaze sharply on the subject's eyes, at not too great a distance 
from the patient. At the same time the operator placed a hand 
on each shoulder of the patient. After a lapse of about ten to 
twenty minutes symjDtoms of the magnetic sleep generally com- 
mence to appear. 

The operator then commands sleep. As a rule this process 
is very successful. In cases where they do not immediately 
succeed in bringing them under influence, the attempts are re- 
peated until they do — either by the same operator or another 
who is substituted. 

Besides what hypnotizations Dr. Esdaile performed he had 
engaged different operators who, singularly enough, were nearly 
all colored, whom he had developed. Another method he often 
pursued to produce sleep was passes or manipulations only; 
these passes were all performed from the head downward to 
the feet, at a distance of about one inch from the subject's 
body. The subject was here placed on his back on a low 
couch, but ordered to close the eyes. Then suggestions about 
the sleep were given; the subjects were, of course, to be pass- 
ive. The treatment lasted from fifteen to forty-five minutes 
before the desired results were obtained. 

During recent years hypnotism has been the means of arous- 
ing considerable interest. Magazines and daily papers have 
contained numerous articles on the science. A constant ques- 
tion has been concerning the great dangers that are supposed 
to lurk under and be connected with the use of hypnotism — all 
kinds of probable and improbable dangers of hypnotism or 
mesmerism. Such anecdotes are very often not only unrea- 
sonable, but actually ridiculous, and, at the same time, they are 
usually published by people who have really studied hypnotism, 
which makes it appear still more incomprehensible. 

IS HYPNOTISM IMMORAL? 

Especially there is brought forward, in vivid colors, the 
danger connected with hypnotism as regards the evil influence 



HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY, 



47 




PATER FARIA (THE BRAHMIN) GIVING A HYPNOTIC SEANCE 

IN PARIS. 



48 HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 

exerted over the subject's moral nature, but I am pleased to 
remark that lately several of the modern hypnotists, as well as 
many physicians, have commenced to deny this assertion. Even 
some of the old hypnotists expressed their opinion through 
their different works and are extremely favorable in regard to 
all the benefit derived through hypnotism, and on numerous 
occasions gave undeniable proofs of there being no such danger 
as was formerly supposed. 

As for example let us note what Binet and Fere say : " In 
the majority of subjects there is no marked difference between 
their normal life and that of somnambulism. None of the 
intellectual faculties are absent during sleep. It only appears 
that the tone of the physical excitement is nearly always pres- 
ent during somnambulism. This is clearly shown in the 
emotion. It is, in general, perfectly easy to make a subject 
shout "with laughter or shed tears. He is deeply moved by a 
dramatic tale, and even by words in which there is no sense, if 
they are uttered in a serious tone. 

C£ It is curious to note the influence of music; the subject ex- 
presses in all his attitudes and gestures an emotion in accordance 
with the character of the piece. In short, hypnotism does not 
appear to effect any radical change in the character of those 
subjects whom we have observed. The intellectual faculties 
are as active as before. The following is a conclusive proof 
of the exertion of the mind. 

" A patient who had been admitted to the Salpetriere at an 
early age was in the habit of tutoying M. X. when she was 
alone "with him, or in company with her acquaintances ; she 
ceased to do so on the entrance of a stranger. Even under 
somnambulism this patient observed the laws of good breed- 
ing, addressing M. X., as to when she was alone with him and 
ceasing to do so as soon as a stranger came in. 

" It is in somnambulists that we find the curious phenomenon 
of resistance, of which we shall speak further, when we come 



HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 49 

to consider suggestions. When an order is given to somnam- 
bulists they will often dispute it, ask the reason or refuse to 
obey. It is under the form of refusal to obey a given order 
that resistance occurs. Subjects more rarely resist hallucina- 
tions, since these do not affect their personality. There are, 
however, instances of the latter form of resistance. 

" When we proposed to transform one of our subjects into a 
priest and to give him a cassock, he obstinately refused it. 

" If we study our own dreams we may all become aware of 
those curious duplications of consciousness, and this shows the 
connection between normal and hypnotic sleep. 

" The dreamer is, in general, like the somnambulist to whom 
hallucinations are suggested. He is surprised at nothing, al- 
though the most absurd impossibilities are presented to his vis- 
ion. Yet there is sometimes a remnant of critical sense which 
induces him to say, in the midst of some grotesque scene : ' But 
this is impossible. I must be dreaming!' 

" These facts show that a somnambulist is far from being, as 
some writers assert, an unconscious automaton, devoid of judg- 
ment, reason and intellectual spontaniety. On the contrary, his 
memory is perfect, his intelligence is active and his imagination 
is highly excited." 

Instances have been given of subjects who could, during 
somnambulism, perform intellectual feats of which they were 
incapable in the waking state. M. de Puysegur remarks : " The 
power that we acquire over those individuals who are brought in 
the hypnotic condition (somnambulism) is only unlimited when 
it concerns their health and welfare. Outside of that they can 
only be brought to do harmless acts, such as going to and from 
places, dance, sing, carry articles to different places, etc., in 
short, what anybody would do in a normal condition. But there 
are limits, beyond which this power is without effect ; and I can 
almost say positively that every hypnotist iuvariably feels and 
knows that his subject will obey him to a certain extent, and 



$0 HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 

where the suggestions are disagreeable to the subject's own 
morals and character, they positively fail." 

As we can see by the above the danger in connection with 
hypnotism is by no means as great as people usually believe ; 
and that the good that can be therapeutically accomplished bor- 
ders on the incredible, especially as related to nerve and muscle 
diseases. 

SOUTHERNERS EASILY INFLUENCED. 

The differences in climate appear to have great influence on 
hypnotic susceptibility. Southerners, and generally those who 
have been exposed to tropical heat, are much more easily in- 
fluenced than those who live in the temperate or frigid zones. 
Hypnosis not only appears sooner in the tropical climates, but 
it is usually deeper, and the more complicated conditions of the 
states invariably immediately appear. The hypnotic suscepti- 
bility does not depend on these circumstances alone. There are 
many other conditions which we must find, partly outside of 
the individual and partly within. It is necessary to especially 
notice the different tempers of mind, such as delight, sorrow, etc. 
That which also works against coming into the hypnotic state 
is over-exertion, either mentally or bodily, an empty or an over- 
loaded stomach, excessive use of certain nourishing substances, 
liquors, strong spices, coffee or tea. All these conditions, more 
or less, prevent or disturb the coming hypnosis. Furthermore, 
outward influences, such as temperature, dress, place of resi- 
dence and surroundings, should all be considered. The room 
in which experiments are to be performed must neither be too 
warm nor too cold. 

Dryness is always encouraging to hypnosis, while damp air 
disturbs the influence. Strong odors of flowers and certain per- 
fumes are very often advantageous. Strong lights are by all 
means unfavorable. A mild and shaded light is always favor- 
able. The subject's seat must be as comfortable as possible ; 
the least noise, the buzzing of a fly, the creaking of shoes, may 



HYPNOTISM AS A REMEDY. 



51 



disturb the good results in causing an involuntary distraction of 
thought, which tends to disturb the effects of the manipulations 
of the operator. 

Without exception there should be a third person present in 
the room, to witness every hypnotic treatment involving uncon- 
sciousness of the subject. There will then be no cause for mis- 
understandings. 

The time is near at hand when hypnotism will be employed 
in the majority of diseases that have so far thwarted all other 
treatment. 




THE CHARMED DOVE. 



CHAPTER III. 



HYPNOTISM. 

ALSO CALLED MESMERISM, OR ARTIFICIAL SOMNAMBULISM. 

Hypnotism is very old and was known thousands of years 
ago ; but during the ever changing circumstances in different 
countries it has generally been known and employed only by 
magicians and fakirs, to produce visible, so-called supernatural 
phenomena, such as experiments in clairvoyance and similar 
states — in which the persons were supposed to be able to tell 
the past, present and future. 

This science was also employed by Egyptians and healers 
in the olden time, to cure diseases that had baffled all other 
treatment. 

Some of the names applied to this science are, Electrical 
Psychology, Mental Electricity, Human Aura, Electric Biology, 
Pathetism, Sychodunamy and many others. 

A good hypnotist should possess certain special qualities. 
He should possess knowledge, good morals and a good, sound 
constitution ; also have full control of himself, a determined and 
clear voice and the will power always to do the best. When 
we wish to proclaim the use of a discovery we ought first care- 
fully to investigate its nature, so as not to enter on the wrong 
road ; because only he who thoroughly knows a thing can de- 
cide what remedies should be employed, and on whom to in- 
duce them and teach them to appreciate and adopt it. Our 
present scientists accept experience as a main basis in the study 

of nature. 

52 



HYPNOTISM. 53 

WHO IS SUSCEPTIBLE TO HYPNOTISM. 

I am constantly asked, who is susceptible to hypnotism ? also 
the percentage of both young and old ladies and gentlemen, 
under the usual circumstances. In replying we are assisted by 
all the modern methods of procedure. 

As a rule one-third of those who try, and willingly give 
themselves up to the operator's instructions, can be brought into 
the hypnotic sleep. There is not the slightest doubt that even 
more can be influenced if they will, once every day, undertake 
an attempt of this mode of treatment ; then about fifty per cent, 
would be caused to sleep, and this peculiar state of sleep we 
call hypnotism or somnambulism. 

Puysegur and Mesmer as well as many others — followers 
of the old school — were convinced that all persons could be mag- 
netically influenced — only the manner of its appearance being 
different. It is not always necessary to produce a sleepy condi- 
tion, for magnetizing or hypnotizing may produce some very 
slight, almost unnoticeable effects, which the subject generally 
is not able to describe. 

^ For hypnotic experiments young people and children are 
^preferred. But as nearly every one in the eastern countries by 
repeated attempts becomes hypnotized, then the actual reason 
why they prefer younger people, almost children, is because they 
are the most easily put to sleep, especially during a special 
period and age. 

These fakirs claimed that in these young subjects they could 
easily produce real clairvoyance, and phenomena equally as 
astonishing, and which they say cannot very well be produced in 
older people, even though they are in the deepest state of hyp- 
nosis. 

We find a large number of people who still in their old 
age retain the disposition to become hypnotized, but, as a rule, 
it is the younger age. Girls from 10 to 18 years are best 



54 



HYPNOTISM. 



adapted, youth? during the ages from 15 to 23 years. Amongst 
those we not alone influence a larger percentage, but pro- 
duce the most interesting conditions. 

In regard to the different sexes, the opinion for a long time 
was that there existed a great difference between the male and 







PROF. J. M. CHARCOT. 

female susceptibility, their more or less development, and larger 
percentage of each who were naturally hypnotizable. 

It was a general belief that many more ladies could be 
hypnotized than gentlemen. Experience proves that men who, 
as a rule, are considered the stronger, are as easily hypnotized 
as women, who are considered the weaker sex, and who usually 
are more nervous than men. 



HYPNOTISM. 55 

HYSTERIA AND HYPNOTISM. 

Prof. Charcot, who mostly hypnotized ladies — and especially 
hysterics — does not give either reason or the right to believe 
that it is only females who can be hypnotized. It is an abso- 
lute untruth, although it has been published in the papers, that 
Charcot should have said that only hysterical females can be 
hypnotized. 

The truth is that in his specialty at La Salpetriere he 
studied hypnotism mostly through hysterical subjects. 

Charcot has by his cures done an immense good, curing peo- 
ple by the thousands of a number of diseases. 

A mistaken judgment that many pass is, that to be hypnot- 
ized is to become hysterical. I think it is sufficiently proven 
by Charcot's treatment, as he by hypnotizing hysterical ladies 
actually cured their hysterics, a disease that by seeking medical 
aid they had not been relieved from. 

Of hysterics we find many who cannot at all be hypnotized. 
Charcot's and other hypnotists' experience shows this. 

At the recent meeting of the French Society of Hypnologi 
in Paris, Dr. Berillon astonished his hearers by stating that 
almost all children could be hypnotized, except those who were 
idiotic or hysterical. The idea that there is any connection 
between hysteria and hypnotism was strongly disputed. One 
physician alleged that he had hypnotized sixty-nine patients out 
of seventy-two under his care for various diseases in a hospital, 
and said it was absurd to believe that so large a proportion 
could be hysterical. 

Another great good in hypnotism is that we can by no means 
produce somnambulists by the hundreds; which was the gen- 
eral belief when hypnotism was little known ; but instead of 
this it cures those who are attacked by this nervousness. . 

Peculiarly enough, artificial somnabulism produced by hyp- 
notism, causes the natural somnambulism to disappear, so we 
are almost sure of curing a somnambulist of his nightly walks 



5°* HYPNOTISM. 

by hypnotizing him. Well known hypnotists, De Bremaund, 
Bernheim and Liebault in France, and hypnotists in Germany, 
England and America, have positively proven that men and 
even the most robust and strong are easily hypnotized, as a 
rule; and usually they are easier to produce the conditions in 
than women. 

Amongst the conditions as well as age, of advantage and in- 
fluence to their susceptibility we must mention as a valuable 
factor the person's occupation or position. 

Individuals who do hard manual labor are more susceptible 
to hypnosis than those who exert mental activity. 

The difference should here be ascribed to the fact that the 
first are more accustomed to concentrate their whole thought, 
while the others of rapid thoughts find the effort to concentrate 
them on one subject very hard. For the stated reasons, soldiers, 
sailors and people who are in the habit of obeying orders, and 
have only one thought in their mind at the time, are susceptible. 
Also those who are working in the free air — healthy and ro- 
bust workingmen — are easily influenced; and they are more 
readily hypnotized than weak and delicate looking people con- 
fined to the house. 

Besides the old well-known methods, there are some new 
and very practical ones, by which to produce hypnotism ; but 
even by the methods now employed we are only able to in- 
fluence about thirty-five or forty per cent. Probably the day is 
not far off when a new and more practical method will be dis- 
covered, better than any yet known, and by which everybody 
can be brought into hypnosis. 

We can not give one special method any advantage over 
the other, as the susceptibility of the nerve systems are 
different in the different individuals, and even in the same 
persons — the sense nerves can be more or less easily in- 
fluenced. This is the reason that in accomplishing cures and 
employing only one method, I have made ten or fifteen at« 



HYPNOTISM. 57 

tempts and more on the same person, without gaining any 
result, while I have found that by another method I have im- 
mediately produced the hypnotic sleep. 

The immense good a competent hypnotist can perform, 
when the conditions are produced, is to many people almost 
incredible. A great many generally considered incurable 
diseases are cured through hypnotic sleep alone, by the refresh- 
ing sleep and resting conditions of hypnosis. 

The diseases are nervousness, insomnia, and others ; but 
a still larger field the hypnotist has in suggestion, are the mor- 
phine and alcohol habits, which these people in a normal con- 
dition can not with the best intentions give up. The hypnotist 
can, during this somnambulistic condition, suggest to them to 
abstain from their former weakness. 

I will here quote what Dr. Hamilton Osgood says: "/ 
have seen many neurosis cured. I have never seen one caused 
by suggestion, I have seen the intelligence restored', I have 
never seen a mind enfeebled by suggestions" 

In spite of all that is done by hypnotic treatment both in 
Europe and America and all there has been jDublished on the 
subject, there nevertheless are a great many people who as 
usual cannot comprehend what is new to them, and that there 
really exists such a thing as hypnotism. Some blindly deny 
that they understand it and never try to become better informed ; 
still they proudly denounce everything as nonsense that they 
cannot understand or comprehend immediately. But it is a 
well known fact that most people never allow themselves to 
study what they have a prejudice against. 

As an examplej I will give a remark related at a meeting 
of the society for Psychical Research, London. An amusing 
instance of the existence of mental prejudice amongst eminent 
scientific men is given by the late Miss C. Fox, in her recently 
published journal; she relates that the late Provost of Trinity 
College, Dublin, said to her : " When in Dublin, Sir William 



58 



HYPNOTISM. 



Hamilton mentioned to Airey some striking mathematical fact. 
He paused a moment, when Airey interposed with, 'No, it can 
not be.' Sir William mildly remarked, ' I have been investigat- 
ing it for the last five months, and can not doubt its truth ! ' 




PERSIAN MAGIC MIRROR. 

' But,' said Airey, ' I've been at it for the last five minutes, and 
can not see it at all ! ' " 

METHODS BY WHICH HYPNOTISM IS OFTEN PRODUCED. 

There is the method of suggestion, Liebault's method, and 
the well-known fascinating method ; also the method by which 
the subject in a resting and comfortable position with tight 



HYPNOTISM. 



59 



closed eyes, becomes hypnotized by manipulations or passes, 
performed in a monotonous manner. There is also Braid's 
method, in which the subject's whole attention is centered on a 
glittering object, crystal or metal, held at a certain distance from 
the subject's eyes. 

Braid's method can be traced back to the dim old age, which 
we can see by the following extract from a letter to Demarquay 
and Giraud — Toulon. 




CABALISTIC MAGIC MIRROR. 



{Recherches sur PHyfinotisme, 1S60, p. 42, by Dr. Rosse^fri 
vate physician to Haliin Pasha in Cairo.') • 

"The old remark nil sub sole novum (there is nothing new 
under the sun) finds daily new illustrations ; and to return to 



60 HYPNOTISM. 

my real object, the wonderful discovery of hypnotism is a new 
evidence of the fact. 

" In this traditional world, where everything is done as it was 
4,000 years ago, we find a class of people who cultivate trade 
as mandeb. The experiments they do, and which up to date 
have been scorned as charlatanism, are the same that Braid 
mentioned. 

" Their method of procedure is as follows : They gener- 
ally employ a whole white plate. That is Dr. Braid's shining 
object. In the center of this plate they draw with pen and ink 
two triangles, whose sides cross each other, and write in this ge- 
ometrical figure cabalistic words ; most probably, this results in 
concentrating the gaze to a limited space. 

" They then pour upon it some oil to increase the polish. 
" A young man is generally preferred in the attempts, and he 
is to gaze in the center of the double triangle. After a lapse 
of four or five minutes the effects present themselves. The 
individual commences by seeing a black spot in the center of 
the plate, this black spot grows, changes form and is transformed 
to different figures, that dance in front of his eyes. At this state 
of the hallucination he often comes in possession of a somnam- 
bulistic clairvoyance, that is equally as wonderful as are those 
hypnotized. 

"Still there are some amongst these Sheiks (those who can 
produce these phenomenon, are honored as Sheiks) who use 
even fewer apparata; who, without seeking refuge in geomet- 
rical figures and cabalistic words, simply produce hypnotism 
and somnambulism in the same manner as Dr. Braid, by letting 
the individual look sharp at a glass marble ; and as they did 
not possess such a competent mechanic as the Parisian, Char- 
rierre, to make their scientific apparatus, they were compelled 
to be satisfied with a decanter which they filled with oil. 

"In giving all these details it is not my intention to rob Dr. 
Braid of his glory, but I only wish to emphasize that the old 



HYPNOTISM. 



61 



Egyptians retain their priority in the case, to which they have 
undisputed right." 




CHIRON FASCINATING ESCULAPIUS B. C. 928. 

Chiron the Centaur, a prince of Thessaly, has fascinated his 
pupil Esculapius, brother prince, for the purpose of discovering 
a remedy to cure the foot of Hercules, which had been wounded 
by a poisoned arrow. An herb was prevised which saved the 



62 



HYPNOTISM. 



hero • this plant, known from the circumstance as the Centaury 
(Centaur's herb), gave name to a genus, one species of which 
is our common blue-bottle. Chiron was the great physician of 
his day, and derived his name from -a Greek word, meaning the 
hand, because he performed most of his cures by manipulating. 
His wonderful skill in horsemanship has made the poets repre- 
sent him as a centaur, half man, half horse. In after times, the 
medical fame of Escu'apius far eclipsed that of his master 
Chiron, and he was early invested by the people with divine 
honors. His mode of practicing, called by his descendant 
Hippocrates, the secret means of medicine, can be found de- 
tailed in the work." 




HYSTERICAL CATALEPTIC. 



CHAPTER IV. 



HYPNOTIC flETHODS AND CONDITIONS. 

EMARKS REGARDING THE CAUSE OF " HI 

AND PHENOMENA RELATING THERETO. CLEAR 

AND PRACTICAL METHODS BY WHICH HYP- 
NOTISM MAY BE PRODUCED. 

In order to hypnotize an individual it is essential first to gain 
the attention of the person concerned. In thus gaining his at- 
tention, his thought may be controlled so that he has but t±ie 
one idea — that he will draw the shortest straw in the end, anu 
must submit. The hypnotist must, as a matter of course, have 
confidence in his own power ; otherwise %t is not to be expected 
that others will have such confidence in him. 

A good hypnotist has it in his power to suddenly check the 
will or desire of a sensitive either by simply gaining the atten- 
tion with the aid of sonorous, monotonous sounds, or by certain 
manipulations or passes. 

These methods, of course, are each and all simply sugges- 
tions. We may further make use of other well-known meth- 
ods or suggestions, as I have previously mentioned. Some hyp- 
notists merely throw their so-called magnetic atmosphere in the 
direction of different parts of the body, and, consequently, with- 
out contact or touch. 

There are some instances when these have been successful, 
even when contrary to the desire or will of the subject ; but these 
are rare. These cases thus produced are solely by the will-power 
of the hypnotist, and in this instance without touch. These are 
in brief the most common means employed. 

63 



64 HYPNOTIC METHODS AND CONDITIONS. 

Regarding manipulations we have the following: (a) Manip- 
ulations by touch, and (3) manipulations at a distance. Both 
may have similar effects on different individuals. 

I would say that in cases where the manipulations by touch 
are executed by a practical and scientific hypnotist with fixed 
certain manipulations or pressure in a certain direction, they, of 
course, would produce a certain effect. In manipulations at a 
distance the hands are to be held in a certain manner, being 
clinched and moved forward in a certain manner to gain a cer- 
tain effect. These manipulations may be executed at a shorter 
or longer distance from the sleeping person. 

Savants of the present day admit that the will of the hyp- 
notist plays an important part in hypnotic experiments ; and 
they cite instances of hypnotizing at a distance, and of trans- 
ference of thoughts. 

Braid, when discovering hypnotism, fancied he had given 
to so-called "animal magnetism" the finishing thrust; but ae 
was proven in error. Even if some of the phenomena per- 
formed by mesmerists of old bear a striking similarity to hypno- 
tism, there still remain various experiments which Braid and his 
followers, by their mode of procedure, were not able to per- 
form. 

DIFFERENT SUGGESTIONS. 

Of these we have four : 

1. The direct or so-called hypnotic suggestion to the sub- 
ject, who is to be put to sleep. 

2. The post-hypnotic suggestion by which a person hypno- 
tized is suggested to do something after being awakened. 

3. Distant suggestions, when the person contrary to his 
will and desire falls asleep. 

4. Suggestions to a person fully awake. When the person 
without apparent hypnotic influence, but awake and in every way 
normal, submits solely to the superior will and intelligence of the 
operator. 



HYPNOTIC METHODS AND CONDITIONS. 65 

The following instances go to prove that there are various 
interesting forms of hypnotism, or, as it is generally termed, 
personal magnetism. I will endeavor in the following to 
demonstrate my views upon this subject. To illustrate: Sup- 
posing two business men come together. One, without the 
other having the least idea of it, is studying the weak points of 
his associate. The stronger and more intelligent of the two 
will, after a while, bring the other to look upon a subject as he 
desires, and finally to submit to his wishes. This, then, is sug- 
gestion with hypnotic influence though the person is perfectly 
awake. The person upon whom the influence is brought to 
bear imagines himself to be possessing all his senses, while at 
the same time he is bound to submit to the influence of the 
other. As a result of this kind of suggestion many otherwise 
shrewd business men are frequently led to enter upon business 
enterprises which they, under other conditions, when exactly 
the same offers were made by the same people, refused to ac- 
cept or consider ; because they then followed their own personal 
sense, will or conviction, guided by their own particular interest; 
and hence they did not commit any folly to regret later on. As 
soon as the weaker party is out of the sight of the stronger, the 
former perceives his blunder, but, alas, too late. 

Hypnotism may be called by different names, which all 
imply the same. It matters but little whether we term it Sun- 
derland's " Pathetism," Dr. Braid's " Hypnotism," Burr's 
" Biologi," Dodd's "Psychology" or "Animal Magnetism." 
Elliottson, of London, gave to it the name of " Mesmerism," in 
honor of Mesmer ; still, as a matter of justice to its real dis- 
coverer, M. de Puysegur, it might more properly be called 
^Puysegurian Somnambulism ." 

THE DOUBLE CONSCIOUS STATE IS AN INTERESTING ONF 
WITH HYPNOTIC INDIVIDUALS. 

While every individual will, in a state of somnambulism, re- 
member everything that has happened in his normal as well as 



66 HYPNOTIC METHODS AND CONDITIONS. 

hypnotic state, he will have forgotten all that has occurred dur- 
ing the hypnose, when awakened. Thus we find a divided 
recollection, and hence we have dual states which may be 
named (a) the normal or awakened and, (3) the somnambulistic 
recollection. It is of great importance that everything, even to 
the minute detail, which has occurred during previous periods 
of somnambulism be recalled in each succeeding somnambulistic 
period, regardless of the duration or interval of these periods. 
Thus the memory is strengthened and may recall long past and 
forgotten occurrences. 

Belonging to the soul category is another peculiar condition, 
the hypnotic rapport existing between the hypnotist and his 
subject. 

The subject submits to and obeys the hypnotist, even to the 
minute details. As a matter of course while the subject is con- 
tinued " en rapport " with the hypnotist — he entertains the 
same thoughts and desires — smiles or shows anger with him, 
while at the same time he remains indifferent to everyone else, 
and remains unconcerned about the influence which may be 
brought to bear from others than the hypnotist. 

Whenever the hypnotist places the subject in rapport with 
some other person, the subject will in the same manner be- 
come submissive to that person, while remaining indifferent to 
the demand, suggestion or manipulations of anyone else en- 
deavoring to exert an influence. The hypnotist may at will 
cause the rapport to return to himself even by the slightest 
motion of his hand. He may accomplish this by passes or 
manipulations solely — or by words or without, and. with some 
subjects even without any direct words or touch, but simply by 
the will of the hypnotist. In very sensitive persons similar effects 
are caused by the concentrated thoughts of the hypnotizer. To 
have the rapport return it is but necessary to again gain control. 
It is to be borne in mind that the hypnotist's thoughts during 
the entire period of hypnose are with the subject. Hence the 



HYPNOTIC METHODS AND CONDITIONS. 67 

final thought of the subject as to the hypnose is in harmony 
with that of the latter. It thus becomes natural for the sub- 
ject to see, hear and comprehend the hypnotist, he being the 
last one in the mind of the hypnotized person when awake. 
The subject during his sleep is continually attracted and 
controlled by the hypnotist. 

The following example is familiar to all. When the 
mother goes to sleep with the child at her side, she, though 
slumbering, does not cease to watch over her babe. While 
asleep she is still watching. Although she remains uncon- 
scious of every noise, no matter from what other source, she 
will awake at the slightest movement or outcry of her babe. 
The hypnotic rapport bears great resemblance to this. It is 
the same concentrated consciousness that causes the mother, 
solely interested in her babe, to observe every little noise, every 
sound or movement from it — which makes the hypnotized 
somnambule so sensitive to every impulse emanating from the 
hypnotist, while the subject, as has been proven, remains en- 
tirely indifferent to any other person. 

Hence it is in the mind of the hypnotic individual the hyp- 
notist exercises some peculiar individual power in him, which 
causes the well-known lack of will in the hvpnotized indi- 
vidual. 

Thus the rapport is a kind of suggestion caused by either 
a conscious or unconscious effect of the hypnotic sleep, as ap- 
pears in the mind of the somnambulistic individual. The phe- 
nomena is very interesting and is worthy of consideration, giv- 
ing food for thought. So far no one has been able to explain 
satisfactorily this vital, still natural, phenomena. As previously 
stated by one, when in gaining the attention of a person and 
thus making him forget everything else, he will be entirely 
absorbed in the one thought, and be influenced by none but 
the hypnotist with whom he is in rapport. He feels, sees, 
hears only that which is related to that one thought. We find 



68 hvp:?otic methods and conditions. 

instances of this in everyday occurrences, where a person is sub- 
missive to the one idea and seems to forget everything- else, and 
becomes indifferent to those who formerly held his affection. 
He sees nothing, hears nothing, and feels nothing, but is en- 
tirely absorbed in the one idea. 

Every one knows that we can be Occupied by a certain sub- 
ject to such an extent that we, as it is generally termed, neither 
see nor hear. This idea, or class of ideas, which has arrested 
our entire attention, is incessantly increasing in strength, 
until it finally remains the only thing perceptible for our 
thought ; everything else is forgotten ; we hear nothing, neither 
do we see nor feel. This overwhelming thought dominates 
our mind and prevents the apprehension or conception of any- 
thing else. Even such impressions as would under usual con- 
ditions prove disagreeable or painful do not affect the person. 

A STRIKING EXAMPLE IS THAT OF KING LEAR. 

We have at one time a striking and interesting example of 
this in the tempest scene of Shakespeare's famous tragedy, 
" King Lear" — a scene which, as well as so many others, writ- 
ten by the Grand Master, shows his deep knowledge of 
humanity. King Lear at last clearly convinced of his daugh- 
ter's grave ingratitude finds himself deserted in the wilds of 
the night. He is so horror-struck by this mighty certainty that 
he sees, understands, perceives nothing but this all-dominating 
thought that he feels prevails, everything dies in his mind; 
and as he more and more faces this sole idea, he cries in the 
fearful raging tempest of the night, as a soul in agony : 
" Fool — I am growing insane." And he hurries further into 
the terrible tempest, hears no more the thundering storm ; he is 
regardless of the rain that beats his face. When the faithful 
"Kent" begs and implores the King to leave the desert's mel- 
ancholy wrath and seek shelter from the horrible tempest, King 
Lear replies: 



HYPNOTIC METHODS AND CONDITIONS. 69 

"Thou think'st 'tis much, that this contentious storm 

Invades us to the skin; so 'tis to thee; 

But where the greater malady is fix'd, 

The lesser is scarce felt — — — 

— — — When the mind's free, 

The body's delicate ; the tempest in my mind 

Doth from my senses take all feeling else, 

Save what beats there. 

Act III, Scene IV. 

We remember that in the brain of the king rages the 
deathly, despairing, all absorbing thought — the ingratitude of 
his daughters. His brain is therefore incapable of receiving any 
impressions which enters as telegraphic messages from every 
nerve-center of the body. He is utterly unable to pay any at- 
tention to anything outside of this. The only thing perceptible 
to him is this all dominating thought, rooting itself deeper and 
deeper, until it is finally so fixed, so intense, that it — as he him- 
self expresses it — : leads to insanity. 

Gloster also endorses this when he exclaims : 

There is a cliff, whose high and bending head 
Looks fearfully on the confined deep; 
Bring me but to the very brink of it, 
And. I'll repair the misery thou dost bear. 

The unfortnnate King was a grand and noble soul, good in 
every sense of the word; and he gave away to his children all 
his worldly goods. Then being in the closest of all relation 
they showed not only their ingratitude, but they were in every 
respect cruel to the old king. They hereby gave the mental 
death-blow -which threw the king into the despairing darkness 
of that insanity which he himself predicted. 

His attention was arrested as it is the case of the hypnotized 
individual. 

The hypnotic somnambule is not a mere automaton to be 
moved about at pleasure. To make the hypnotic suggestion 
applicable, it is essential to impart the hypnotic suggestion — 
otherwise it can not be carried out. It must not be forgotten 



70 HYPNOTIC METHODS AND CONDITIONS. 

that the execution of the suggestion depends entirely on the dis- 
position of the subject, which does not alter but remains the 
same asleep or awake. 

There are certain instances where a person has a so-called 
dual character. These persons are, to all appearance, peaceable 
and law-abiding beings, who under certain circumstances be- 
come vicious or dishonest. It stands to reason that these same 
persons would, when under hypnotic influence, at times be pure 
and honorable, and then again dishonest or unreliable, just 
as in the normal state. The reader will understand that the 
somnambule may show resistance ; not only refusing to do that 
which he has been ordered to do when asleep, but even when 
in the deepest hypnose after their sleep. I have given my per- 
sonal views upon this subject, and may now properly give those 
of well-known scientists who have made investigations. 

I cite from statements made by the well-known Professor 
Pitres of France: 

" When ordering certain hypnotic individuals to execute 
certain acts after their awakening, disagreeable to them or caus- 
ing their displeasure, they would simply refuse to obey and 
would not be awakened until released. Should the hypnotist 
remain firm or insist upon the suggestion being carried out, it 
would become impossible to awaken them." 

"Two years ago," I again quote Professor Pitres, "we 
had in our department a young woman who was easily hypno- 
tized. With little difficulty she was made to imitate every 
movement of the hypnotist; and illusions and hallucinations 
were easily called forth with her ; still she could not be made 
to lay hands on anyone. In endeavoring to make her do so by 
sternly commanding her to obey orders, she would raise her 
hand, but immediately it would relax in a lethargic manner. 
Another female patient enamored with a person who had for- 
merly caused her downfall, was through suggestion brought 
into his company. Still retaining her affection for him, she at 



HYPNOTIC METHODS AND CONDITIONS. 7 1 

once would become nervous and make efforts to evade him. It 
was, however, impossible to cause her to do him any injury. 
Any other command she would instantly follow." 

I again quote from the last named gentleman : " I once 
ordered one of my female patients, who was under hypnotic 
influence to go (upon being awakened from her hypnotic sleep) 
and kiss a young physician present. On awakening she went 
towards the doctor, took his hand, but observing the attention 
paid her by those present, she remained standing a f ew minutes, 
while a troubled look overspread her feature, and apparently 
she was in mental fear. In questioning her closely she admit- 
ted, blushing deeply, that she had the desire to kiss Dr. X, but 
found it contrary to her very nature to make such a breach of 
etiquette." 

Another example : " After placing a coin on the table," says 
Professor Pitres, 'I said to one of the sleeping patients: 'On 
awakening go to the table and pick up the coin which has been 
left there by some one and pocket it. You know it is stealing, 
but you need fear no trouble.' On awakening she went to the 
table, picked up the money and placed it in her pocket, but 
immediately after, she took it from her pocket and handed it to 
me with the remark that it did not belong to her, and asked me 
to find the party who had left it. ' I am no thief and would not 
keep it,' she added." 

Resistance may appear under very different forms. "A 
young girl, Miss W., had it suggested to her that it was very 
warm, and she at once began to wipe the sweat from her brow, 
remarking that the heat was intolerable. I suggested, 'Let 
us go and bathe.' She exclaimed, * What ! In your company ? ' 
'Yes? Why not,' I made reply; 'You are aware that ladies 
and gentlemen go bathing together at fashionable resorts, and 
they see nothing improper in it.' Evidently she was in doubt, 
but began, nevertheless, to undress. When she began taking 
off her corset, she hesitated and became convulsive. The ex*' 



72 HYPNOTIC METHODS AND CONDITIONS. 

periment was stopped at once, thus preventing bringing on 
hysterics, which with her, always appeared in this manner. 
The patient was of a very modest disposition, and hence the 
result. 

"Another lady, Sarah R., in similar instances never showed 
any signs of hesitancy, but -would immediately undress and take 
the imaginary bath. It must be remembered, however, that 
Sarah R. naturally was reckless and far from modest in her 
behavior." 

These experiments will clearly sustain me in my statements 
previously made. These proofs are evident and speak for 
themselves. 

Dangers such as have been spoKen of by persons unac- 
quainted with these phenomena, do not seem probable when 
the subject is properly investigated. The benefits to be derived 
are much greater and more numerous than is generally sup- 
posed; and at no distant day all this unwarranted prejudice 
concerning this subject and these phenomena will disappear — 
in the light of truth. 

PSYCHOLOGICAL IMPRESSIONS. 

There is a peculiar condition into which many subjects may 
be induced, which is variously called psychologized, magne- 
tized,, fascinated, charmed, etc. 

In this condition the subject is, to all appearances, fully 
awake and in possession of complete self-control, except that 
at the proper suggestions and passes he finds it impossible to 
move the hand, limb or any part of the body affected. In like 
manner any part of the body may be rendered insensible to 
pain, touch, or even to a surgical operation. 

IMPORTANT SUGGESTIONS. 

If the operator understands his art and does not use severe 
or startling methods, and if the subject submits without fear 



HYPNOTIC METHODS AND CONDITIONS. 73 

or apprehension, the latter will usually exhibit first the lethargic 
state when hypnotized. 

By proper suggestion and passes the subject may be readily 
brought from the lethargic into the somnambulistic condition. 
Somnambulism is only a deeper degree of lethargy; and it is 
best induced in the following manner: Place the subject in a 
perfectly easy position. Suggest that in a few minutes he (or 
she) will be in a very deep and peaceful sleep. Make passes 
from the forehead down over the chest to the knees, or the 
operator places his right hand over the subject's heart and his 
left hand upon the subject's forehead, and suggests deep and 
quiet sleep. 

If the operator uses startling methods, and if the subject is 
very nervous, apprehensive or hysterical, a cataleptic state is 
frequently produced as the first stage of hypnotism. 

To bring the subject from lethargy into a cataleptic state it 
is usually sufficient to place the arm, limb or head in a certain 
position. Then, touch the forehead, and, making passes over 
the part to be affected, suggest that in a minute (or some 
other short time) the said part will be rigid, and that the sub- 
ject will be unable to move or bend it. Some subjects are 
so naturally impressionable that if their arms or limbs are 
placed in a special position, with the proper suggestion, they 
will at once become cataleptic. 

There is never any danger of ill effects from lethargy or 
somnambulism ; and this proceeding is perfectly safe. All experi- 
ments, however, which involve catalepsy — and especially when 
the subject is caused to undergo any muscular strain — must be care- 
fully undertaken. In all such experiments the subject should 
be a healthy one, and not easily alarmed or predisposed, to any 
hysterical excitement. 

Every hypnotized subject should be fully disabused of any 
and every hallucination; and then fully and absolutely relieved 



74 HYPNOTIC METHODS AND CONDITIONS. 

of every hypnotic influence — and, of course, then fully 
awakened. 

It is never safe to hypnotize anyone afflicted with heart 
disease — much less to experiment with such a subject. 

I cannot leave this matter without the emphatic statement 
that the would-be hypnotist should be perfectly familiar with 
the theories and principles of the art before undertaking 
any experiment, even the simplest. And when thus familiar — 
and even after extended experience — every step in practical 
work in this line should be carefully considered and intelligently 
carried out. In fact, the more intelligent the operator, and the 
greater the experience, the more detailed and perfect his plans, 
and the more carefully will he proceed at every step of his 
operations. 

ALCOHOLIC TRANCE — -STRANGE THINGS THAT MEN DO UNDER 
THE INFLUENCE OF DRINK. 

" In somnambulism the person may go about and perform 
many intricate acts without consciousness — or recollection of 
them afterward," says science. In epilepsy distinct periods of 
unconsciousness occur. Acts unusual and often violent occur, 
which are never remembered. In mania these memory blanks 
are common, and the person is an automaton, acting without 
any conscious influence of the present. These are familiar illus- 
trations of some unknown pathological and psychological states 
of the brain, in which memory is suspended or cut off, and the 
operations of the mind go on without realization of the sur- 
roundings or the influence of experience. This is some obscure 
form of psychological palsy, in which he has no recollection of 
his acts during this time. From the many clinical studies of 
cases which have been made, the following general conclusions 
seem to be sustained : 

I. Alcoholic trance is not an unusual condition of inebriety. 
The victim is literally an automaton, and acts without memory 



HYPNOTIC METHODS AND CONDITIONS. 75 

or consciousness of passing events — a state which may last from 
a few minutes to several days. 

2. It is distinct from epilepsy, hysteria, or any known forms 
of mania ; and it is found associated with some unknown condi- 
tion following alcoholic poisoning, continuously or at intervals. 

3. This condition is probably one of brain exhaustion, fol- 
lowed by a lowering of consciousness till events are no longer 
clearly remembered ; or it is a suspension of nerve force in cer- 
tain directions, closely allied to the paralysis of certain* brain 
functions ; hence there are profound disturbances of brain cen- 
ters, and impaired and lessened responsibility. 

One group of trance cases seems never to do anything out- 
side a natural, accustomed order of every-day life. Thus a 
farmer in this state goes on with his regular work, a physician 
continues to visit his patients, and a railroad conductor attends 
to all his usual duties, without any memory of these states. A 
second group of trance cases seems prominent by unusual acts 
and thoughts. Thus, a banker, in this state, left his regular 
work and went round delivering tracts in the lower parts of the 
city. A quiet, retiring man became vociferous, bold and aggres- 
sive. A peaceful man was combative, a truthful man untruth- 
ful, and a conscientious, religious man was treacherous and 
skeptical. Later these events were perfect blanks in their mem- 
ory. In a third group of trance cases some unusual line of con- 
duct seems to grow out of the surrounding unexpectedly ; or 
some old buried thought or conception comes to the surface. 
Thus a clergyman insists on riding with the engineer in the 
engine. A skeptical physician takes part in a prayer meeting. 
A merchant goes round threatening to kill an old schoolmaster 
who punished him in boyhood. A wealthy man has a new will 
written, disposing of his property differently every time. In 
the last two groups criminal cases occur most frequently, although 
some very remarkable instances have been reported under the 
first group. 



*j6 HYPNOTIC METHODS AND CONDITIONS. 

In a little work entitled " Alcoholic Somnambulism," Prof. 
Jurnsky, of St. Petersburg, mentions the case of a chief of 
police, who was an inebriate, ordering the arrest and execution 
of two suspected Jews. His orders were carried out in form, 
but not in reality. A day later he recovered from the trance 
state, and had no recollection of the past ; he had total amnesia 
of this act. Another case is cited of an officer who ordered a 
house burned down, on the supposition that the inmates were 
preparing to destroy his command. Two days later he awoke 
with no memory of this event, and could give no reason for the 
act. In these cases the somnambulistic act was along the line 
of his usual work, and performed without the slightest con- 
sciousness of its nature and consequences. The criminal trance 
cases may be divided into two classes, one of which seems to 
have no history of criminality previous to the commission of 
the crime. They are inebriates of active, neurotic temperament, 
who have occupied reputable stations in life and belong to the 
better classes. All crime is unusual with them, and apparently 
grows out of alcoholic poisoning. 

The second class are the low neurotics and defective by 
birth and education. They have a history of irregularities of 
life and conduct that seems to prepare the way for criminal acts; 
and probably they are more subject to the trance state because 
of defective heredity. Clinical facts indicate that in all cases 
of inebriety there is a defective brain power, and general per- 
version of healthy activity ; also, the door is open for many 
varied nerve changes and degrees of instability, which always 
give a doubt to the sanity of the victim. The fact of being an 
inebriate points to an unsound mind ; and to more or less inca- 
pacity to act or think normally. When the trance state is de- 
termined the actual responsibility or cognizance of right or 
wrong is suspended — the person is a mental waif, without com- 
pass or chart. No evidence of premeditation or apparent 
judgment in his actions can change this fact. Any special act 



HYPNOTIC METHODS AND CONDITIONS. 77 

may spring up from some impression laid up in the past, which, 
when conscious reason is withdrawn, takes on form and sem- 
blance. The real condition of the mind is always more or 
less concealed. When the case is a periodical inebriate, with 
distinct free intervals of sanity, a possibility of concealed or 
masked epilepsy should always be considered. Epilepsy is 
likely to be present or follow from some organic tendency of 
favoring conditions. When the defense of no memory of the 
act is made the case should receive a thorough medical study 
before any conclusion of responsibility can be reached. 




THINKS HIMSELF A GOOD HYPNOTIST- 



CHAPTER V. 



HYPNOTISM DEFENDED. 

POPULAR MISAPPREHENSIONS CONCERNING HYPNOTISM. 

Many invalids who could easily be cured of painful diseases 
by receiving hypnotic treatment, still, in spite of this available 
remedy continue to suffer, because they cannot brace themselves 
up to try the method of treatment. The reason is usually that 
they have the erroneous idea that to be hypnotized is a positive 
way of weakening the character. In short, they imagine that 
mentally they would be too much of an automaton — subject to 
the hypnotist's will, and blindly followhis instructions, not being 
able to refuse to obey whatever he might suggest for them to 
perform. This is a totally erroneous idea. On the contrary, 
the hypnotist's power is limited ; and this is attested by authori- 
ties who have made a special study of hypnotism. 

The fact is that to be hypnotized does not change the sub- 
ject's moral character. If one in the waking and normal condi- 
tion is an honest and upright person, he will also be so during 
the sleep ; and just as it is impossible to induce honest people to 
do anything wrong in the normal condition — so exactly is the 
case during the hypnotic sleep — as the character and moral power 
is the same. There is this safeguard for those who are anxious 
that no misunderstanding may occur : always have friends or 
relatives present during the hypnotic treatments. 

Professor R. A. Campbell, the well known investigator 
and authority on psychic matters, and who has made a special 
study of this subject, has kindly allowed me to quote the follow- 
ing from his forthcoming work : 

" The questions as to the benefits and dangers of hypnotism, 

78 



HYPNOTISM DEFENDED. 79 

are by no means answered. There are in the nature of the case, 
some results to the hypnotized subject. These results may be 
either transient, temporary or permanent; and they may be 
beneficial, indifferent or injurious. The facts in the cases are of 
great importance, but they are not as yet, fully known. Even 
the theories agreed upon by able and experienced hypnotists 
must not be confounded with, or mistaken for, demonstrated 
laws. That many wonderful and permanent therapeutic re- 
sults have been obtained through hypnotism is freely conceded 
by everyone who has given this subject any fair investigation. 
That cures by hypnotism lie in the domain of the mental, the 
nervous, the fluctional and the muscular, is well known by all 
who are acquainted with the facts. The limit of such benefits 
and the possible extent of such curative results are alike matters 
of theory — which have not yet been fully determined. Enough ? 
however, is known to warrant the employment of this partially- 
known remedial agency in a large range of cases that have 
always puzzled and usually baffled the medical profession. 

" As to injuries inflicted by intelligent and proper hypnotic 
treatment they are mainly conjectured possibilities, rather than 
observed and verified effects. So far as they have any reality 
they are of the same nature as the incidental injuries of any 
surgical operation — a temporary tax on the patient's comfort, 
strength and free will; and they are cheerfully — nay thank- 
fully — borne for the sake of the desired beneficial result on the 
therapeutic plane of their operation. 

66 The claim that hypnotism will prove a powerful agent in 
reforming the vicious or in demoralizing the innocent or virtu- 
ous is not founded on any well known fact of its influence 
either way. That the subject while hypnotized may have sug- 
gested to him an act — or even a series of acts — which he is to 
perform in his subsequent seemingly fully awakened condi- 
tion is an established truth. There is, however, no case in 
which this suggestion has been obeyed when its performance 



8o HYPNOTISM DEFENDED. 

involved a heroic sacrifice beyond the ideal of the subject ; or 
when it called for any act which was shocking to the subject's 
sense of propriety or integrity — much less when it induced any 
crime against the person. The simple truth seems to be that 
the morality of the subject is in no perceptible way modified. 
The hypnotic subject may be induced to perform certain acts, 
and he may be instructed in certain facts or truths, but there is 
no warrant for the supposition that his intellect may be dulled 
or sharpened, that his morality can be debauched or purified, or 
that his disposition can be changed." 

Mr. Sinnett, the well-known Theosophist and investigator,, 
in his late work, " Mesmerism and Hypnotism," very thoroughly 
disposes of the false idea so insiduously propagated by those 
who are interested in making the practice of hypnotism a sub- 
ject of legislation, that, even when performed by an earnest and 
high-minded operator, there is real danger to the subject in mes- 
meric treatment. There are not lacking indications that the med- 
ical faculty are feeling the ground and preparing the way for 
introducing into Parliament in England a proposal similar to 
that lately introduced into the New York State Legislature. 
The ground asserted will be the danger of the practice when 
performed by anyone not a qualified physician. Mr. Sinnett 
exposes in the clearest way the absurdity of this proposed re- 
striction. But in view of the threatened action it is highly 
necessary to have brought together, and readily available, a mass 
of evidence and testimony tending to rebut the misleading asser- 
tions of the interested class. 

THE DANGERS OF HYPNOTISM EASILY AVOIDED BY CARE ON 

x 

THE PART OF THE HYPNOTIZED. 

As regards the dangers of hypnotism Dr. Bramwell, the 
celebrated physician, believed they were easily avoided by a lit- 
tle care on the part of the subject. He had been accustomed to 
impress on his patients that they were entirely free to accept or 



HYPNOTISM DEFENDED. 8l 

refuse his suggestions. In one or two cases he found his dec- 
laration of freedom had been too impressive ; because the pa- 
tient, when separated from him for some time, had supposed 
that he would not be able to renew the influence. 

Prof. Delbceuf (Liege, Belgium) said that at all times the 
mind of man had been capable of influencing the body, but it 
was only in recent times that this action had scientifically put 
in evidence. Was it necessary for this purpose to put the brain 
into an abnormal condition ? Was that which was called hyp- 
notism a state against nature? Not at all. The question car- 
ried the answer with it. To hypnotize a person was to per- 
suade him that he could not do a thing which he believed he could 
not be prevented from doing. This persuasion might be indi- 
rectly produced. The indirect method consisted in producing 
artificially that which is known as hypnotism, and it was only 
the development of suggestibility — the exaltation of the will. 

Take, for example, a high official whose nervous and agita- 
ted state had rendered him unhappy for twenty years. He 
showed to him, without sending him to sleep, that he had the 
faculty of not feeling pain. He passed a needle through 
his arm without making him jump. He showed to him in that 
way the power of his will. That will had only to be directed 
against his nervousness. The subject understood it and was 
cured. In mental maladies the mind must act on' the mind, the 
healthy part of the brain on the diseased part. He cited the 
case of a woman possessed with the idea of killing her husband 
and children. Every day she asked herself in rising if that was 
not the day for her to accomplish her murders. He defied her 
to call out the morbid thought while he looked at her. Having 
succeded, which was very easy, he announced to her that the 
following day from eight to nine she would not be able to think 
of killing those who were dear to her. Success was, so to 
speak, inevitable. By degrees it was possible to charm away 
the morbid ideas for two hours, then for day, then for a week. 



82 HYPNOTISM DEFENDED. . 

The cure was accomplished. Was there any mystery in that? 
Was there the production of an abnormal condition ? Evidently 
not. Apart from the starting point, which was the conviction 
of the subject that she was dealing- with a man endowed with a 
curious power, or that she submitted herself to a curious treat- 
ment, the subject had been simply led to act by her own will 
upon the ideas which she thus succeeded in dispelling. 

PRACTICAL VALUE OF HYPNOTISM IN THE HEALING ART. 

"Is it possible to induce hallucination? And if possible, is 
it safe? 

"A satisfactory answer to these questions is furnished by the 
continued experimenting in hypnotic hallucinations, which has 
been carried on of late years at Nancy and elsewhere. Pro- 
fessor Bernheim and his friends have conclusively proved that 
hallucinations can be induced in very many subjects — healthy 
both in body and mind — without any kind of consequent ill 
effect. There is no necessary injury even from what looks 
most dangerous, namely, the very frequent induction of hyp- 
notic hallucination in a diseased subject. ' In one of my pa- 
tients ,' says Dr. Bernheim, ; a very intelligent woman, affected 
with locomotor ataxia — I have allowed myself to make, with 
her consent, certain experiments (with the view of testing the 
effect of repeated hallucination), while carefully watching her 
physical condition, and keeping myself prepared to stop the 
experiment at the slightest alarming indication. I have on 
several occasions subjected her for several days in succession to 
complex and repeated hallucinations — hypnotic and post-hyp- 
notic, immediate and deferred — and no trace has remained of all 
this. During three years that she has passed in my ward s in 
spite of very frequent suggestions given in waking hours and 
in the trance, her intelligence has continued equally alert, nor 
has her power of initiative been impaired.' 

"This is by no means an isolated case. Professor Bernheim 
himself has several other living examples, some of whom he 



HYPNOTISM DEFENDED. 83 

has allowed me to see. And in a long series of experiments 
begun by Edmund Gurney at Brighton in 1883 and continued 
at intervals (mainly by Professor and Mrs. Sidgwick) up to 
the present time, the same healthy and intelligent young men 
have been subjected (1887-92) to scores of hypnotic and post- 
hypnotic hallucinations, with no bodily or mental injury what- 
ever. There is, therefore, no reason to suppose that the mere 
fact of undergoing a hallucination is, in itself, either injurious, 
or an indication of weakness or disease. — (Proceedings of the 
Society for Psychical Research, London)." 

Mr. F. W. H. Myers says furthermore: "I am assuming, 
of course, that the experiments are conducted on suitable sub- 
jects, and with proper care. Harm may no doubt be done by 
hallucinating weakened subjects, or even by forgetting to remove 
the hallucination which has been induced." 

An interesting circumstance I will mention: M. de Puys£- 
gur one day asked a young woman, Genevieve by name, while 
she was in the hypnotic condition, how far his power over 
her extended, as he had a short time previously commanded 
her to strike him with a leather strap, which she held in her 
hand. " Seeing that you found yourself compelled to strike 
me just now, although I have done so much for you, then I am 
almost forced to believe that if I insisted upon it, I could make 
you do whatever I might wish, for instance, suggest that you 
undress, etc." "No, Marquis," she answered, "that would be 
something altogether different. As to me striking you, I -was 
very loth to do so, but as it was all a joke, and you absolutely 
insisted on it, I at once obeyed, but in regard to what you 
now mentioned, you would never be able to compel me to re- 
move all my clothing. My shoes and headwear I am willing to 
remove as often as you desire ; but beyond that you could rot 
control me." 

Another young lady, Cathrine Montmecourt, who was present 
during the above mentioned conversation, remarked laughingly. 



84 HYPNOTISM DEFENDED. 

that when anyone was in Genevieve's condition, they could as- 
suredly be compelled to do whatever was suggested ; and she 
was far from being convinced by the subject's statement. 
" Half an hour later," Puys^gur says, " I had occasion to put 
Cathrine in the hypnotic condition. I directed the same ques- 
tion to her which I had asked Genevieve; and the answer was 
exactly the same. I reminded her of her opinion during her 
waking condition. ' Yes, that was then,' she replied, ' but now 
I look at it in a different light.' 'But if I was determined 
that you should undress, what then ?' ' Then I would 
awaken,' she answered, c and it would make me very ill.' 
Genevieve, who in the meantime was brought back into nor- 
mal state, now completely gave Cathrine's previous opinion, 
and made the very same remarks; However earnestly all 
those who, having been present during this double act, tried to 
convince her that she had said exactly the same while she was 
in the hypnotic condition, she would under no circumstances 
believe them. 

Dr. Giles de la Tourette also remarks in one of his 
works of 1887 about a subject, " M. Violet," he says, "who 
during the hypnotic condition, and in a complete somnambu- 
listic state one day, had a pen in his hand. 

" I inquired of him if he would sign his name to a blank, 
which I then would fill out as I desired.' ' Yes,' he replied. 
i Well, then, I could easily procure for myself a deed of all you 
possess, without you being at all aware of it.' v< No, that 
would be impossible, as I "would be able to ascertain your rea- 
son before giving my signature. I could at least change my 
writing so that it would not be my usual signature.' c That 
would not matter. I would have your name and that is all that 
would be required.' c But under those conditions I would 
under no circumstances give my signature.' Surprised at the 
determined voice with which he spoke, I asked : ' But when I 
insisted on having you sign vour name, you would consent, as 



HYPNOTISM DEFENDED. #$ 

I have you completely in my power.' ' No, your power over 
me extends only to a certain degree, and if you would insist on 
me doing anything like that, it would occasion me great pain, 
and I would awaken.' 

The Marquis after that commenced the following observa- 
tions : " All my investigations regarding this science have con- 
vinced me that in regard to animal Magnetism in the hands of 
conscientious and honorable operators, we can only consider it 
as a remedial agent, with which to do as much good as possible ; 
while in the hands of unscrupulous people it does not occasion 
any such fear as some suppose ; partly because in a case of that 
kind the operator would not be able to secure complete submis- 
sion ; probably because even if that would be possible, the sub- 
ject could not be successfuly suggested to perform anything 
without seriously risking his health, and the operator would not 
then gain his object." 

It is clear to me that hypnotism applied in the right way 
and in appropriate diseases, will result in so-called wonders — 
even in diseases where modern medicines have proved unsuccess- 
ful. As we have learned in this chapter from the enunciations 
of the best known hypnotists, the danger attached to hypnotic 
treatment is far from being so great as ignoramuses and its ene- 
mies claim. Several of our leading daily papers from time to 
time have contained articles referring to the danger of hypno- 
tism when practiced by unscrupulous performers. It can not be 
denied that there may be, at times, some reason for anxiety, but 
in general this matter has been much exaggerated. Though 
hypnotism may be misused in a single case, there is no proof 
that this is often or successfully done. The hypnotizer must be a 
wretch, with nothing but bad intentions, who would take ad- 
vantage of his momentary influence over his subject to suggest 
evil or criminal actions. But even to gain success in such a case 
the subject must in the normal state be an immoral or a Very 
weak character, and, hence, easily influenced to do wrong. 



86 



HYPNOTISM DEFENDED. 




THE MAGIC CRYSTAL. 

FROM A PAINTING BY MR. FRANK DICKSEE, R. A., 

IN THE ROYAL ENGLISH ACADEMY. 



CHAPTER VI. 



HYPNOTIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 

THE MYSTERY PRACTICED BY MAGICIANS OF EGYPT 

EXPERIMENT IN CLAIRVOYANCE A STRANGE 

SEANCE IN EGYPT EXTRACT FROM 

LANE'S WORK ON EGYPT. 

"A few weeks after my second arrival in Egypt my neigh- 
bor, Osman, interpreter of the British consulate, brought a 
magician to me, and I fixed a day for his visiting me, to give 
a proof of his skill, for which he is so much famed. 

" He came at the time appointed, about two hours before 
noon; but he seemed uneasy, frequently looked up at the sky 
through the window and remarked that the "weather was unpro- 
pitious ; it was dull and cloudy, and the wind was boisterous. 
The experiment was performed with two boys, one after the 
other. With the first it was partly successful, but with the 
other, it completely failed. The magician said he could do no 
more that day, and that he would come in the evening of a sub- 
sequent day. 

"He kept his appointment, and admitted that the time was 
favorable. While waiting for my neighbor, before mentioned, 
to come and witness the performance, we took pipes and coffee, 
and the magician chatted with me on different subjects. He 
was a fine, tall, and stout man, of a rather fair complexion, with 
a dark brown beard. He was shabbily dressed, and generally 
wore a large green turban — being a descendant of the prophet. 
In his conversation he was affable and unaffected. He pro- 
fessed to me that his wonders were effected by the agency of 

87 



88 HYPNOTIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 

good spirits ; but to others he has said the reverse — that his 
magic was satanic. 

"In preparing for the experiment of the magic mirror of 
ink, which, like some other performances of a similar nature, is 
here termed c darb elmendel,' the magician first asked me for a 
reed pen and ink, a piece of paper and a pair of scissors; and, 
having cut off a narrow strip of the paper, he wrote on it cer- 
tain forms of invocation, together with another charm, by which 
he professed to accomplish the object of the experiment. He 
did not attempt to conceal these ; and on my asking him to give 
me copies of them he readily consented, and immediately wrote 
them for me, explaining to me at the same time, that the object 
he had in view was accomplished through the influence of the 
two first words, 'Tarshun' and ' Tarzooshun,' which, he said, 
were the names of two genii — his familiar spirits. 

" Having written these, the magician cut off the paper con- 
taining the forms of invocation from that upon which the other 
charms were written, and cut the former into six strips. He 
then explained to me that the object of the latter charm (which 
contains part of the twenty-first verse of the Soorat Kaf, or 
fiftieth chapter of the Kur-an) was to open the boy's eyes in a 
supernatural manner — to make his sight pierce into what is to 
us the invisible world. I had prepared, by the magician's direc- 
tion, some frankincense and coriander seed an;d a chafing-dish 
with some live charcoal in it. These were now brought into 
the room, together with a boy, who was to be employed — he 
had been called in, by my desire, from among some boys in the 
street returning from a manufactory, and he was about eight or 
nine years of age. In reply to my inquiry respecting the 
descriptions of persons who couid see in the magic mirror of 
ink, the magician said that they were a boy, not arrived at 
puberty, a virgin, a black female, and a pregnant woman, The 
chafing-dish was placed before him and the boy, and the latter 
was placed on a seat. The magician now desired my servant 



HYPNOTIC CLAIRVOYANCE. So, 

to put some frankincense and coriander seed into the chafing- 
dish ; then taking hold of the boy's right hand, he drew in the 
palm of it a magic square, of which a copy is here given* 

" The figures which it contains are Arabic numerals. In 
the center he poured a little ink, and desired the boy to look 
into it and tell him if he could see his face reflected in it. He 
replied that he saw his face clearly. The magician, holding the 
boy's hand all the while, told him to continue looking intently 
into the ink, and not to raise his head. 



< 


/ 


V 


A 
? 


B 

1 


N> 


> 


£* 


"3 



MAGIC MIRROR. 

" He then took one of the little strips of paper inscribed 
with the forms of invocation, and dropped it into the chafing- 
dish upon the burning coals and perfumes, which had already 
filled the room with their smoke; and as he did this he com- 
menced an indistinct muttering of words, which he continued 
throughout the whole process, except when he had to ask 
the boy a question or to tell him what he was to say. The 



go HYPNOTIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 

piece of paper containing the words from the Kur-an he placed 
inside of the boy's ta-kee-yeh or scull-cap. He then asked him 
if he saw anything in the ink, and was answered 'No'; but 
about a minute afterward the boy, trembling and seemingly 
much frightened, said: 'I see a man sweeping the ground!' 
' When he has done sweeping,' said the magician, ' tell me.' 
Presently the boy said : ' He has done.' The magician then 
again interrupted his mutterings to ask the boy if he knew 
what a ' bey-rak ' (or flag) was, and being answered c yes,' de- 
sired him to say, c Bring a flag.' The boy did so ; and soon 
said: * He has brought a flag.' c What color is it? ' asked the 
magician. The boy replied, e Red.' He was told to call for 
another flag, which he did, and soon after he said that he saw 
another brought, and that it was black. In like manner he was 
told to call for a third, fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh, which 
he described as being successively brought before him, specify- 
ing their colors — white, green, black, red and blue. The ma- 
gician then asked him (as he did also each time that a new flag 
was described as being brought), 'How many flags have you 
now before you ? ' ' Seven,' answered the boy. While this 
was going on, the magician put the second and third strips of 
paper upon which the forms of invocation were written, into 
the chafing-dish; and fresh frankincense and coriander seed 
having been repeatedly added, the fumes became painful to the 
eyes. When the boy had described the seven flags as appearing 
to him, he was desired to say: 'Bring the Sultan's tent, and 
pitch it' This he said; and in about a minute after he said : 
'Some men have brought the tent — a large green tent — they 
are pitching it ; ' and presently added : ' They have set it up.' 
6 Now,' said the magician, ' order the soldiers to come, and to 
pitch their camp around the tent of the Sultan.' The boy did 
as he was desired, and immediately said : ' I see a great many 
soldiers, with their tents ; they have pitched their tents.' He was 
then told to order that the soldiers should be drawn up in ranks; 



HYPNOTIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 91 

and having done so, he presently said that he saw them thus ar- 
ranged. The magician had put the fourth of the little strips of 
paper into the chafing-dish, and soon after did the same with the 
fifth. He now said: 'Tell some of the people to bring a bull.' 
The boy gave the order required, and said ; c I see a bull ; it is 
red ; four men are dragging it along, and three are beating it.' 
He was told to desire them to kill it, and cut it up, and to put 
the meat into sauce-pans and cook it. He did as he was directed, 
and described these operations as apparently performed before 
his eyes. 'Tell the soldiers,' said the magician, 'to eat it.' The 
boy did so, and said : ' They are eating it ; they have done, and 
are washing their hands.' The magician then told him to call 
for the Sultan; and the boy having done this, said: 'I see the 
Sultan riding to his tent on a bay horse, and he has on his head 
a high, red cap ; he has alighted at his tent, and sat down within 
it.' ' Desire them to bring coffee to the Sultan,' said the ma- 
gician, ' and to form the court.' The orders were given by the 
boy, and he said he saw them performed. The magician had put 
the last of the six little strips of paper into the chafing-dish. 
In his mutterings I distinguished nothing but the words 
of the written invocation, frequently repeated, excepting 
on two or three occasions, when I heard him say, ' If they de- 
mand information, inform them; and be ye veracious.' But 
much that he repeated was inaudible ; and as I did not ask him 
to teach me his art, I do not pretend to assert that I am fully 
acquainted with his invocation. 

" He then addressed himself to me, and asked me if I wished 
the boy to see any person, who was absent, or dead. I named 
Lord Nelson, of whom the boy had evidently never heard ; for it 
was with much difficulty that he pronounced the name, after sev- 
eral trials. The magician desired the boy to say to the Sultan, 
' My master salutes thee, and desires thee to bring Lord Nelson 
— bring him before my eyes that I may see him, speedily.' 
The boy said so, and almost immediately added : ' A messenger 



92 HYPNOTIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 

has gone and has returned, and brought a man, dressed in a 
black suit of European clothes ; the man has lost his left arm.' 
He then paused for a moment or two, and looking more closely 
into the ink, said ; i No ; he has not lost his arm ; but it is 
placed to his breast.' This correction made his description more 
striking than it had been without it, since Lord Nelson gener- 
ally had his empty sleeve attached to the breast of his coat, but 
it was the right arm that he had lost. Without saying that I 
suspected the boyhad made a mistake, I asked the magician 
whether the object appeared in the ink as if actually before the 
eyes, or as in a glass, which make the right appear the left. He 
answered, ' That they appear as in a mirror.' This rendered 
the boy's description faultless. 

" The next person I called for was a native of Egypt, who 
has been for many years a resident of England, where he had 
adopted our dress, and who had long been confined to his bed 
by illness before I embarked for this country. I thought that 
his name — one not very uncommon in Egypt — might make 
the boy describe him incorrrectly, though another boy, on a 
former visit to the magician, had described this same person as 
wearing an European dress, like that in which I last saw him. 
In this present case the boy said : c Here- is 'a man brought on a 
kind of a bier, and wrapped up in a sheet.' This description 
would suit, supposing the person in question to be still confined 
to his bed, or if he be dead. The boy described his face as cov- 
ered, and was told to order that it should be uncovered. This 
he did, and said : « His face is pale, and he has a mustache, but 
no beard ; ' which was correct. 

" Several other persons were successively called for, but the 
boy's description of them were imperfect, though not incorrect. 
He represented each object as appearing less distinct than the 
preceding one, as if his light was gradually becoming dim ; he 
was a minute or more before he could give any account of the 
persons he proposed to see towards the close of the perform- 



HYPNOTIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 93 

ance, and the magician said it was useless to proceed with him. 

" Another boy was then brought in, and the magic square, 
etc., made in his hand, but he could see nothing. The magician 
said he was too old. 

" Though completely puzzled, I was somewhat disappointed 
with his performances, for they fell short of what he had accom- 
plished in many instances in presence of certain of my friends 
and countrymen. On one of these occasions an Englishman 
present, ridiculed the performance, and said that nothing would 
satisfy him but a correct description of the appearance of his 
own father, of whom he was sure no one of the company had 
any knowledge. The boy accordingly having called by name 
for the person alluded to, described a man in a Frank dress, 
with his hand placed to his head, wearing spectacles, and with 
one foot on the ground and the other raised behind him, as if 
he were stepping down from a seat. The description was ex- 
actly true in every respect ; the peculiar position of the hand 
was occasioned by an almost constant headache, and that of the 
foot or leg by a stiff knee, caused by a fall from a horse in hunt- 
ing. I am assured that on this occasion the boy accurately 
described each person and thing that was called for. 

" On another occasion Shakespeare was described with the 
most minute correctness, both as to person and dress; and I 
might add several other cases in which the same magician has 
excited astonishment in the sober minds of Englishmen of my 
acquaintance. A short time since, after performing in the usual 
manner by means of a boy, he prepared the magic mirror in the 
hand of a young lady, who, on looking into it for a little while, 
said that she saw a broom sweeping the ground without any- 
body holding it, and was so much frightened that she would 
look no longer." 

author's comments on the above. 

The subjects of this interesting experiment with the magic 
mirror drawn in ink in the palm of the hand were, I think. 



94 HYPNOTIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 

persons in a light hypnotic state. Everyone who knows a little 
about hypnotism will understand this, when he notices the fol- 
lowing : First, that the subject for the experiment was told to 
have his whole mind fixed on the coming subject ; second, the 
continuous gazing at the figures drawn in the hand. One 
thing which is especially remarkable and impossible to pass 
without notice is that the subjects for the experiments in nearly 
all successful cases were minors, and consequently very sensi- 
tive and easily hypnotized. I feel^ therefore, quite certain that 
I have the best reason for my opinion — especially as several 
times, with more or less success, I have tried the same experi- 
ments. And I have noticed that the subjects nearly always 
get paler, often breathe with difficulty, the pupils of the eyes 
become more than usually enlarged. Furthermore, the subjects 
were, for a few minutes after the sleep, somewhat beside 
themselves, which showed the results of self-hypnotism. 

CLAIRVOYANT EXPERIMENTS IN GOTHENBURG, SWEDEN. 

When in Gothenburg, Sweden, about seven years ago, I 
gave a lecture and hypnotic seance in the home of a well- 
known Swedish nobleman, Count Y . A few words 

about the magic mirrors made the count ask me to try this ex- 
periment. In the audience were about 25 to 30 persons — all 
friends and acquaintances of the family; but I saw in an in- 
stant that I could do the experiment with none of them. It 
was somewhat late in the evening, about 10 o'clock. A broker 
in the audience said that a girl of 10 or 11 years of age, the 
daughter of one of his employes, very well answered the 
description I had given of a sensitive. He gave her name and 
address, which was near by, and a messenger was hurriedly 
dispatched to secure her presence. The messenger returned 
with the girl, as the parents did not at all object to the 
experiment. We continued the seance } the girl was re- 
markably sensitive and a superb clairvoyant. She was told to 



HYPNOTIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 95 

see the Countess X. in Stockholm. She answered "yes" with- 
out the slightest hesitation, and gave a full description of the 
countess and the room in which she (the countess) was that 
very same evening. (Stockholm, the metropolis of Sweden, 
is 350 miles from Gothenburg, and the little girl had never 
seen the lady in question). Then she proceeded to give a 
minute description of a young gentleman whom she saw in the 
same room together with the countess. Several in the audience 
were laughing ; the description was very accurate, and the 
very picture of Count Y., who had been for the last six months 
the countess's very ardent and favored admirer. But at last the 
description became somewhat exaggerated and a little frivolous, 
so I was obliged to cut short the experiment. Something con- 
cerning the countess and her lover was not pleasant for the 
audience, and especially Baron V. looked very annoyed. I 
pitied the countess, too, who, in supposed safety behind locked 
doors, thought herself barred out from the world's slander, 
knowing nothing about the fact that she really was on public 
exhibition. The next night I went to Christiania, on a four 
months' trip through Norway, to lecture upon hypnotism. 
When I again reached Gothenburg, I met my former host. 
He told me that he in the meantime had looked the matter up 
concerning our somnambulist's description of the countess, and 
found everything correct. Also a laughable situation, which 
she had the same evening predicted for the countess, on a 
certain day, proved to be correct. 

A. GYPSY PALMISTER PROVES AN EXCELLENT CLAIRVOYANT 

AND PREDICTS FOR THE DANISH ROYAL FAMILY 

ITS FUTURE DESTINY. 

Christian IX, King of Denmark, is the son of Wilhelm, 
Duke of Schleswig-Holstein, Sonderborg and Gliicksborg. He 
was born April 8th, in the year 18 18. When a poor prince he 
married Princess Louise, daughter of the Duke of Hessen- 



96 HYPNOTIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 

Cassel — and yet you can hear from high and low the old story, 
which is like Andersen's fairy tales, about the young princesses, 
Alexandria and Dagmar, sewing their own gowns and helping 
their mother in the house — the two fairy daughters of Denmark 
who some day should be, one the popular Princess of Wales, 
with the double crown as Queen of England and Empress of 
India w aiting for her graceful head ; the other empress of the 
vast Russias, the mild, loving light in the life of the great Czar. 
But in their early childhood days it was nothing unusual to 
see the whole family — father, mother and children — together in 
one carriage; and it is said that the king, who then lived in 
Copenhagen as officer in the army, was obliged to give lessons 
in drawing to earn enough for the necessities of life. On a 
trip through Germany, the princely officer, his wife and three 
daughters met a gypsy, who begged permission to read the 
young daughters' destiny in the palms of their hands. None 
objected ; she predicted that the Princess Alexandra, now mar- 
ried to the Prince of Wales, in the future was destined to wear 
a double crown ; that Dagmar, now Empress of Russia, should 
be the head of a great empire; and Thyra would get the title 
of queen, but no kingdom. As it is known, the last princess is 
married to the Duke of Cumberland, by right — but on account 
of the iron hand of the German Empire, only by name — the 
King of Hanover. The princesses were laughing, without the 
slightest idea that every word would prove to be the truth. Of 
course it was for them as castles built in the air. There was no 
luxury, no splendor, in the house of the poor officer, no great 
receptions of emperors and kings, but it was a home, a home as 
happy as but few in the whole of Europe. And still now — 
yes, that is the best proof — once a year, every summer, the 
world's eyes are turned to Fredensborg, the Danish king's 
country residence. There they gather together — with nearly 
as little space as once in the small carriage — daughters and sons, 
with their husbands and wives, nearly the whole royalty of 



HYPNOTIC CLAIRVOYANCE. 



97 



Europe, with children and grandchildren, and pass their days 
in sunshine and happiness with the father-in-law and the mother- 
in-law of nearly the whole of Europe. 

The gypsy prediction has proved to be true — everybody 
knows it is true. 




B 



imrr 






•••"1 !m<C-sHH^'I w 



, .--. I •! V _, s.->l|* \_A *>— '/ <i liar 



£, 






.a^f-/i x '-a\ : i //• ill 



m$m 



~y i?--/ 



./_/. 






z*' 



■r ' x ^ 



/ 



^ 



</ i/7 



3L 



// 



law// '.* 



Ml li 



1L 



l*s< 



INDIA. PAST IDEAL HOME OF HYPNOTISM, PRESENT HOME 

OF IDEAL HYPNOTISM. 



CHAPTER VII. 



CRYSTAL VISIONS. 

MARVELLOUS EXPERIMENTS PRODUCED BY LOOKING INTO A 
TUMBLER OF WATER AND A PLAIN CRYSTAL. 

Mr. F. W. H. Myers says in December number of Psychical 
Research, 1892: "I will add a few detached cases of crystal 
vision for which the authority seems good. In the first case 
the seer, now married to an Englishman, is known to me, and 
the witnesses, Colonel Wickham and his wife, Princess di 
Christofaro, (whose acquaintance I made in consequence of 
their publication of the following incidents in Light} have 
assured me that the following incidents, although now the only 
ones which can be clearly remembered, were paralleled by sev- 
eral others during the time of Ruth's possession of the power 
which seems now to have left her. She has never been in any 
way *a professional clairvoyant, and is, so far as I can judge, a 
trustworthy person. The value of the following case, however, 
does not depend upon her trustworthiness, but on the recollec- 
tion retained by Colonel Wickham and his wife of incidents, 
which, even if we suppose errors of memory as to details, "were 
of a very definite type. 

Early in the spring of the year 1885, I was living at Colaba 

with my husband, a major of the Royal artillery. Colaba is 

the Royal artillery station, and is situated about two miles from 

Bombay. For some little time I had been studying Gregory's 

Magnetism. The subject possessing a peculiar fascination for 

me, I had experimented occasionally, with varying success, on 

the different servants (Indian for the most part) of my estab- 

98 



CRYSTAL VISIONS. 



99 



lishment. Over one girl, a half-caste, my children's nurse, I 
possessed great influence, and used frequently to magnetize a 
tumbler of water, so that by making her look therein I might 
learn what my friends at a distance were doing. 

This girl was no ignoranjt native, but a well-educated young 
woman, able to read and write, who spoke English nearly as 
well as I do myself, having been educated in the Protestant 
training school at Belgaum. Many things which this girl told 
me, I have since discovered to have actually occurred ; others I 
have never yet been able to verify. 

One day, the morning Lord Reay was expected to arrive in 
Bombay, the Royal artillery (of which my husband was then 
in command) was, together with the other European troops 
quartered at Calaba, ordered to line the approach to the landing 
place at the Apollo Bunder, all officers having to appear in full 
regimentals. We were still sitting at breakfast when my hus- 
band called to his orderly to get out his uniform and place it 
ready for him to put on The man soon returned, and with a 
bewildered air, stammered, as he salaamed before his master: 
" Sahib, me no can find the dress pouch-belt." " Don't talk 
nonsense, you must be as blind as a bat," ejaculated the major, 
as, rising impatiently from his seat, he walked into the dressing 
room. Soon, his voice, raised in angry exclamation, burst on 
my ears. From what I heard I gathered that the dress pouch- 
belt was really not to be found, and further that my enraged 
husband was accusing each and all of his servants of having 
appropriated it. Piteous cries of, "Not me, sahib, me good 
man, me not tief," filled the air. The jabbering, yelling and 
hooting was perfectly deafening. My husband returned to the 
breakfast room. "Now then," he said, "here is a brilliant 
opportunity of testing the verity of Ruth's clairvoyance. Get 
her up here and ask her to find my pouch-belt." I called Ruth, 
who appeared pale and trembling, half imagining we suspected 
her of the theft. When I explained to her what I required of 



IOO CRYSTAL VISIONS. 

her she at first begged to be excused, declaring that her fellow 
servants would never forgive her should the thief be discovered 
through her instrumentality. I quieted her fears by promising 
her that should she see the face of the thief in the tumbler she 
need only reveal the fact to me; that I would not tell the sahib, 
but would speak to the pilferer of the belt myself, and on his 
restoring the missing article would condone the theft, not letting 
my husband know who had purloined the belt. 

Filling a tumbler with water, I placed my left hand under 
it, and made passes with my right over it. I then bade Ruth 
taste it. " It is bitter enough, I think," she said. " If mine 
sahib pleases to mesmerize me, I think I can see now." Per- 
haps it may be as well to mention here that Ruth always de- 
clared the mesmerized water had a bitter flavor after being oper- 
ated on. I have frequently mesmerized one tumbler of water and 
placed another, similar in appearance in every respect, beside it. 
I have then called Ruth and asked her which was the mesmer- 
ized and which was the untouched water. She would taste 
both and each time invariably detected the difference. Strange 
to say, also, when I at one time purchased a powerful magnet 
(thinking that perhaps it would prove a more powerful mag- 
netizer than my own hand), Ruth declined to look into the wa- 
ter so magnetized, declaring that she saw flames in it, and that 
they leapt up as if they wanted to scorch her face! It was of no 
use my trying to deceive her ; she invariably knew which was 
the "condemned tumbler" (as she called it). 

Having made this lengthy, though somewhat necessary di- 
gression, I will now proceed with my story. We left Ruth 
just ready to look in the tumbler. She bent her head over it, 
and a silence of a few seconds' duration ensued. " Can you see 
anything, Ruth ? " at last I said. " No ! mine sahib, nothing." 
"Look for the thief," I commanded firmly, making fresh 
passes over her head and the back of her neck, but all to no 
purpose. Ruth persisted that she saw nothing. I began to 



CRYSTAL VISIONS. IOI 

think that she was an impostor, and had humbugged me sys« 
tematically throughout. 

Suddenly an idea struck me. We would try another way. 
"Ruth," I said, " look for sahib the day he last wore the dress 
pouch-belt." Silence again. Then, "I see sahib," said the girl 
dreamily. "He is dressing, he puts on his uniform, now the 
pouch-belt. Ah ! he has left the room." " Follow him," I said 
firmly. " Sahib is getting on his horse ; he is riding away." 
" Don't leave him a moment," I cried. " Ah ! but he goes so 
fast. I am tired," gasped the girl breathlessly. " Go on," I 
said. " Sahib is with the other sahibs, and there are many sol- 
diers and people. It is a grand Tomasha ; some great person 
is going away. They all stand near the water." " Then rest," 
I said, " but don't take your eyes off sahib." She was silent 
for a brief space, then said, " Sahib has gone into a big house 
by the water. He goes into a dressing room. He changes his 
clothes, all his regimentals are put in his tin case, but the pouch- 
belt is left out. It is hanging on a peg in the dressing room of 
the house by the sea." 

"The Yacht Club!" cried my husband. "Patilla" (to his or- 
derly), "send someone at once and see if the belt has been 
left there." 

Patilla salaamed and retired, followed by the rest of the 
servants. 

"I wonder," mused my husband, "if I really left it at the 
Yacht Club after all? The last day I wore it was when Lord 
Ripon left for England." 

" We shall soon see," said I, triumphantly. " I, for one, 
have no doubt whatever that the belt would be found there." 

In as short a time as was compatible with the distance to be 
traversed the messenger returned. The rush of many feet and 
the jabbering of many voices convinced me before I saw him 
that his quest had been a successful one. 



102 CRYSTAL VISIONS. 

He ran panting up the stairs, the belt held high above his 
head. He had found it as Ruth had seen it — in the house by the 
sea, hanging on a peg in a dressing room of the Yacht club. 

Ruth could have had no idea where the belt was left. She 
had been with me a short time, and entered my service long 
after Lord Ripon's departure from Bombay. In the spring of 
the same year I was much interested in a polo tournament about 
to be held at Meerut. A then great friend of mine was to take 
part in this, and as he was addicted to falling off occasionally, 
though in reality a splendid rider and player, I was feeling 
rather anxious on his account. I again called Ruth to my 
assistance. We shut purselves up in my room and I mesmer- 
ized the water as before, Ruth, however, requesting me to place 
a piece of brown paper under the tumbler of water, declaring 
she could see more plainly when that was beneath it. She 
placed her hands around the glass to exclude the light. 

"Go to Meerut," I said, steadily. 

After impatiently waiting for about ten minutes, Ruth said: 
« I am there." 

" Find Sahib ," I said, mentioning the name of my 

friend. 

"I see a tall, dark man, dressed in blue and white; he has a 
light black mustache, and is thin, with large, fierce eyes." 

" Follow him and see how he gets on." 

"He gets on all right, but the other side is winning. Ah!" 
she cried out, piteously, "a gentleman has been bitten by ahorse 
in the leg. He is in great pain." 

" Not my friend ? " I inquired anxiously. 

"No! Not Mem Sahib's friend; this is a fair gentleman, 
red faced, with very light hair." 

" Ask his name," I said, fixing my eyes intently on her, anc 1 
exerting my will power to its uttermost. 

" I can't ; how can I ? " she said doubtfully. 

" Do as I bid you," I replied firmly. 



CRYSTAL VISIONS. IO3 

"I will ask himself," she said, "if you can make me visible 
to him." 

I tried with all my might; all to no use. 

" Stop ! I hear his name ; it is Captain " 

I almost jumped out of my chair with delight. My friend, 
I thought, she might have recognized from his photograph; but 
this other man she had never seen, never heard me mention. 
Indeed, I had never even thought of him since I left the up- 
country station in which my husband's battery and his regiment 
had previously been quartered. 

I don't remember now which side it was that eventually 
won the tournament, fully five years having elapsed since that 
time ; but this I do remember, however. When my husband 
returned in the evening, I asked him if he had any news of the 
polo tournament. " No," he said, " we shall not hear until to- 
morrow." 

" I can give you some news, though," I said. " Ruth asserts 

that Captain , of the Seventeenth Lancers, has been bitten 

in the leg — is all right, though ; but from what Ruth saw I 
fancy our friends wei'e losing." My husband laughed. " We 
shall see to-morrow if Ruth is again right," he said. 

He told the officers of the Royal artillery mess of my last 
"tumbler-telegram," as they called them, and I believe much 
merriment was excited at my gullibility. Let those laugh who 
win, though. The telegrams the next day proved Ruth's story 
to be perfectly correct in every particular. 

Soon after this a friend of my husband's came to see us. 
This gentleman was the cantonment magistrate at Assizurgh. 
My husband was telling him about Ruth and her strange pow- 
ers, -when he asked me if I had any objection to his testing 
them, to the end that he might recover some valuable property 
he had lost. 

<c I must tell you, however," he said to me, " that I am an 
utter skeptic; and it will require strong proof to convince me." 



*C>4 CRYSTAL VISIONS. 

I felt rather offended, for if the girl was a humbug, I was a 
dupe or worse. I sent for Ruth, who was as indignant as my- 
self. At first she distinctly refused - to do the sahib's bidding, 
but I impressed it upon her that the credit of both of us was at 
stake, on which she at length unwillingly consented. The usual 
preliminaries having been gone through, he questioned her 
through me, as follows:- — " Go to Assizurgh and describe my 
bedroom in it." 

This she did ; correctly., too, as he at once acknowledged. 

" Now tell me what I lost?" 

"I see a box, not a large box. It is a tin one; it contains 
money and a roll of papers." 

"Right you are," exclaimed the astonished Major. " Now, 
tell me where that box is now ? " 

" It is in a small room. Shall I open it?" 

"Yes ; and tell me what is in it." 

She paused a little. 

" Only papers, Sahib, the money is gone." 

• £ Describe the man who took it." 

"He is not there; the room is empty." 

"Look for him." 

" He is in Sahib's room. He is a little, dark man, with a 
pleasant face; his dress is white; he has a scarlet cammerbund, 
and a scarlet and gold turban. He has a scar on his left hand." 

" My butler, by jingo ! The very man I suspected, too," 
said the Major. 

7fj* 7J* vj? VJC 

A few days afterwards, when Major had returned 

to Assizurgh 3 he wrote to me and told me he had found the 
box, as described, in his servant's house, or, rather, cabin, but 
that no papers remained in it. It was empty. This was the 
thing that was not correct in Ruth's statement. 

I concluded she saw the box before the papers were re- 
moved from it. I often found that she did not seem to have 



CRYSTAL VISIONS. I05 

much control over time, as regards fast events, though she 
would decribe the actual occurrence rightly enough. 

At another time I lost a piece of pale, pink satin embroid- 
ered with silver. It could be found nowhere. I was unwilling 
to believe that either of my servants had taken it, for they were 
devoted to me, and had one and all been in my service a long 
time, with the exception of my Dirzee (a native tailor). I 
could not suspect him of having taken it, as he never, by any 
chance, as far as I was aware of, had access to my rooms. 
However, through Ruth he was detected as the thief, and re- 
turned the missing article, though he spread the report that I 
was a witch afterwards, on hearing how the theft had been dis- 
covered. 

In this case, as will be observed, the visions are of the retro- 
cognitive type. Of the same class is the incident that follows, 
which I quote from a recent article in the Contemporary Review ', 
called " Trace," signed with the pseudonym of " I. M. Soames." 
Its writer, as I am allowed to state, is Major Schreiber, a retired 
officer, known to me. 

We arranged an afternoon for our experiments on the 
crystal, and after tea was over we set to work. My wife was 
placed in a very comfortable chair, and the lights were turned 
down — not out, by any means, but so as not to dazzle the eye, 
while at the same time everything was distinctly visible in the 
room. I put her to sleep and gave her the crystal. The effect 
was instantaneous. She commenced speaking at once, and said : 

" Oh, what lovely flowers, and what a perfume!" And 
she began to draw her breath through her nose, as if inhaling 
the scent of flowers. I asked her then where she was. She 
said : " I am in the most lovely garden I have ever seen. It 
is not in England. I am standing in a broad pathway ; on one 
side is a hedge of white azaleas, and on the other pink. They 
are about six or seven feet high ; between these hedges and the 
path there are broad borders, in which are planted these 



io6 



CRYSTAL VISIONS. 



sweet-smelling flowers. There are beautiful trees all about the 
garden, such as I have never seen before, and at the end of the 
path is a little black and gold house, with such a funny little 
man sitting outside." 

This dream I ordered her to remember when she awoke, and 
there is a sequel to it that I will relate further on. 

She resumed : " I can see now a small shop at the junction 
of two streets, and a door opening on each street. In the 
middle of the shop is a glass case, like those one sees in a jew- 
eler's. There is a tall man, very much like a Jew, with a long 
black beard. He is bargaining with another man." 

" What is the other man like ? " I asked. 

'•He is about the middle height, and has gray hair and mus- 
tache, a plain face. I know him* I have seen him, but I can 
not tell you his name. The funny little man has come down 
from the garden, and is sitting outside. He seems very much 
interested in what is going on in the shop." 

Then followed a few more details that I do not remember. 
I then asked : 

" Can you describe the situation of the town in which the 
shop is ? " 

" The town is a seaport, standing on a large bay. The coast 
seems nearly to join at the mouth of the harbor. On the land 
side it is backed by mountains covered nearly to the summits 
with the most luxuriant vegetation." 

Then came a pause, and she continued : " I am on board 
ship. The man I recognized is here too. Oh, such a dreadful 
storm ; the ship is rolling about most fearfully. I cannot go 
on. I must go and lie down. I feel so ill." 

My wife exhibited all the symptoms of sea-sickness, and as 
1 feared a full realization of the malady might follow, I woke 
her up, thinking we had obtained sufficient information for what 
we wanted. 



CRYSTAL VISIONS. IO7 

The member of the society who had brought the crystal 
took it back next day to the owner, who was the man with the 
gray hair and mustache, and gave him the information we had 
obtained the evening before. He told our friend the name of 
the town ; and, although he would not own up to the truth of 
the story, it was easy to see that the information we had ob- 
tained was true in every detaih People of his sort are very 
unsatisfactory to deal with. 

The curious sequel that I alluded to lies in the fact that my 
wife and myself were one day, some months afterwards, going 
through one of the big museums in London. I was looking at a 
case of curiosities, and my wife was some little way from me, 
when I heard her exclaim : 

"I have been here. I know the place quite well. That is 
where the little man was sitting, and there is the little black 
and gold house." 

"What nonsense are you talking?" I said. "That is im- 
possible." 

But then I remembered the experiment with the crystal, and 
upon going up to see what my wif e was looking at, I found it 
was a model of the garden in the town where our gray-haired 
friend had owned to having obtained the crystal. 

Enough, perhaps, has now been said to suggest to the reader 
that this crystal vision, which has long been regarded as a 
mere superstition, may in reality be used with profit as an em- 
pirical method of educing from. the subliminal self a number of 
pictures — very unequal, indeed, in value — but of which some, 
at least, appear to imply a telepathic or clairvoyant extension of 
ordinary knowledge. 



CHAPTER VIII. 



HAGNETS AND OD. 

MINERAL AND PERSONAL MAGNETISM AS METHODS OF CURE. 

" Nature hears but one kind of questions — they are 
experiments. Her answers are phenomena." 

The Greeks in olden time called the magnet stone Mayvijs fli#o S , 
in short May«^ s . Correctly t^anstlated Mayvris is the magic fluid 
stone. The word May^s consists of two Phoenician words 
"tt~!lD (mag-naz.) The first one is recognized over the whole 
Orient as referring to a pontifex, a priest, a magus, a man who 
possesses great powers and knowledge ; and from that descends 
the Greek and Latin words Miyos, magus, a magician, and m^s, 
magnus (great). 

The second word "]Q (naz) is a root word, which in He- 
brew and Arabic expresses all that is fluid, flowing, waving. 
From this comes the Greek N6o?, genius, knowledge, soul. The 
word magnetism expresses, therefore, the magic power of the 
soul. But when Mesmer gave this name to the phenomena 
which he produced with his patients, he did not know anything 
of the old Greek theory upon this subject. The phenomena 
that Mesmer produced had a strange likeness to the magnetic 
phenomena and this led him to choose this explanation; and he 
did not think of the deeper meaning, which makes this word so 
appropriate for i nv0St sleep. 

The power of the lodestone to attract iron was known even 

in the olden time. On this account the people called it the 

"living stone." Its powers were not considered as limited to 

iron ; but people ascribed to it a great influence on the humar 

1 08 



MAGNETS AND OD. 



IO9 



body. One of the old Rabbis relates that the vapor from this 
stone placed on glowing coals, and inhaled, renders anybody 
unconscious; and he claimed that it was in high favor wiih 
thieves and robbers on account of its intoxicating qualities. It 
was credited, also, with great influence upon the feelings and 
sentiments, as it could create esteem and courage, and was of 
utility in maintaining friendship with absent friends. It was 
therefore manufactured into amulets which were considered very 




BUNCH OF MAGNET RODS, FOR PASSES OVER THE BODY 
AFTER MESMER'S MODEL. 

precious. The old magicians and scholars attributed to it an- 
other power — the one of exalting the imagination and sum- 
moning fantastic vision — especially when the amulet was orna- 
mented with a figure of symbolic character. But for one cer- 
tain power the lodestone was held in the highest esteem ; it was 
believed that, under certain conditions, it would create love ; and 
for this special qualification it was utilized as a necessary addi* 



tlO MAGNETS AND OD. 

tion in love potions. At the same time the lover could carry a 
magnet- amulet on which was engraved a picture of Venus. 
This would make him altogether irresistible. But the stone 
was not excellent alone as a means of creating love; for by its 
aid, unfaithfulness in love could be discovered. The French 
poet, Marbodacus, living before the twelfth century, made the 
magnet the subject of one of his most brilliant poems. He ex- 
presses himself in this way: "If you wish to be certain of 
your wife's faithfulness, place the magnet-stone at her head 
while she is sleeping. She will then, if faithful to you, kindly 
open her arms to embrace you ; but if not, she will commence 
to tremble as in great anguish and forced by the might of the 
stone, she reveals the errings secretly committed" 

The natural magnefs well known quality to draw iron 
toward itself and retain it was known as we see in the olden 
time ; and even then it was the object of earnest but fruitless 
admiration. The name originates from magnet first being found 
near the city of Magnetia in Asia Minor. The first use that 
was made of the magnet's power was its employment in glass 
melting works; but aside from this limited use the ancients for 
a long time simply admired and wondered at the power of the 
magnet, -without thinking of its further practical employment. 
After having discovered that a piece of steel after having been 
in connection with a natural magnet became itself . magnetic 
and had the quality, when hung up in the room, of always occu- 
pying a certain position — that of north and south — it was then 
decided to employ the magnet on sea and overland journeys to 
ascertain the quarters of the globe. It was not alone the above 
mentioned powers of the magnet that in olden time was the 
reason for it being considered a valuable object; but its influ- 
ence on the human body also made it a valuable remedy in the 
medical science. We often find in old works the magnet men- 
tioned as a remedy ; and it has as such stood in especial favor 
among the people of India, Egypt, Arabia, Palestine and China. 



MAGNETS AND OD. Ill 

A number of diseases were cured through its power, and it was 
especially valued as a styptic and a quieter of the nerves. The 
first of these qualities were ascribed to the magnet's mineral con- 
nections, while the other was attributed to the special proper- 
ties contained in the magnet. It was only in the last century 
when electricity was approved of *as a remedy in the medical 
science, and when the relationship was established between the 
electric and magnetic powers, that attention was again drawn 
toward the magnet; and scientists again began to study its 
direct effect on the human body. The old authors' accounts 
were again brought to the surface and consulted, and it was 
found that passes -or only a continual contact with the magnet 
was used with successful results in different diseases — especially 
neuralgia, rheumatism and headache. In the following manner 
the Italian Petrus Borelli (1656) writes: "Treatment by mag- 
netism secures both men and women from a number of diseases 
that medicine is unable to cure." The celebrated Paracelsus 
used the same. method to accomplish wonderful cures which he 
performed all over Europe. Magnets used for passes have the 
usual form of a horse shoe, and are as a rule constructed of 
three different plates and are evened up near the poles, or they 
are formed of rods, single or in bundles. The smoother each 
single surface of the .plate is ground and fitted, the better 
the magnet will keep and the more powerful is the effect. 

Glocenius, Burgrave, Helinotius, Robert Fludd, Kircher and 
Maxwell believed that in the magnet they could recognize the 
properties of that universal principle by which minds addicted 
to generalization thought that all natural phenomena might be 
explained. John Ioptest Van Helmont was an eminent physi- 
cian who lived between 1577 and 1644. He discovered the 
laudanum of Paracelsus, the spirit of hartshorn and the volatile 
salts, and to him we owe all the first knowledge of the elastic 
aeriform fluids, to which he gave the name of gas^ which they 
still retain. Van Helmont's explanation of magnetism is as 



112 MAGNETS AND OD. 

follows : " Magnetism is that occult influence which bodies exert 
over each other in presence of each other and also at a distance, 
whether by attraction or repulsion." The medium he desig- 
nates, "Magnab Magnum." 

We know that it is healthy to live in an atmosphere filled 
with the restorative emanations given out by bodies young and 
full of vigor. We see in the third book of Kings that David 
lay with comely damsels to warm him and to give him a 
little strength. According to Galen and others, Greek doctors 
had long recognized in the treatment of sundry consumptions, 
the advantage of making the patients take nourishment from 
the breast of young, healthy nurses ; and experience had taught 
them that " the effect is not the same when the milk is given 
after being caught in a vessel." Cappivaccius saved the heir 
of a great house in Italy fallen into marasmus, by making him 
lie betwixt two vigorous young girls. Forestus tells how a 
young Pole was cured of marasmus by spending the days and 
nights with a nurse of twenty years; and the effect of the 
remedy was as prompt as it was successful. Finally, to bring 
this subject to an end, Boerhaave used to tell his disciples of 
having seen a German prince cured by this means, employed in 
the same way which had succeeded so well for Cappivaccius. 
There is not a housewife but knows that it is not good for a 
child to sleep with an aged person, though the latter enjoy 
perfect health. 

Remember what Shakespeare says: 
Crabbed age and youth 

Cannot live together: — 
Youth is full of pleasance,. 

Age is full of care; 
Youth like summer morn, 

Age like winter weather; 
Youth like summer brave, 

Age like winter bare. 
In other times there existed in the mountains of Auvergne a 
custom that may well be mentioned. When any traveler arrived 



MAGNETS AND OD. 1 13 

at a hostelry, feeble, sickly or benumbed by cold, they asked him 
if he wished a warmed or brasiered bed ; naturally his answer 
would be: "I want a good warm bed." When about to get 
into the bed he would be much surprised to see a chubby, 
hearty, well-complexioned fellow leave it, enveloped from head 
to foot in a clean linen shirt. The next morning our man 
would be sure to inquire if it was the custom to give one a bed 
in which another had slept. "Sir, you asked that your bed 
should be warm, and we warmed it for you. If you had wished 
it brasiered we would have heated it with a brasier." 

"What difference is there between these two methods?" 
"O, sir, much difference, the bed warmed by a young, strong, 
healthy person is far more restorative and strengthening." 

Let us remember what Hippocrates says : " Certain wise 
physicians even among the ancients were aware how beneficial 
'-to the blood ' it is to make slight frictions with the hands over 
the body. It is believed by many experienced doctors that the 
heat) which oozes out of the hand, on being applied to the sick, 
is highly salutary and soothing. The remedy has been found 
to be applicable to sudden as well as to habitual pains, and 
various species of debility, being both renovating and strength- 
ening in its effects. It has often appeared, while I have thus 
been soothing my patients, as if there were a singular property 
in my hands to pull and draw away from the affected parts 
aches and divers impurities, by laying my hand upon the place, 
and by extending my fingers toward it. Thus it is known to 
some of the learned that health may be imparted to the sick by 
certain gestures, and by contact, as some diseases may be com- 
municated from one to another." 

" When we observe," says Hufeland, " the effect produced 
by placing newly- killed animals on paralyzed members, and live 
animals on parts of the body that are suffering pain, it does 
seem that this therapeutic method ought not to be spurned." 



II 4 



MAGNETS AND OD. 



For advancing this method of healing, Anton Mesmer 
and Dr. Gessman, both of Vienna, deserve mention. Mesmer 
discovered the so-called animal magnetism, but before he pub- 
licly brought forward the theory concerned, he, with the assist- 
ance of artificial magnetism, gave treatment according to a pecul- 



A.L. 
Sandrach/ 








Pha 


/^ZX\ 




As"^ 


// 

/if 

r 


f// 


' Ui-rel ^ 


\ \ 




\ \ v / 


% 


|8Mq«9 




A \ 




\ \ SOW 




laoijdEii 




sn ^e // 


t)68tUQ 


^>^ 








• 








13 



EGYPTIAN CABALISTIC MAGIC MIRROR. 

iar system. Later on Doctors De Noble, La Fontaine, Nuzer, 
La Cour, Bolten, Du Jardin, Hensius, Hemman, De 
Harsee, D'Aymier, and de la Condamine used Mesmer's meth- 
ods and established the benefits of magnetic treatment. The 



MAGNETS AND OD. 1 15 

public announcements by De Noble caused the Royal Society of 
Medical Science, in France, to direct D'Audry and Maudnyt to 
commence investigations and studies regarding- treatment by 
artificial magnetism. The two gentlemen mentioned returned a 
verdict greatly in favor of the magnetic power as a method of 
cure. For the last fifteen years this method of treatment has 
been the cause of great sensation and advancement in Europe, 
especially in France, Germany, Italy, Austria, and the Scandi- 
navian countries and it is applied by many prominent physi- 
cians. 

Another interesting method of treating diseases, which is 
often applied in the Orient, is the use of the so-called " Egyp- 
tian Magic Mirror." This mirror is a well-polished steel plate, 
with an engraving of two circles and two triangles in which 
there are inscriptions of cabalistic words. With the elbow 
resting in the lap, the patient takes hold of the mirror with the 
left hand, constantly gazing at the center of the triangle. After 
a lapse of a few minutes the healer performs manipulations 
from the head of the patient down to his feet, his hands espe- 
cially resting at the afflicted part of ths body. It is particu- 
larly interesting to notice that patients who secure this method 
of treatment, will often during this obtain a special power of clair- 
voyance, so tiiat they become able to penetrate the mystery and 
obscurity of the future and predict concerning its happiness 
and occurrences. At the same time they can describe what g^es 
on at places distant and completely unknown to the patient. In 
this last case mediumistic persons will especially succeed. The 
patient will not go to sleep, but will remain fully awake* during 
the entire treatment, and the phenomena spoken of has a direct 
relation to hypnotism, which assists in the development of his 
ability aided by the manipulations and the constant gazing at 
the magic mirror. 

" But the Spirit is given to every man to profit withal. * * * To another 
the gifts of healing." — /. Coy, 12: g. 



u6 



MAGNETS AND OD. 



THE ART OF MANIPULATIONS AND PASSES BY THE HANDS 

ON THE DISEASED PART OF THE BODY, AND 

THE CURE OF DISEASES. 

I have applied the hand with great success, in hundreds of 
cases, and in that manner have cured patients of their disease 
when all other methods had been employed without deriving any 
benefit — especially in all nervous diseases. It is absolutely 




MODERN MANIPULATIONS. 

necessary for the magnetist to have warm and perfectly dry 
hands. If the hands are damp, and not warm, he will not be 
able to affect the diseased parts. Treatment will not alone be 
very unpleasant for the patient, but it will be without any heal- 
ing, quieting results. For the magnetist to be able to remove 
pain, and affect the nerve system and circulation of the blood 
in a beneficial way, the hands should, as above mentioned, be 
dry and fairly warm. The operator also should be mentally 
clear and self-poised. It is also required of the magnetist to be 
tranquil and determined in appearance and proceedings, concen- 



MAGNETS AND OD. 117 

trating his whole mind and will-power on what he undertakes, 
and consequently he should be fully possessed of the one thought 
— that of helping the patient during the treatment. It is of 
course required of him to have studied and acquainted himself 
with the method of healing. This method of cure is very old, 
and was often used in the Eastern countries. Scripture men- 
tions on several occasions treatment by passes. Valentine 
Greatrakes, an aristocratic Irish officer, and Gassner, formerly a 
monk, have made themselves quite prominent in Europe by 
similar cures, as has also Dr. Phil. Baron von Reichenbach. 

Baron Reichenbach, the eminent German scientist and phy- 
sician, by a vast series of experiments, proved the existence of a 
fine spiritual emanation from all objects, especially from human 
beings, and he called it " Odic Force." Has it not occurred to 
physicians that it would be well for them to look into these 
subtle forces, and see if some better understanding of the incul- 
catory system cannot be arrived at, in order that they may 
achieve more success? The " mechanism of the circulation," 
says Dr. Buchanan, "is sufficiently understood, but our mechan- 
ical knowledge of the circulations, derived from Harvey and his 
successors, does not give us the law of the distribution of the 
blood. The knowledge of the channels and hydraulic appa- 
ratus, without that of the forces which preside over the circula- 
tion and distribution of the blood, is comparatively a meagre 
specimen of the knowledge." 

If that be true which Shakespeare has affirmed; 
" One touch of nature makes the ivhole world kin" — 
the influence of the human hand must be universally acknowl- 
edged. 

It has a language of its own, it can appeal from man to man, 
it can bless, and it can cure. The most ancient belief connects 
it with authority and power. The holding up of Moses' hands 
gave victory to the Israelites. " And it came to pass, when 
Moses held up his hand, that Israel prevailed, and when he let 



n8 



MAGNETS AND OD 



down his hands Amalek prevailed." Gifts of healing, not less 
than of power, belong to the hand by prescriptive right. If the 
potency of the royal touch in curing the king's evil be but a 
superstition, let us remember that it took its origin from a holy 
source. Christ and his disciples laid their hands upon the sick, 
and they were healed. The miracles of our Lord were remark- 
ably accompanied by actions of the hands, as if they were in 
some manner connected with that external means. In restoring 
sight and hearing, he touched the eyes and ears of the afflicted 




ORIENTAL MANIPULATION AFTER THE BATH. 

persons. Even the imparting of the gift of the holy spirit fol- 
lowed the imposition of hands ; and this external sign of a 
spiritual agency is still retained in the church. Who that has 
undergone or witnessed the beautiful rite of confirmation, but 
has felt its power. The eye and the hand, then, appear to be fitting 
instruments for transmitting potential and remedial agencies. 
If we seek for such a general instance of the influence of one 
human being on another as may seem like that mutual loss and 



MAGNETS AND OD. 1 19 

gain and interchange of vital force, which is the principal won- 
der in mesmerism, we have only to look at the effects produced 
when young people sleep with old. Since the days of King 
David it has been known that the latter are strengthened at the 
expense of the former. Some painful instances of this have 
fallen under my own observation. Rev. Chauncy Hare Town- 
shend, A.M., relates a case in which the future well being of a 
person very dear to him was compromised. I was acquainted 
with an infirm old lady, who was so aware of the benefit that 
she derived from sleeping with young people, that, with a sort 
of horrid vampirism, she always obliged her maids to share her 
bed, thus successively destroying the health of several attend- 
ants. Even among animals it has been found that the young 
cannot be too closely associated with the old without suffering 
detriment. Young horses standing in a stable with old ones 
become less healthy. 

The celebrated German physiologist, Huf eland, has remarked 
the longevity of school masters, and he attributes it to their liv- 
ing so constantly amidst the healthy emanations of young persons. 

I have in the last fourteen years performed a great number 
of cures by this method, and generally the patient had been 
given up by physicians. Several of the most prominent scien- 
tific periodicals in Europe have in most flattering terms reported 
a number of my successful treatments, some of which were per- 
formed in connection with prominent physicians. 

I desire to remark, in passing, that my observation, as well 
as my experience, would indicate that this treatment is especially 
successful in nervous and muscular ailments ; for in these depart- 
ments of pathology, I have attained, and have known of others 
attaining, the most remarkable results. 

MENTAL ELECTRICITY, ALSO CALLED NERVE ETHER OR LIFE 
ELECTRO-DYNAMISM. 

We proceed simply from the fact that a certain force or vi- 
tality is contained in the nervous system, which is usually called 



120 



MAGNETS AND OD. 



vital force or nerve-power. If this force or power is present in 
sufficient quantity, the individual may be considered healthy ; 
but when this force is disturbed, by either external or internal 
influences, the individual becomes sick. We may reasonably 
presume that all, or at least nearly all, diseases are due to im- 
paired nerve function. A cure, therefore, is secured when a 
proper equilibrium in the nervous system has been regained. 
This may be accomplished by the skillful application of the so- 
called magnetism. As an example it has been demonstrated 




JAPANESE MAGNETIC HEALER. 

that this treatment has cured pathological swellings, due to con- 
gestion; these conditions are invariably caused by a lack of 
nerve energy. Strange to say the vital force of the magnetizer 
is transmitted to the patient. By this treatment many unfortu- 
nate sufferers have been cured of paralysis in its various forms, 
and have thus been enabled to walk, after years of complete help- 
lessness. New vigor has been infused into those who have be- 
come debilitated and prostrated from long continued disease. It 
will almost invariably alleviate the most intense physical suffer- 



MAGNETS AND OD. 121 

ing — when even the deadly morphine has failed. Unfortu- 
nately all patients cannot be cured through the influence of 
magnetism ; some are not susceptible to its benign influence. 
Only from five to ten per cent., however, may be placed in this 
unfortunate class. In order to test an individual's susceptibility 
successive strokes or passes are made over his arm. If the sub- 
ject, after a few of these passes, experiences heat, cold or ting- 
ling in the arm, he may be considered susceptible. As regards 
the effect of magnetic treatment, whether the subject or patient 
is a believer or not in the efficacy of the treatment, all that is 
required of him is that he endeavor to place himself in a quiet 
and peaceful state of mind during the treatment; for thereby a 
transmission of the invisible, but still well known, vital force 
from the healthy individual to the sick takes places. To dem- 
onstrate the reality of magnetism, a simple experiment will 
suffice. The successful magnetizer places his hands over two 
glasses filled with water. In the space of five minutes a decided 
difference in the taste of the water contained in the glass over 
which the left hand has been held from that over which the 
right hand has been held, will be distinctly observed by anyone 
of fair sensitiveness. Strangely enough, the water through w r hich 
the magnetic current has passed from the left hand will be luke- 
warm and have a disagreeable taste ; whereas that acted upon 
by the right hand will be fresh and sparkling. This difference 
is due to the fact that the right and left hands are opposite mag- 
netic poles — the one positive, the other negative. The mag- 
netic life-force which in this manner is transferred to the water 
can also be transferred to the body of another individual. 

Fortunately this can occur through clothing, glass ; yes, 
even walls, as it also may be transmitted at a distance of a yard. 
It travels through media with a velocity greater than that of 
heat, and second only to electricity. This matter, or fluid, is 
even visible to the naked eye. This, which certainly must be 
regarded as the strangest and most occult phenomenon, may be 



122 



MAGNETS AND OD. 



demonstrated in the following manner : An individual, together 
with the magnetizer, are enclosed in a completely darkened 
room where absolutely nothing is discernible. They remain 
there about two hours, and if the magnetizer now gently rubs 
the patient's finger tips a dim light will be seen surrounding the 
magnetizer's fingers. The magnetism in the human body is at 
certain parts or points positive, at others negative ; thus the 
palma (inner) surface and tjie dorsal (outer) surface of the 
hands are opposite. Similarly the two sides of each of the fin- 
gers. This must be borne in mind when giving magnetic 
treatment, as the positive parts of the magnetizer's hand and 




THE GOOD SAMARITAN, POURING WINE AND OIL ON THE 
WOUNDS WITH MANIPULATIONS. 

fingers must be brought in contact with negative parts of 
patient, and vice versa. The human race will from now on be 
placed in a more favorable position, inasmuch as it is now in 
possession of this great and comparatively new method of cure, 
■which, in spite of its grand and almost unlimited possibilities, is 
still so simple that one may with ease practice it on others. It 
is my earnest conviction that all are not able or constituted to 
practice this curative method upon others. Many are in the 
possession of the power to magnetize without being sufficiently 
experienced in the practice thereof ; and the patients, therefore, 



MAGNETS AND OD. 



123 



frequently do not receive any benefit. That which is absolutely 
requisite to be a successful magnetizer is to be in the possession 
of a healthy body and spiritual power, combined with a pure 
and active desire to do good. The action of magnetism is in 
many cases almost miraculous. It is applicable to nearly all 
diseases to which flesh is heir; but especially to those which 
originate in the nervous system, and not associated with great 
organic lesions. Its beneficial action is manifested by a marked 
increase of physical vigor. The despondent and the melancholy 




DR. ALBERT RLTBMAYR S METHOD VIENNA. 



regain the hopefulness and cheerfulness of youth ; thus restor- 
ing a perfect equilibrium in both mind and body. The force 
acts upon all organized beings, but especially upon man. The 
action resembles the magnetism of the metals, in that it has both 
repelling and attractive properties ; and it manifests itself in 
different manners upon the various bodies upon which it is 
caused to act. Nervous prostration (neurasthenia) appears in 
many forms, but principally three. The first is characterized 



124 MAGNETS AND OD. 

by a lack of appreciation of the ordinary irritations of the sen- 
sory nerve filaments (anaesthesia); second, by a lack of reflex 
nerve action ; and the third by an abnormally increased sensi- 
tiveness '(hyperasthesia) — in which case an ordinary irritation of 
the peripheral nerves brings about a decidedly strong impressionc 
The time best adapted for treating patients, according to 
this method, is in the forenoon — as the patient is not only 
at this time most susceptible to the influence, but the magnetizer 
is at this time of the day in possession of his best strength 
and bodily energy — or evening, when everything is qniet and 
invites to rest, is also a good time for magnetic treatment ; in 
short, the time when the patient is in a peaceful and passive 
state of mind is favorable. It is but justifiable to consider 
magnetism as the first and most active remedy for the cure of 
disease in general. 

Nothing like this inspires us, or is in such a direct harmony 
with the soul of mankind. Magnificent, wonderful, nay, even 
miraculous, indeed, are the possibilities of this great remedy, 
blessing and boon to mankind. One thing must not be disre- 
garded, namely, that it must be applied by a competent and ex- 
perienced expert. Let us say with Wordsworth : 
"To every form of being is assigned 
An acting principle, however removed 
From sense and observations it subsists 
In all things, in all natures, in the stars 
Of azure heaven, the unending clouds, 
In flower and tree, in every pebly stone 
That paves the brooks, the stationary rocks, 
The moving waters and the invisible air." 



CHAPTER IX. 



HYPNOTISM AND ANIMALS. 

A QUEER METHOD BY WHICH TO MAGNETIZE SERPENTS, 

EMPLOYED WITH GREAT SUCCESS BY THE 

MOJOWEE AND APACHE INDIANS. 

The Indians have many interesting secrets by which they 
tame animals. When the serpents become too audacious for 
the Indians and they wish to scare them away from their camps, 
they employ the following method : They dig a pit in the 
ground about four yards deep and twenty yards in circumfer- 
ence with steep, smooth walls. The Indian men, women and 
children now mount their horses. At a given signal every one 
takes his position in a circle with the pit as a center. With wild 
yells they start a strange war dance. They gallop around on 
their horses, continually diminishing the circle, while they use 
branches to beat the dry grass and leaves in order to scare the 
serpents from their hiding places. As they approach the pit 
the circle grows smaller, and the serpents are all, one by one, 
hurried down in the grave. In this way, the Indians can in a 
very short time rid themselves of these disastrous tormentors. 

When the Indians deem it time, they descend from their 
horses, and place a step-ladder in a corner of the pit. Four 
Indians approach the grave, armed not with weapons, but with 
their instruments. First an Indian descends carrying in his 
hand a big piece of bark manufactured in the shape of a fan. 
He is followed by the second, who gives some lamentingly 

125 



126 HYPNOTISM AND ANIMALS. 

strange tune on his own naturally shaped flute. The third 
Indian plays on his one-stringed instrument the same moan- 
ing, melancholy melody. The fourth hammers with great 
activity on a home-made drum. The first Indian with the fan 
uses that as a music-director, his tact-stick giving the time of 
the music. When they reach ( the bottom of the pit, the fright- 
ened serpents rush away, while the Indians march around in 
the grave, continually diminishing the circle. The serpents 
creep steadily together; and at every movement of the fan they 
hide themselves among each other in a charmed way. When 
it is impossible for the serpents to creep closer together and 
they are gathered in a heap in the center, the Indian carrying 
the fan stops and catches up one of the poisonous serpents and 
holds it up. It does not harm him at all, for it is completely 
charmed. He now places one serpent after another around his 
body. They listen with interest to the peculiar music and seem 
to be very anxious about the fan ; as he only needs to move it 
when he wishes the serpent to change position, and at the same 
time fix it sharply with his eyes, the serpent moves or keeps his 
place quietly according to his wishes. These Indians are pe- 
culiar individuals. At an accident which occurred on the Atlantic 
& Pacific R. R. several of this tribe were fatally hurt. An old 
Indian had a leg amputated. He did not wish to be put in an 
unconscious state and directed that his wife should sit in front of 
him and stare at him continually. As soon as the operation was 
commenced she began wildly to lament, crying bitterly, the 
tears flowing incessantly down her cheeks, while the physician 
calmly proceeded with the operation. The Indian in question 
laid very quietly and calmly, and seemed to enjoy her suf- 
fering with great delight, as if he had nothing to do with it at 
all. Upon inquiry he declared, after the operation was success- 
fully finished, that he did not notice the slightest degree of 
pain — his wife had apparently taken it all. 



HYPNOTISM AND ANIMALS. I27 

HYPNOTIZED SNAKES RATTLERS AND COPPERHEADS MAG- 
NETIZED OR FASCINATED BY MUSIC A TEXAS 

SNAKE CHARMER HE DOESN'T LIKE WORK 

AND PREFERS TO PLAY WITH 
RATTLESNAKES.* 

There is in this country a young man who, as a snake 
charmer, has perhaps no equal on the habitable globe, writes a 
Gainesville (Tex.) correspondent of the Globe- Democrat. His 
name is Frank Kerr, about thirty-two years of age, who, 
aside from his marvelous power over reptiles, is distinguished 
chiefly by his aversion to any kind of work. His wonderful 
power over the most venomous reptiles — a power which it is 
his delight to use constantly — has long been the wonder of 
everyone hereabouts. It is his custom to walk proudly up the 
streets with the heads of three or four snakes hanging out of 
his pockets, and his neck decorated with a big rattler or cop- 
perhead. It is related, and well verified, that sleep to him is 
almost an impossibility if he has not several snakes in his bed ; 
and it is seldom, indeed, that he misses much sleep. He de- 
lights to fondle a big rattler before a crowd of wonder-stricken 
spectators, compelling it to put its head in his mouth, and 
"capping the climax," by making it protrude its forked tongue 
to meet- his own. This feat is about his only source of revenue. 

Last March he went to Ardmore, a small town in the In- 
dian Territory, a few miles north of here, hoping to make 
some money by giving public exhibitions of his snake feats. 
He left here with two snakes, a copperhead and a rattlesnake, 
but the rattler died en route. Not wishing to perform with 
one snake, he took his flute, the work of his own handicraft, 
and started for the woods in quest of the reptiles. To the tune 
of his own weird music, like Jack the Piper, he marched along. 



*I have, as the contents of this book show, taken into consideration what belongs to 
hypnotism and fascination. I therefore present this chapter which, I think, will interest 
the reader. 



128 HYPNOTISM AND ANIMALS. 

He returned to town in about three hours with thirteen snakes 
of different species crawling after him. Selecting a few from 
among them, he exhibited his feats to wondering and liberal 
crowds. 




CHARMING WISELY FRANK KERR AND HIS SNAKES. 

This story has been told so often and abundantly verified 
that no one now questions it. He has a preference for the cop- 



HYPNOTISM AND ANIMALS. 129 

perhead, but, as he expresses it, he " loves them all," and fre- 
quently caresses a little harmless green snake as tenderly as he 
does the big rattlers. He says he loses a great many, and ban- 
ishes some when their affection for him seems to grow cold. 

Animals have been frequently fascinated for purposes of 
experiment, and a universal rigidity of the muscles produced 
to such an extent as to cause them to resemble pieces of statu- 
ary, so that the animal could be taken up and its whole weight 
supported by one foot, and this state produced and continued 
at pleasure (John B. Newman). Mr. Bruce, the great African 
traveler, distinctly states, from minute personal observation, 
that all the blacks of the kingdom of Sennaar, whether Funze 
or Nuba, are perfectly armed by nature against the bite of 
either scorpion or viper. They take the horned serpents in 
their hands at all times, put them into their bosoms, and throw 
them at one another, as children do apples or balls; during 
which sport the serpents are seldom irritated to bite, and when 
they do bite, no mischief ensues from the wound. The influ- 
ence exerted upon them is so great that they are scarcely ever 
able to attempt any resistance even when eaten up alive, as 
Bruce assures us he has seen them, from tail to head, like a 
carrot. He also positively affirms that they constantly sicken 
the moment they are laid hold of, and are sometimes so ex- 
hausted by this invisible power or fascination, as to perish as 
effectually, though not as quickly as if struck by lightning. 
" I constantly observed," says he, " that, however lively the 
viper was before, upon being seized by any of the barbarians, 
he seemed as if taken by sickness and feebleness, frequently 
shut his eyes, and never turned his mouth toward the arm of 
the person that held him." 

This power is often used by man to disarm the fury of the 
most enraged quadrupeds. This is peculiarly seen at times in 
the case of watch-dogs, over whom house-breakers have found 
out the secret of exercising so seductive and quieting a power as 



I3O HYPNOTISM AND ANIMALS. 

to keep them in a profound silence while the burglary is com- 
mitted. Lindecrantz of Sweden tells us that the natives of 
Lapland and Dalarne are in possession of this secret generally, 
insomuch that they can instantly disarm the most ferocious 
dog, and oblige him to fly from them, with all his usual 
signs of fear, such as dropping the tail and becoming suddenly 
silent. • • 

Grooms are sometimes found possessed of a similar power 
over horses. Mr. Townsend gives a striking anecdote to this 
effect in his account of James Sullivan. The man — an awk- 
ward, ignorant rustic of the lowest class — was by profession a 
horse-breaker, and generally nick-named the "whisperer," from 
its being vulgarly supposed that he obtained his influence over 
unruly horses by whispering to them. The actual secret of his 
fascinating power, it is very likely, was unknown to himself for 
it died with him, his son, who was in the same occupation, 
knowing nothing of it. It was well known to everyone, that 
however unbroken or vicious a horse or even a mule might be 
when brought to him, in the short space of half an hour he 
became altogether passive under his influence, and was not only 
entirely gentle and tractable, but in a very considerable degree 
continued so, though somewhat more submissive to himself than 
to others. There was a little mystery in his plan, but unques- 
tionably no deceit. When sent for to tame an unruly horse, he 
ordered the stable door to be shut upon himself and the animal 
alone, and not to be opened until a given signal. This singular 
intercourse usually lasted for about half an hour ; no bustle was 
heard, or violence seemingly had recourse to, but when the 
door was opened, on the proper sign being given, the horse was 
always seen lying down, and the fascinator by his side, playing 
with him familiarly as a child with a puppy. Mr. Townsend 
once saw his skill tried on a horse that could never be brought 
to stand for a smith to shoe him. The day after Sullivan's half 
hour lecture, he went, not without some incredulity, to the 



HYPNOTISM AND ANIMALS. 



31 




132 HYPNOTISM AND ANIMALS. 

smith's shop with many other curious spectators, who were eye 
witnesses of the complete success of his art. This, too, had 
been a troop horse, and it was supposed, not without reason, 
that after regimental discipline had failed, no other would be 
found availing. He observed the animal seemed afraid when- 
ever Sullivan either spoke to, or looked at him. In common 
cases, the mysterious preparation of a private interview was not 
necessary, the animal becoming tame at once. 

FASCINATED BY SNAKES. 

I remember — says John B. Newman, M. D., — reading, 
some time since, of a man walking out in his garden who acci- 
dentally saw a snake in the bushes, and, observing the eyes gleam 
in a peculiar manner, watched it closely, but soon found himself 
unable to draw his own eyes off. The snake, it appeared to him, 
soon began to increase immensely in size, and assume in rapid 
succession a mixture of brilliant colors. He grew dizzy, and 
would have fallen in the direction of the snake, to which he 
felt himself irresistibly impelled, had not his wife come up, and 
throwing her arms around him dispelled the charm, thus saving 
him from certain destruction. There are too many of these 
stories to mention a tithe of them ; so I will conclude with but 
a few more that are very generally known. Two men in Mary- 
land were walking together, when one found fault with his 
companion because he stopped to look at something by the road- 
side. Perceiving he did not heed him, he returned to draw 
him along, when he perceived the other's eyes were fixed upon 
a rattlesnake, which had its head raised and eyes glaring at 
him. The poor fellow was leaning towards the snake, and cry- 
ing piteously in a feeble tone, " He will bite me ! he will bite 
me!" " Sure enough he will," said his friend, "if you do not 
run off. What are you staying here for? " Finding him dumb 
to all entreaties, he struck down the snake with a limb of a tree, 
and pulled his companion violently away. The man whose life 



HYPNOTISM AND ANIMALS. 



!33 




134 HYPNOTISM AND ANIMALS. 

was thus providentially saved, found himself very sick for some 
hours after his enchantment. 

Professor Silliman mentions, that in June, 1823, he crossed 
the Hudson at Catskill in company with a friend, and was pro- 
ceeding in a carriage on the road along the river. The road 
was very narrow, with the water on one side, and a steep bank 
covered by bushes on the other. His attention at that place 
was arrested by observing the number of small birds, of differ- 
ent species, flying across the road and then back again, and 
turning and wheeling in manifold gyrations and with much 
chirping, yet making no progress from the particular place over 
which they fluttered. His own and his friend's curiosity was 
much excited, but was soon satisfied by observing a blacksnake, 
of considerable size, partly coiled and partly erect from the 
ground, with the appearance of great animation, his eyesbrilliant 
and his tongue rapidly and incessantly brandishing. This rep- 
tile they perceived to be the cause and center of the wild mo- 
tions of the birds. The excitement, however, ceased as soon as 
the snake, alarmed at the approach of the carriage, retired into 
the bushes. The birds did not escape, but alighting upon the 
neighboring branches, probably awaited the reappearance of 
their cruel tormentor and enemy. 

I have read of a man residing in Pennsylvania who, return- 
ing from a ride in warm weather, espied a blackbird, and a large 
blacksnake viewing the bird. The latter was describing circles, 
gradually growing smaller around the snake, and uttering cries 
of distress. The bird had almost reached the jaws of its ene- 
my, when the man with his whip drove off the snake, and the 
bird changed his note to one of joy. 

A gentleman himself told me that while traveling one da/, 
by the side of a creek, he saw a ground-squirrel running to and 
fro between the creek and a great tree a few yards distant. 
The squirrel's hair looked very rough, which showed he was 
much frightened; and his returns being shorter and shorter, 



HYPNOTISM AND ANIMALS. 



135 



my friend stopped to observe the cause, and soon discovered the 
head and neck of a rattlesnake pointing directly at the squirrel 
through a hole in the great tree, which was hollow. The 




BRAZILIAN TURTLE CHARMER. 

squirrel at length gave over running, and laid himself quietly 
down with his head close to the snake's. The snake then 
opened his mouth wide and took in the squirrel's head, when a 



1^6 HYPNOTISM AND ANIMALS. 

cut of the whip across his neck caused him to draw in his head, 
which action, of course, released the squirrel, which quickly ran 
into the creek. 

Turtles may very easily be charmed by the use of slow, mo- 
notonous music, — There are in Brazil several well-known turtle 
charmers, who make it a specialty by the use of their art to 
catch all the turtles they want. The charmer uses his instru- 
ment, often at the same time imitating with his voice various 
animal calls, and the result comes in about fifteen to twenty 
minutes. If any turtles are in the vicinity they will come first 
one, two, then a whole herd, grouping themselves around the 
charmer, listening to his music with great attention. The 
charmer has assistants to throw the nets over the turtles. The 
nets are fastened to the ground by heavy weights and the turtles 
are caught. Nearly all animals may be brought under influ- 
ence, but the proceedings are different. 

The experiment of Father Kircher, in 1646, with the hen 
which lay motionless on the ground when a long chalk-line was 
drawn from her bill, has often been repeated. To the same 
class of phenomena belong all kinds of charming by the eyes 
or fascination — as when the snake charmer by his eye tames 
serpents, or when snakes paralyze frogs and other small ani- 
mals. The art of Rarey, the famous horse-tamer, appears to 
have consisted principally in hypnotic manipulations. Hypno- 
tism and fascination play a very great role in taming wild ani- 
mals, much more important than people generally believe ; es- 
pecially when they are used with the proper manipulations. 
How many true cases are reported in "Descriptions of Trav- 
els" when a man in utmost danger of death, with destroyed or 
poor weapons, has had only his will-force and the power of his 
eyes to thank for saving a life that seemed lost. 



CHAPTER X. 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

BY GEORGE LUTKEN, M. D. 

As near as I remember, it was in October of last year, that I 
took the liberty of producing for the Illustrated Family fournal, 
an article on the wonders of hypnotic phenomena which of late 
years has been the subject of investigation, especially by French 
physicians, and an interest in which has begun to reach up to us. 
I wrote several articles about the conclusions to which the for- 
eign investigators had come; but I could only treat the subject 
with the reservation that a contributor should take before he has 
seen such phenomena himself. I did not try to hide that which 
I considered rather doubtful in my articles as to these altogether 
unexplainable phenomena. During the nine or ten months that 
have passed since I wrote the above mentioned articles, I have 
with industry studied a great deal of the important literature 
that treats on this subject. I have also had an opportunity to 
investigate these phenomena closer, both on the sick and healthy. 
I have seen several extraordinary and wonderfully successful 
results of hypnotic cures of sick people, where the disease was 
ca.used by a nervous debilitation, or other nervotis weakness. To 
an interested public I am convinced that a description of the 
hypnotic phenomena, such as I with my own eyes have 
seen, will be of great interest, and will also interest the 
jfournaPs enormous circle of readers, and by that means a large 
audience can become closer acquainted with the subject. It will 
be well, however, to caution those interested not to give them- 
selves up to the first hypnotist who comes along. Hypnotism 
misused is quite a dangerous thing for the community. 

137 



138 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

We should endeavor to investigate hypnotism at a nearer 
distance, and also take every precaution not to be humbugged 
by the hypnotist or hypnotizer, but also with our own eyes; 
because we must remember that we cannot easily deceive our- 
selves. With regard to my own investigations, which I will 
relate, will say that the experiments have been performed at my 
own home, and I have each time taken care that beside my 
family, there has been one or more gentlemen present whom I 
could depend upon, so that at all times I have had trustworthy 
witnesses. There have been present at these experiments, col- 
leagues, lawyers and men in other avocations, who of course 
were interested in the subject, but who regarded it with the 
greatest coolness, and without having preconceived ideas about it. 

The hypnotist, who with the utmost courtesy and complete 
disinterestedness , caused the different conditions I wished, is 
Mr. Carl Sextus, a young Dane, who has resided in eastern 
countries, where he acquired his peculiar knowledge, and made 
hypnotism a profession. He has in different countries of north- 
ern Europe and America, and also in this country, given a 
number of seances. He has for the past year or so resided here 
in Copenhagen. I have been acquainted with Mr. Sextus for 
about six months, and I was greatly pleased to find in him a 
professional hypnotist, who has nothing of the charlatan about 
him. He has at every opportunity shown the liveliest interest 
that the medical profession in this country should also take hold 
of the yet obscure . hypnotic question. I am thankful to him 
for the never failing readiness with which he has placed him- 
self at my disposal. It has often pained me, that because 
of the obscure nature of the subject, I have been obliged 
to show suspicion, which often wounded him, but this was 
necessary, if I obtained a clear insight in the matter, and be able 
to describe what I had heard and seen in such a manner that 
doubters may be convinced. For the physician, the object of 
such investigation will undoubtedly be to find in hypnotism a 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 1 39 

remedy for that vast number of diseases originating from an 
abnormal brain and nerve activity, and against which the weap- 
ons we procure from the arsenal of the apothecary are without 
effect. As the doctor, before he applies a new remedy on a 
patient, first tries it on a healthy person ; therefore the hypnotic 
phenomenon should be tried on a healthy person before produc- 
ing it on a patient. 

I believe that I have already mentioned that I would not 
treat of hypnotic cures in this article. What I am going to 
relate is the unvarnished statement about experiments per- 
formed under the strictest conditions in my own home upon 
ladies and gentlemen who had already shown themselves to be 
particularly susceptible to hypnotic influence, and who were in 
possession of good health. All of these individuals assured 
me that they had no unpleasant feelings whatever, either during 
or after being hypnotized. As they have always, with the 
greatest pleasure and readiness, been at my service for these ex- 
periments, I owe them my most sincere thanks. The suscepti- 
bility is developed considerably by repeated attempts, for that 
reason, if to investigate the phenomenon, it is better to select 
individuals who have been hypnotized before. At public 
seances there are always a number of young people who desire 
to try the experiment, and among these you will always find 
some who are particularly susceptible. I had the opportunity 
to witness several exhibitions given by Mr. Sextus, before sev- 
eral private societies, and I observed that it was quite easy to 
select good subjects, who, as I have already observed, have with 
pleasure placed themselves at my disposal. I thought it neces- 
sary to make the above remarks, but will now go on and give 
the account of the original attempts, and will go into particu- 
lars and explanations in regard to the nature of the hypnotic 
conditions. 

The first attempts at my house were with subjects of post- 
hypnotic experiment. It is understood that the hypnotist, 



I4O HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

while the subject is still under influence, commands him at a 
certain time after he is awakened to perform some certain act. 
At a small party on the second day of March this year, in a 
private family in Copenhagen, at which Mr. Sextus was pres- 
ent, he was asked to perform some hypnotic experiments. On 
this occasion a gentleman who had been hypnotized several 
times previously was sent for. After he had been put to sleep 
the suggestion was made, that on the next Saturday, March 5th 
at 8 o'clock p. m., he was to leave his home on Norrebro Gade 
and go to my residence on Store Kongens Gade ; after having 
asked for me and spoken to me, he was to perform a number 
of insignificant actions in an exact order as stated, after which 
he was to fall into a deep sleep, from which only Mr. Sextus could 
awaken him. As this gentleman, in a previous similar experi- 
ment, had caused quite a sensation on the street by his unsteady 
walk and peculiar appearance, it was also suggested to him that 
he walk perfectly erect and straight on the sidewalk ; take good 
care not to push against any of the passers by, and to have a 
perfectly normal appearance. 

I was informed by Mr. Sextus the next day of the experi- 
ment, and according to agreement, Mr. Sextus and a small 
number of others, and among them a physician, arrived at my 
house the Saturday evening mentioned, at 7 : 30 p. m. To 
avoid any unnecessary sensations and interference with the sub- 
ject and the experiment, I had given the servants orders to 
leave the doors unlocked, and to allow the man to pass in un- 
disturbed when he came, which would be between 8 and 8 : 30 
o'clock. I learned later that the subject was an iron moulder, 
whose name was L. N., twenty-three years old, married, had 
two children, and was a sober and industrious man. He 
had been hypnotized five or six times before by Mr. Sextus. 
He had never been at my house before. 

At 8 : 25 the door bell rang; my son opened the door, and 
without hesitation the young man stepped into my private of- 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 141 

nee, which had been vacated by all, with the exception of my 
colleague and myself. The others remained in an adjoining 
room, from which, through an open door, they could observe 
everything that was going on. Mr. Sextus had stepped into a 
side room so that he would not be seen by L. N. The hypno- 
tized man, who held himself rather stiff, and spoke with a cer- 
tain dull accent, repeated exactly what had been told him, and 
performed the different acts in exact order. He stared at me 
without any expression in his eyes, and after he had accom- 
plished what had been told him to do, he fell into a deep and 
unconscious sleep, from which he could not be awakened by 
any of us, by either speaking to him or touching him. Mr. 
Sextus placed the index finger and the middle finger of his 
right hand in front of the subject's wide open eyes, who fol- 
lowed the hypnotist into the next room. There were now sev- 
eral experiments performed, to convince us that the subject was 
completely insensible to any pain. / placed under his right 
arm a mark an inch long with a red hot knitting needle, with- 
out any motion or sign that he felt it. I put a strong needle 
through his hand, so that it projected a quarter of an inch on 
the other side, during which {he being co?n?nanded) sat with a 
happy and smiling expression on his face. 

In the same manner as before the hypnotist brought the sub- 
ject back to my office, where he was seated in an easy chair. 
By investigation it was found that the pupils of his eyes — not- 
withstanding the strong light — were considerably dilated, but 
by bringing a lighted candle close to the eyes, the pupils slightly 
contracted. A trial with a very strong electric battery proved 
that he was only slightly sztsceptible to electric htfluence; the 
handles even fell from his grasp, while the effect upon us was 
so strong that we could not let go when we held them. 

Mr. Sextus now awoke the sleeper by a sharp shout. He 
opened his eyes and gazed about with a dazed look, evidently 
surprised at finding himself in a strange house, surrounded by 



I42 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

a party of almost entire strangers. I then asked him several 
questions which he answered quickly and satisfactorily. He 
declared that he felt splendid, and apparently had not the 
slightest idea of having undergone any painful operation. 

I shall not go into fuller description of those more or less 
ordinary experiments concerning suggestions, which were all 
successful, but only give a few which astonished me greatly at 
the time. I have had the opportunity to witness since, experi- 
ments which were even much more astonishing. 

Mr. Sextus, at a previous time, had assured me that he, by 
merely making a pass with his hand, could transfer his power 
of controlling a person to another, who was altogether unac- 
quainted with the art. I remembered this and expressed a wish 
to be put en rapport with L. N., during his sleep. This was 
immediately done, and he, when he was asleep before had not 
paid the slightest attention to what I had said or done, now fol- 
lowed me in the same way he had Mr. Sextus, following my 
commands, even to repeating with extraordinary exactness a 
number of Greek sentences of Odysian, which I said one by one. 
At the same time, after Mr. Sextus' instructions, I tapped him 
lightly on the crown of his head with my two fingers. I was 
instructed to remove the tapping from that part of his head, and 
was informed that the hypnotized would no longer obey me, 
but as soon as I tapped him as before, the influence returned. 
I saw Mr. Sextus scrape along the floor with his foot in front 
of the subject, and from that instant my influence over him 
was gone. 

While L. N. was in one of the rooms having some supper, 
and I was present with him alone, I heard a single clap of hands 
from one of the rooms, and at the same instant the subject fell 
asleep again. The hypnotist, at a distance, had in this manner 
put him to sleep. The reader will later on get still more 
astonishing proof of this power, exercised at a distance and per- 
fectly noiseless. If we had not seen it ourselves, and taken 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 143 

care to exclude all chance of being cheated, I will honestly 
admit that I would have concluded the whole of it was a humbug. 

I will not dwell any longer in explaining the experiments 
with L. N., only to add that my porter told me that the subject 
came to the house at the above mentioned time, without the 
porter noticing anything peculiar about him. He first turned 
to the right, where there is a separate door to one of the apart- 
ments, where he stood a moment shaking the door knob. He 
then observed the door-plate, discovered his mistake, and then 
went to the proper door. 

I will call attention to post-hypnotic experiments, by which 
the subject, after a shorter or longer period, is compelled to per- 
form acts that may be entirely against his nature. A French 
physician, Professor Beaunis, has lately given an account of an 
order that was exactly executed a full year after the suggestion 
had been given. In this manner a rascal could influence another 
person to commit a crime, while it would be very difficult to 
discover the originator. The poor instrument on coming out of 
the hypnotic sleep, would not have the slightest idea of what 
he had done. On the other hand we learned through our experi- 
ments that hypnotized individuals are utterly insensible to pain. 
Physicians can perhaps have in that condition a splendid nar- 
cotic for operations, where for some reason they cannot use 
chloroform, ether, etc. 

In the first part of June I had the opportunity to see a young 
lady perform a post- hypnotic experiment, which was rather 
complicated. She was told to leave her home in a carriage, be 
driven to a certain place down town, where she had never been 
before, there to select a particular person out a room of which 
there was a number, and where a good many people passed in 
and out, say some exact words to that person, and then fall 
asleep and to remain in that condition until Mr. Sextus, who 
was to come later, awakened her. On this occasion there was 
several experiments similar to those related by the French 



144 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

physician, which, being successful, I had a great desire to try 
them at my own house with the same subject, where I could 
investigate them more closely. The subject, Miss H., was, 1 
judge, about twenty-two years old, employed as a cashier in a 
down-town store. She had previously been hypnotized by Mr. 
Sextus four or five times. She is small of stature, but well de- 
veloped, a light brunette, blue-gray eyes, and had from her own 
statement never suffered from any serious illness. 

On the 1 6th of June, at 8 o'clock, p. m., Miss H. came will- 
ingly to my house according to my request. Mr. Sextus was 
already there in company with a few others who had been in- 
vited. The young lady was ushered into the parlor, where 
she was soon engaged in conversation with those present. 
Pretending it to be necessary, I went with Mr. Sextus into my 
room, where we agreed that he should place himself where the 
subject could not see him and begin to hypnotize her, when I, 
by a slight coughing, should give the- signal. 1 had not, in or- 
der to make the experiment more convincing, imparted our agree- 
ment to any of the others. I was sure the subject could not be 
influenced by seeing or hearing the hypnotist. During the 
lively conversation that was going on I gave the signal, and as I 
did so the subject turned her head toward the absent Mr. Sextus, 
at the same time taking on an absent-minded expression. 
I asked her if anything Was the matter, to which she replied in 
a low voice that nothing was the matter. Her eyes became set, 
and a moment after, as the hypnotist made a short motion in 
the air with his outstretched hand, she arose from the chair and 
with slow, dragging steps went towards Mr. Sextus in the ad- 
joining room. He was closely watched by me all the time, and 
had not moved from the spot, nor made any noise whatever. 

The hypnotist, by placing two fingers before her eyes, led 
her back to the room from which she had come and placed her 
in her chair. During this sleep she received an order to in 
five minutes after waking, go into the next room to the piano, 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. I45 

and from a number of books to select a certain volume, and, in 
a kneeling position, hand it to me, and in a certain tone of voice 
to repeat some exact words. The subject was awakened by a 
slow fanning, when she had not the slightest recollection of what 
had happened, but continued the conversation. Exactly five min. 
utes after her eyes took on a staring expression, she arose as if 
obeying some unavoidable impulse, and executed the order 
precisely. She was again awakened while still in the kneeling 
position and was evidently disturbed and rather angry over the 
situation. 

Miss H. now partook of some refreshments, and while the 
young lady was in the act of eating a piece of cake, I gave Mr. 
Sextus, who sat a few yards behind her, a signal by a slight 
wink. He ?7iade a noiseless motion with his hand and she 
instantly turned her head and J eel asleep. During this there 
was several suggestions made to her. She was walking in a 
garden picking flowers, one by one, and placing them together 
in an imaginary bouquet in her left hand. It was suggested 
that one of them was held very tight, she therefore pulled it out 
with a quick jerk. She was told to enjoy the odor of the 
flowers, and with evident pleasure she smelled her bouquet. 
The hypnotist sneezed, and at the same time told her it smelled 
very strong. She immediately sneezed several times in succes- 
sion until she was stopped by a motion of his hand. She was 
told that she was out in a boat and would be sea-sick. No 
sooner said, than the usual symptoms of a faint feeling and diz- 
ziness showed themselves, and I am positive that she would 
have become quite sea-sick, if the impression had not been 
removed by the hypnotist. I will not continue to relate the 
different suggestions that were made to her, but pass over to a 
new attempt, which was the cause of several of a similar nature, 
and which greatly astonished me. 

The reader will remember that the experiments began by 
Miss H. being hypnotized at a distance. I wished to try if it 



I46 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

could also be done from behind a closed door. Unobserved by 
the subject, who during her waking intervals was busily con- 
versing with the others, / went with Mr. Sextus into my room 
and closed the door. We compared our watches, and it was 
agreed after a certain number of minutes he would attempt to 
hypnotize the young lady while locked in my room. / now 
returned to the other room, and at the exact time agreed upon, 
in the act of answering a question of one of the gentlemen, the 
subject stopped short. The others were wholly unaware of 
what was to happen. She dropped her head as usual in a deep 
sleep, got up and went towards the closed door, which she 
opened and then went toward Dr. Sextus, who stood in the cen- 
ter of the room with his hand outstretched toward the door. 
During this hypnose it was suggested to her that the next 
morning before going down town to work, she should write a 
letter to me, the contents of which had been dictated in the sug- 
gestion, and it was to be signed " Gaston." This name was 
pronounced with a certain dashing accent. I mention this 
because the signature in the letter, which reached me through 
the mail in due time, was written with a flourishing swing 
which undoubtedly resulted from the suggestion which she had 
received while asleep. If the young lady should read this 
account, she will then for the first time be aware of having 
written me such a letter ; that is a peculiar part of the hypnotic 
conditions, that the subject has no recollection of having received 
a suggestion or having performed it. 

What caused most wonder at this experiment was hypno- 
tizing at a distance. Although I had heard of such experi- 
ments before, I always considered such communications as con- 
scious or unconscious stories, as we would naturally consider it 
as an agreed upon deception. Although I had done all in my 
power to prevent any communication between the hypnotist and 
the subject, and the witnesses present, in spite of all their vigi- 
lance, had not been able to discover that any communication 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 147 

had taken place between the parties concerned by any ordinary 
means of expression. However, I wished to investigate the 
matter closer and take still further precautions. 

On the 23rd of June, Shoemaker Sch., according to my re- 
quest, came to my house. He was about twenty years of age, 
born in Sweden, of medium r L height, pretty well built, brown, 
curly hair, light brown eyes, and a pale complexion. He de- 
clared never to have suffered from any sickness, and had pre- 
viously been hypnotized several times; he thinks five or six 
times by Mr. Sextus. Before he arrived Mr. Sextus and a few 
of my particular friends had already made their appearance. I 
explained to Mr. Sextus not to let the subject know by any 
noise that he was present and to remain in a room which was 
some distance from my office. When Shoemaker Sch. came, well 
knowing that the object of his coming was to execute some hyp- 
notic experiments, I told him I was afraid of some misunder- 
standing occurring, as Mr. Sextus had not yet arrived. How- 
ever, I asked him to wait a while and see if the missing one 
would not come. I began a conversation with him in my of- 
fice. Mr. Sextus and my friends were in the next room ob- 
serving the strictest silence. The hypnotist could hear the 
signal agreed upon for beginning the experiment, which was a 
light scratching with my nails on the door, as I stood with my 
back against it. The instant I gave the signal the subject 
drew a deep breath, fell back in the chair with upturned eyes 
and slept. We now made several experiments during his sleep 
which were only of consequence to the medical profession and 
which for that reason I will pass. I will, however, relate one 
particular. His pulse was counted and found to be 120 beats 
per minute. I made the request that they should go down to 
eighty within two minutes. The hypnotist gave him the sug- 
gestion that his heart should beat slower and easier until it 
reached eighty beats to a minute. When the two minutes had 
elapsed his pulse was eighty-two, almost what was desired. 



148 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

This phenomenon was of extraordinary importance from a 
scientific standpoint, as we see that the nervous system's activity 
during the hypnosis can be modified and that the hypnotist 
acquires a certain power over life's involuntary operations, 
which, during a normal condition, is impossible. During the 
whole experiment the pupils of the eyes of the subject were 
also considerably dilated, even if we allowed him to look 
straight at the light. The moment he awakened they con- 
tracted to their normal size. The subject now had some lunch 
in my dining-room, while the rest, together with Mr. Sextus, had 
gone into my office, which is separated from the dining room 
by a large sitting room. The dining-room is so situated that 
the door of my office cannot be seen when sitting at the dining 
table, while from the sitting room you have a view of both 
apartments. In a whisper I requested Mr. Sextus from his 
present position to try his influence over the subject, who was 
in the dining-room. Just then Mr, Sextus lifted his arm; 
the subject dropped his hand and fell asleep. I asked Mr. Sex- 
tus to wake him from the same place. The subject immediately 
regained consciousness, heaved a deep sigh and continued his 
meal without apparently having any knowledge of the inter- 
mediate episode. He was brought once more under influence 
and I desired to be put en rapport with him, so as to give him a 
suggestion myself. I told him his right arm was sore, which 
could be cured by putting on a Spanish fly; I took a piece of 
paper, covered with gum-arabic, which I pasted on his arm, 
telling him it was a Spanish fly, which would draw a blister, 
and on the following evening at 8 : 30 o'clock, in a perfectly 
normal condition, come to my house to be examined. Mr. Sex- 
tus told me at the time that he did not think that I had given 
the suggestion with sufficient distinctness, and that the result 
would not perhaps be satisfactory. He said that he had never 
tried the experiment himself. I performed it after a French 
physician's account. 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. I49 

On the 24th of June Mr. Sextus was at my house, and 
shortly before the subject arrived, I requested him to remain 
several rooms away from my reception room. When the sub- 
ject had made his abearance, Mr. Sextus should, accompanied 
by some of the gentlernen, go down the kitchen stairs to the 
back gate, which is about ninety feet from the main building, 
and o?ze hundred and thirty five Jeet from where the subject 
was to sit. One of the gentlemen was to take up a position by 
a window facing the yard, and by waving a handkerchief, give 
the signal for Mr. Sextus to commence operations. I will ad- 
mit that at the time I felt rather ashamed of making such an 
attempt, which seemed to me sheer nonsense, and at the same time 
an impossibility. I went in to the subject who, during our con- 
versation, suddenly fell asleep. I went to the gentleman who 
was to give the signal and told him the subject was asleep, and 
he informed me that he had just given the signal. This won- 
derful experiment had then been successful. I wondered if 
some secret connection had not taken place, and made up my 
mind to try another experiment, to still further sharpen my 
measure of precaution, which I will mention later. 

Before hypnotizing at a distance took place, I had a long 
conversation with the subject who, I found, had misunderstood 
the suggestion given him by me the evening before. He told 
me that he had a pain in the right arm, at the exact spot where I 
had pasted the paper, and during the night he got up and bathed 
it in cold water. He had, of course, washed the paper off. He 
asked me if I did not think a Spanish fly that would draw a blister 
would help him. " What makes you think so," I asked. "I don't 
know," said he, "but just thought so." "Have you ever used 
a Spanish fly ? " I again asked. "No," he answered. "How 
then do you know," said I, " that it draws a blister? " " I don't 
know, but just thought so," he replied. " Very well," I answered, 
" queer enough, you have struck the right remedy. I will now 
put a Spanish fly on your arm, and the pain will immediately 



l 5° 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 



disappear." I cut a piece of gummed paper into a strip 
about two inches long and one inch and a half wide, which I 
pasted on his arm and put a bandage around it. It was at this 
point that the above-mentioned signal was given, and Mr. Sex- 
tus now came into the room to the sleeper. At my request the 
hypnotist now, with a sharp, almost threatening voice, gave the 
following suggestions : " The Spanish fly you have on your 
arm must remain there undisturbed. It will, without causing 
you any pain, draw a large blister. To-morrow evening at 9 
o'clock you must come here to the Doctor's office, show him the 
blister, and inform him that your arm is well." The commands 
were repeated several times, sharp and distinct, and he also re- 
quired the subject to repeat the suggestions word for word. 
Mr. Sextus, ending in a very commanding voice, said " I want 
this to happen." 

According to my desire, those present went into another 
room while I remained alone with the subject, whom I asked Mr. 
Sextus to slowly awaken from the other room, the door of 
which was closed. I seated myself opposite the subject, ready 
to resume the conversation where it had been interrupted. / 
saw him gasp for breath three times in succession, and then grad- 
ually wake up. I spoke to him and he answered me as if noth- 
ing had interrupted us, I will only remark that the witnesses 
in the other room stated that Mr. Sextus had awakened the subject 
by making three passes to the side, which corresponded to the 
three gasps. Shoemaker Sch. was now dismissed without any 
idea that Mr. Sextus had been present. 

The subject arrived the 25th of June, five minutes after the 
appointed time. Without being asked, he told me that the 
pain in his arm had disappeared, and that the plaster (gummed 
paper) had come loose during the night, that he had replaced 
it, and in order to keep it there had tied a thread around it. 
On investigation it was found that a blister, filled with water, 
had formed, the exact size of the paper, such as we see after a 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 151 

quick drawing plaster has been applied. The surrounding 
skin, as is usually the case, was not red, caused by the extra 
current of blood, but perfectly white. The paper, perhaps on 
account of perspiration, had lost all its gum. On closer exami- 
nation, it was found that the blister was exactly the same as formed 
after a Spanish fly. The subject had experienced no pain from 
the experiment ; he had hardly even noticed the blister. 

I will try one more experiment that was performed the same 
evening. I handed the subject a letter telling him that Mr. 
Sextus had left it for him. He opened the envelope and imme- 
diately fell asleep. * The letter contained only the one word, 
" sleep." He had never before seen Mr. Sextus' hand-writing, 
and I am therefore convinced that it was the circumstance of 
telling him who it was from that caused him to be influenced. 
On the other hand, I do not doubt that having seen the hand- 
writing of Mr. Sextus, it would only be necessary to hold it 
before his eyes to bring him under hypnotic influence, without 
mentioning Mr. Sextus' name. 

I was anxious to try one more experiment of hypnotizing at 
a distance, under such guarantee that any unbeliever could be 
convinced. It was done in the following manner on the 7th 
of June. 

I had invited a very esteemed but skeptic colleague, also a lead- 
ing police inspector, to come to my house on the day mentioned 
a little before 9 o'clock p. m. The above mentioned Shoemaker 
Sch., as we have seen was very susceptible to hypnotic influence. 
I had per letter asked him to be at my house at 9 o'clock. I 
told the gentlemen what the experiment was grounded upon, 
and did not try to hide that it seemed in a sense superstitious, 
but that from the experiments already performed I considered I 
had good cause for going still further. 

I asked them to set the exact time, when Mr. Sextus, from his 
apartments in Ny Ostergade, should begin to hypnotize this man 
in my room on St. Kongensgade, near the Marble Head church. 



152 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 



The distance in a straight line measured on a map is 2,790 feet. 
The gentlemen willingly, even with a smile on their faces, con- 
sented to my proposal. A letter was written to Mr. Sextus, 
■which was taken to him at his home by my son, whose watch 
had been set with ours. Mr. Sextus was requested in the let- 
ter, at exactly fifteen minutes after nine, (the time having been 
set by my friends) by my son's watch, to commence hypnotiz- 
ing Shoemaker Sch., who -was sitting in a chair in my room. 
The subject was placed with his face to the light, so that the 
two gentlemen who were conversing with him could watch him 
closely. I had given him a cigar which he seemed very much 
to enjoy, Just when the hands of our watches had reached the 
set time, his face assumed a disturbed expression. He did not 
answer us, rubbed his forehead with one hand, tried to brace 
himself up and come out of the stupor. He tried to put his 
cigar in his mouth, but his hands dropped down and he fell 
into a deep sleep. 

The long distance made this experiment still more unex- 
plainable. Mr. Sextus soon arrived, together with my son, and 
was himself rather astonished over the result. He had never 
before attempted to hypnotize at nearly so great a distance. 
There was a number of other experiments tried with which I 
will not tire the reader. — [ From the Illustrated Fainily Journal, 
Copenhagen, Denmark, July 31, and August 7, 1887. ] 

TESTIMONIAL. 

On Wednesday evening, March 2, 1887, Carl Sextus, the 
celebrated hypnotist, according to previous arrangement, ap- 
peared at the residence of the undersigned H. F. Jensen, where 
a limited number of friends were gathered. We had an anima- 
ted and interesting conversation in regard to hypnotic phenom- 
ena, which Professor Sextus produces with great ease with 
susceptible hypnotic individuals. Professor Sextus performed 
several experiments during the evening, but it is the intention 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 153 

to confirm only the truth of the following : A subject was 
placed in hypnotic sleep, during which he was commanded by 
Mr. Sextus, on the following Saturday, March 5, at 8 
o'clock p. M., to leave his home in Norrebro Gade and walk 
directly to the residence of Dr. Lutken, at 67 Kongengade 
street, where, after ringing the bell, he should ask for Dr. 
Lutken, introducing himself as the hypnotist, Carl Sextus, who 
was coming to hypnotize the doctor,, According to directions, 
and on the day mentioned, the subject was to be shown into the 
doctor's drawing room, where a small party would be assembled 
to perform the suggested manifestations; thereafter to crow 
like a cock, swing his arms in the air and fall into a deep hyp- 
notic sleep, from which he could be awakened by Professor 
Sextus only, who for the occasion is to be present. The sub- 
ject was instructed to keep on the sidewalk, and to carefully 
avoid interference with the crowd; and although sleeping, to 
bear the evidence of being awake in a perfectly normal condi- 
tion. To ascertain whether these instructions were followed 
according to the suggestions given by Mr. Sextus, a committee 
consisting of Messrs. S. Petersen and R. Jensen, was appointed 
to follow and watch the subject. 

J. L. W. V. Jensen, C. E., Copenhagen Telephone Co. 

G. M. R. Levinsen, Principal Royal Zoological Museum. 

Julius Nielsen, Postmaster Royal Mail. 

Sophus Petersen, Actor, Royal Opera. 

Harald F. Jensen, Vice President Copenhagen Tel. Co. 

Wm. Jensen, Bookkeeper Danish Sugar Refining Co. 

Martin Creutz, Lieutenant. 

Viggo Blythman, Banker. 
Frederiksberg, March 2, ii 



We, the undersigned, certify that the subject according to 
the instructions given him, left his home Saturday evening at 8 
o'clock, and went to the residence of Dr. Lutken, and on the 



154 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

way he conducted himself exactly in accordance with the orders 
given. The undersigned, separated by a short distance, fol- 
lowed the subject from his home to destination, 67 St. Kongengade. 

J. L. W. V. Jensen, C. E., Copenhagen Telephone Co. 
Sophus Petersen, Actor, Royal Opera. 
Martin Creutz, Lieutenant. 
Viggo Blythman, Banker. 
Copenhagen, March 6, 1887. 



Herman Schwartz, M. D., in The Illustrated Family Jour- 
nal, Copenhagen, Nov. 25, 1887, says: 

" During the past six months Mr. Carl Sextus, of whom 
Dr. George Lutken recently spoke with so much praise, has 
been conducting a considerable number of hypnotic cures in this 
city in co-operation with, and under the direction of a promi- 
nent physician. 

" Dr. Lutken has recently described a number of hypnotic 
experiments conducted by him and Mr. Sextus, and as I have 
had occasion, together with the editor of this journal, Mr. Al- 
ler, to witness a number of experiments differing from those 
described by Dr. Lutken, I have thought it might not be unin- 
teresting to give our readers some new evidences of Mr. Sextus' 
rare powers as a hypnotist. 

"On Tuesday, Nov. 4, 1887, I called on Mr. Aller in his 
office on Blaagaardsgade, to arrange the details for the experi- 
ments which were to be made a few hours later. I will not 
deny that it was with a great deal of doubt of obtaining a posi- 
tive result that I went trying Mr. Sextus' ability as a hypnotist; 
for I had made up my mind to select a distance greatly in ac- 
cess of any that Mr. Sextus had heretofore overcome. After 
Mr. Aller and I had completed our arrangements in regard to 
the experiment, we sent for Mr. Sextus. Mr. Sextus had no 
idea of the arrangements I had made with Mr. Aller, but when 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 1^5 

he learned that a new experiment in hypnotism was to be tried 
he showed himself ready and willing, as usual, to do whatever 
we required. He was given a sealed letter, and was directed to 
take the next train for Lyngby, distant about eleven English 
miles from the place where we were; to proceed to the tele- 
phone station at that place, deliver the letter to the telephone 
director, and then await further developments. The letter, 
which Mr. Sextus delivered, merely requested that the gentle- 
man addressed should be present with Mr. Sextus as a witness; 
and that he carry on the conversation through the telephone, 
which was in direct communication with Mr. Aller's on Blaa- 
gaardsgade. In the meantime a messenger was sent to journey- 
man Shoemaker Sch., whom Mr. Sextus had previously utilized 
for similar — if not so far-reaching — experiments. He arrived 
at 3:45 p. m., entirely ignorant of what was about to take 
place. Mr. Aller led him into the room where the experiment 
was to be made, and where I then was. There was no intro- 
dution, and I at once began a conversation with him, and asked 
him why he had come, and he replied that he did not know, but 
that he had received a letter from Mr. Aller requesting him to 
come at a certain time, and that was why he had come. I gave him 
a cigar, told him to sit down ; and placed myself opposite to 
him ; keeping him constantly engaged in conversation. I told 
him that I was one of Mr. Aller's assistants, and that we ex- 
pected Mr. Sextus at 5 o'clock to try some experiments in hyp- 
notism in which he (Sch.) and I were to take part as subjects. I 
told him that we had received word that Mr. Sextus could not 
come until an hour later than he had expected. 

" It was now 4 o'clock. Mr. Aller (who had in the meantime 
ascertained, through the telephone in his office, that Mr. Sex- 
tus was at the telephone station together with the director and 
his daughter) now came in and notified me by a sign that every- 
thing was ready for the trial. It is a matter of course that our 
watches were set exactly alike. 



156 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

" At four minutes after four Mr. Aller notified Mr. Sextus 
through the telephone to begin. To prevent misunderstanding 
I would here remark that the telephone room was on the Jirst 
floor, while the subject was in a roo?7i situated on the fourth 
floor / so that all possibility of the subject being able to hear the 
conversation carried on over the telephone was excluded. 

" A few seconds later Mr. Sextus had received the order and 
executed it, making a pass in the air in the direction of Copen- 
hagen. At the same instant the. subject, who up to that time 
had been freely conversing with me and smoking his cigar, 
became impatient. He no longer replied when spoken to ; he 
rocked his body backward and forward ; his face took on a 
stiff, absent-minded expression; and his breathing became 
rapid and irregular. This state lasted two minutes. He then 
became quiet. His breathing became regular; he drew a deep 
breath, and he was now in a deep hypnotic sleep. 

" We now telephoned to Mr. Sextus and told him to allow 
the subject to sleep five minutes, and to awaken him at exactly 
nine minutes past 4 o'clock. To be brief, the order was obeyed] 
and at exactly five ?ninutes after the subject fell asleep he drew 
a deep breath, opened his eyes, looked around a moment with a 
puzzled expression, and then immediately continued the con- 
versation as if nothing had happened. I handed him a match 
to light his cigar, which had gone out. He thanked me, and 
lighted the cigar, remarking, apologetically, that he was not 
accustomed to smoking, and that it was probably on that ac- 
count that the cigar had gone out. To avoid unnecessary 
repetition, I shall simply state that this trial was made twice 
more within an hour — both times with the same satisfactory re- 
sult. I would observe that during his sleep the subject's pulse 
was between 120 and 130; whereas, while he was awake it 
was eighty. In conclusion, I will say that the man went home 
at 5 o'clock, having been told that we had received word 
from Mr. Sextus that it would be impossible for him to come at 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 157 

the appointed hour. He left without having the slightest idea 
that he had been hypnotized, and after cheerfully consenting 
to come to Mr. Aller's private residence the same evening at 7 
o'clock, when Mr. Sextus would undertake a few more experi- 
ments. Before I proceed to describe the experiments at that 
time I will mention a little incident which occurred in one of 
the intervals between the above experiments, and which, though 
seemingly insignificant, led to a very interesting experiment 
later on. As we were walking about the room, during one of 
these intervals, the subject stopped at a table and picked up a 
photograph of Mr. Sextus and examined it. When we asked 
him if he zvould care to own it, he said he would rather have 
one of himself, We replaced it on the table, and during the 
evening Mr. Aller suggested an experiment based on this inci- 
dent. 

"That evening I had occasion to see the experiments which I 
shall now describe, at Mr. Aller's private residence, where a 
select party of ladies and gentlemen, specially invited, had 
gathered. Mr. Sextus did only what he was requested to do. 
One of the gentlemen present, a Mr. L., who had not been 
present at the long distance experiments of the afternoon, ex- 
pressed a desire to see a similar experiment, and as he was 
somewhat skeptical he did not state at what time he would ex- 
pect the experiment to be made. He requested Mr. Sextus to 
put Sch., into the cataleptic state. Mr. Sextus at once 
made a pass in the air, and the subject fell into hypnotic sleep 
and on Mr. Sextus' suggestion at once became perfectly rigid 
from head to foot. 

" The guests gathered around the subject, and Mr. L,., who 
had ■proposed the experiment, requested Mr. Aller to set his 
watch exactly with his, and to note the instant the subject would 
awake. Then, with a slight smile on his lips, and without saying 
another word, he took Mr. Sextus by the arm and led him out 
of the room and out of the house, down the street about a block, 



I58 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

around the corner into another street, where he walked up and 
down with Mr. Sextus. Suddenly he stood still, looked at his 
watch and said to the hypnotist, awaken him ! Sextus made his 
pass in the air. The two gentlemen returned to the house, 
where they found the guests speaking with the subject, who 
had suddenly awakened and continued his conversation without 
the least idea of having been put to sleep. 

c On comparison it was shown that Mr. Alleys watch showed 
that exactly twelve minutes had elapsed from the time the two 
gentlemen left the house until the subject awoke, and Mr, L. 
had to admit that exactly that length of time had passed when 
he told Mr. Sextus to awaken him. 

" Now another experiment. While the guests were grouped 
about the room listening to Mr. Aller, who was playing the 
organ, it occurred to me to have Sch., who stood by 
the organ greatly enjoying the music, hypnotized for a moment. 
I sat on the sofa with Mr. Sextus and Mr. Aller's daughter 
and I asked Mr. Sextus if he could hypnotize him without 
speaking to him or drawing his attention in any way. Sch. 
stood at the organ with his back to us. Sextus sat 
half turned away, and I watched them both. Suddenly about 
half a minute after I had made my request, / saw Sch. 
getting uneasy/ his face assumed a rigid, absent expression 
and he was just about to fall asleep, when I said to Mr. Sextus, 
(-awaken himf which he did with a simple motion of his hand. 
Nobody but the young lady, Mr. Sextus and I, had any idea of 
what had happened. 

" I will now relate the experiment which was suggested by 
the desire expressed by the subject in the afternoon, to have a 
portrait. Mr. Aller cut a number of slips of paper the size of 
an ordinary photograph. On one of these he placed a mark — 
invisible to any one who was not initiated. Mr. Sch. was now 
hypnotized, and Mr. Sextus requested to give him the sugges- 
tion that on the particular piece of paper, which we had marked, 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. I59 

he would find an excellent portrait of himself ; and that he could 
always, whether hypnotized or awake, be able to find it amongst 
the other similar pieces, and to distinctly see his portrait. He 
lboked over the slips and stopped at the one we had marked, 
and said that was his photograph. This was repeated several 
times, with the same result, for he always picked out the same 
slip. He was then awakened, and the conversation went on as 
though nothing had happened. After some time I approached 
Sch., and asked him if he remembered that in the 
afternoon he had expressed a wish to possess a picture of him- 
self. When he replied that he did, I handed him the slips of 
paper and told him that on one of them was his photograph. 
He evidently thought I was making fun of him, and he was 
half offended, pushing the slips aside ; and for some time it was 
impossible to make him look at them again. Finally, after we 
had earnestly asked him to look them over, he did so, still 
unwillingly and carelessly, as though it was a very poor joke. 
Suddenly he became more attentive ; his careless expression 
gave way to a look of great surprise, and he said, as he picked 
out the marked slip : ' Why, that is my photograph / but how 
did that happen P^ We explained to him that after Mr. Aller 
heard him express the wish to possess his own portrait, he had 
taken an instantaneous photograph of him while he stood talk- 
ing to me, without his knowledge. This explanation satisfied 
him, and with evident pleasure he put the supposed photo into 
his breast-pocket. Later during the evening he was always 
willing to show his photograph to anyone who wished to see 
it. Once, while he was showing it to a gentleman, it was 
remarked that the portrait was somewhat dim, and he replied 
that that was no wonder, for it was rather dark when it was 
taken. 

" In order that he should not make himself ridiculous before 
others by exhibiting a blank piece of paper as his photograph, 
he was again hypnotized, and it was suggested to him that he 



l6o HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

must never show the photograph to anyone. He was awakened, 
and a short time after I asked him to let me see his photograph 
again, but he was completely changed in manner. He only 
replied that it was of no use as I had already seen it. He 
refused to show it to anyone, even to Mr. Sextus. When he 
was again hypnotized it was suggested that he forget all about 
the photograph, which he did. 

" Before I close I will relate a few more experiments, which 
show the power Mr. Sextus exercises over his subjects. Mr. 
Sch., was hypnotized, and then I and several others present, tried 
to make the subject obey us, but in vain ; then Mr. Sextus 
made a pass in the air, and from that moment the subject obeyed 
me. In this manner Mr. Sextus could put the subject in rap- 
port with anyone of the persons present, and transfer his power 
over the subject to such persons ; but he was also able at any 
time to take back the influence over the subject to himself. 
Thus it was remarkable to see how, when the subject was fol- 
lowing the person to whom the power had been transjerred 
Mr, Sextus could draw the subject toward him, with his 
outstretched arm, even when the subject had his back turned, 
and even though Mr. Sextus and the subject were in different 
rooms. 

" It was also interesting to observe how blindly the subject 
obeyed when Mr. Sextus commanded him to exactly imitate 
every movement made by Mr. Aller, to whom Mr. Sextus 
transferred the power over him. Mr. Aller placed himself behind 
the subject ; if he walked backwards, the subject walked back- 
wards. If Mr. Aller moved an arm or a leg, so did the sub- 
ject. If Mr. Aller made a grimace the subject imitated it ex- 
actly, and this, be it remembered, when the back of the subject 
was turned to Mr. Aller, and this gentleman made his move- 
ments without the slightest noise. 

" The subject, in the cataleptic state, was stretched on the 
floor. By passing his hand in the air above the subject, Mr, 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. l6l 

Sextus caused the body to form a bow, convex side upwards, 
so that only his head and his heels rested on the floor. At 
another time during the sleep I held my hand under his nose. 
Mr. Sextus told him it was a bottle of ammonia, and he at 
once drew back his head with an expression of pain. Then I 
held a bottle containing ammonia to his nose ; Mr. Sextus told 
him it was odor of rose, and he hailed it with every sign of de- 
light. Again Mr. Sextus suggested to him that the index finger 
of his right hand was entirely devoid of feeling, whereas the 
middle finger of the same hand would be very painful, as it 
would be cut. I then passed a needle through the index fin- 
ger any number of times without causing the subject to pay the 
slightest attention to it, while as soon as I merely touched the 
middle finger with a piece of paper he drew his hand from me 
with every evidence of pain. 

" Hoping that I have not tired the reader, I will now make 
clear the stand I have taken in regard to hypnotism. 

" I am thoroughly convinced that in a physician's hands 
hypnotism will often prove an invaluable remedial agency, but 
at the same time I have received the impression that it was not 
every physician who should hypnotize, as a great deal of ex- 
perience is required, which the practice of the average physi- 
cian prevents him from acquiring. Therefore, it is my idea, 
that if hypnotism is to accomplish a great deal, physicians 
should study and practice it as a specialty, undertaking the cure 
of those diseases which are amenable to its influence for their 
colleagues who do not hypnotize." 

HYPNOTISM AND THE MEANING AND USE THEREOF, BY 
VIGGO BENDZ, M. D. 

I began my theoretic studies in hypnotism and the phenom- 
ena connected with it a little over one year ago. According to 
information received' from other places, it was clear to me, that 
here rested something so mysterious that we would be tempted 



l62 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

to call it charlatanism. However much it looked like that, it 
still contained a kernel, which if used with care and in the right 
place and manner, would afford physicians wonderful assistance 
in certain cases, especially where in spite of drugs and remedies 
so far tried, all were weaponless towards the relief of the suf- 
fering it was their problem to cure, or at least alleviate. I con- 
cluded that the inmost character of this kernel was dependent 
upon the mental influence concentrated on the proper cords by 
the sick, whose mental condition the physician had penetrated. 
I was not long in discovering that, which every physician soon 
learns, the effect he can have on his patients, especially on ner- 
vous patients, by his personal appearance and authority ; let 
that, however, be as great as it may, there will always be cases 
enough where he will come to a stop,.on account of the patient's 
conscious or unconscious resistance and doubt. It was here I 
intended to see the territory where hypnotism would be of val- 
uable assistance — of course its domain is limited. It could be 
used, for instance, in cases of disturbed blood circulation, in ner- 
vous diseases that had so far defied all other known remedies 
and methods. In a well directed mental or moral treatment in 
using hypnotism, we abolish the resistance that makes the pa- 
tient in a waking condition unsusceptible for a general influence. 
During the hypnose, we are able to impress the hypnotized with 
all imaginable representations. We see a young girl feels her- 
self unpleasantly influenced, by smelling a bottle that contains 
only water, when the hypnotist tells her it is ammonia. Re- 
versing the experiment, another lady is told by the hypnotist 
that a bottle which really contains ammonia, is lovely ottar of 
roses, which she inhales with evident delight and pleasure. On 
another occasion two young ladies are seen kneeling, and be- 
lieve they see the heavens open and all the angels visible. The 
hypnotist then impresses the young lady with the belief that all 
of her muscles are as rigid as steel, and in consequence of which 
her muscles become strained to a very high degree ; they are 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 163 

stiff, which condition can be easily withdrawn by the hypno- 
tist. 

It is also possible, in many cases, to cause a more satisfac- 
tory frame of mind, repel feelings of pain, arouse confidence of 
power in the muscles and movements of the limbs, not only 
while the hypnose lasts, but also after, and by repeating the treat- 
ment several times, with sufficient intervals to give the patient 
confidence in himself, is exactly what is required for a number 
of nervous diseases, something which can in very few cases be 
obtained through energetic mental influence without hypnotizing. 

The communications from foreign countries, as well as from 
this country, about hypnotic cures performed by Mr. C. Sextus, 
can only tend to strengthen my opinion in regard to hypno- 
tism's actual worth in cases to which it is adapted. 

It follows as a matter of course, that where hypnotism can 
be used as a method of cure, in each special case it should 
be decided by a man who can examine the patient's 
physical and mental condition, and who is thoroughly acquainted 
with hypnotism, not only through books, but through expe- 
rience. He ought before practicing its use to have watched its 
effect on several persons of different constitutions and tempera- 
ments. He should necessarily have witnessed and understood 
the different conditions that are shown through the different 
ways in which hypnose is introduced. 

As my interest in the science increased, I gradually ac- 
quainted myself with it. My personal experience was limited 
to a performance given by C. Hansen, the well-known Danish 
hypnotist, a number of years ago in the People's Theatre in Co- 
penhagen, where I was present as a prejudiced spectator. I 
concluded to seek out Mr. Carl Sextus, whose good will toward 
physicians was well known to me. Possibly through him I 
thought I might be able to see something that would enable 
me to use hypnotism in my practice. However, if I never used 
it at all it would always interest me scientifically. That I pursued 



I64 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

this course I have never had any occasion to regret. I believed 
I had reasons, and expected to be operated on by a practiced con- 
jurer, but after seeing the man and speaking with him on many 
occasions I found myself pleasantly surprised. There was 
nothing at all theatrical or deceptive about him. He took 
hold of the matter earnestly and seriously, and I found he had 
unbounded faith in his chosen profession. He does not look 
upon hypnotism as a supernatural power belonging solely to' 
him. He was willing on all occasions to sift the phenomena 
with me, explaining what he could, and at the same time admit- 
ting that many of the phenomena were beyond his explana- 
tion. 

At a great sacrifice of his time, he showed me a series of the 
usual experiments, which are now familiar to those who inves- 
tigate such matters. He also allowed me to perform different 
experiments. These phenomena are interesting to all who can 
witness them at close range, and especially interesting to a phy- 
sician, when there are a number of subjects and he is able to 
compare their susceptibleness ; noting how the hypnose is easily 
produced on one in a certain way, while a different method is 
used on another ; how it effects the pupil of the eye, the pulse 
and the breath ; while one is susceptible to suggestions, in the 
other it would be almost impossible to awaken intelligent action. 
The cataleptic condition is easily produced in one, while other 
subjects may not be so affected ; and last — but not least interest- 
ing — how they are awakened by different methods according to 
their individual condition. 

All that Mr. Sextus has shown me and other well known 
physicians, who have always been present as witnesses, has 
transpired without the least theatrical effect, and there has been 
so much left for us to decide and do, that all suspicion of "hum- 
bug" disappeared. It was not only as the practiced hypnotist 
that we knew Mr. Sextus ; but we have had many non-hyp- 
notic meetings and interviews with him, and we have thus 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 165 

acquired an insight into his amiable personality. When the 
conversation has turned on social life and humanity, he has 
shown a wonderful comprehension and reflection, surprising in 
a man of twenty-eight years of age, even though, like Mr. Sex- 
tus, he has experienced many changes during his life abroad 
and such as fall to the lot of very few. 

I have carefully examined and questioned those persons 
hypnotized by Mr. Sextus for me, in regard to their health 
before and after the experiments, especially if they found them- 
selves nervous, or in any way unpleasantly influenced after the 
different trials of hypnotizing, but I have not yet received an 
answer in the affirmative. 

There can be none more willing to admit than I that we 
cannot be too careful in our conclusions, and must also guard 
against untimely and over-hypnotizing by incompetents, which 
would bring danger to nervous systems and mental conditions. 
We stand opposite a remedy, which like all very powerful 
remedies, can be used to advantage and can also be misused. 

I cannot conclude these lines without describing a few of 
the trials made by Mr. Sextus, as well as some of the experi- 
ments he allowed me to perform. I will first mention experi- 
ments performed at a distance, which, to the physician, for the 
time being is of the least consequence — but these offer much of 
interest, especially because at the unspoken command the sub- 
ject at a distance obeys, but will not attempt an explanation of 
this phenomena. Mr. Sextus performed such an experiment 
for me at a distance of several hundred yards from my resi- 
dence, where myself and the subject remained. I have also 
had an opportunity to do something similar with a subject 
whom Mr. Sextus transferred to my control, under circum- 
stances where he could not possibly play any part, as my wife, 
in a distant room, wrote the time for the hypnose to commence 
and conclude, and brought the orders to me without trusting 
them to anyone else. The conferring of the power of the 



1 66 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

hypnotist to another is a phenomenon which certainly awakens 
great interest, but of which I can see no explanation. When 
Mr. Sextus has given the control of a subject to another he re- 
tains the power by which he can bring the subject under his own 
control at any time. Mr. Sextus commanded a subject while 
under hypnose that at a certain time after being awakened he 
should take a neck-tie pin from one of those present. The sub- 
ject positively refused to obey and declared: " You have said, 
Mr. Sextus, that I should not commit a theft, either sleeping 
or waking, and I will not do it.-'' A few weeks earlier Mr. 
Sextus had hypnotized the same man at my house, and while 
in hypnotic sleep he was told to steal a watch from a gentle- 
man present, but Mr. Sextus remarked that he should not steal it 
with the intention of keeping it, but only to show the gentle- 
man how carelessly he wore his gold watch and chain. The 
subject seemed unwilling to do this and refused. Later on the 
suggestion was repeated, and the subject was informed that the 
gentleman understood the whole thing was a joke, and on 
promising to give the watch back, he immediately placed him- 
self in the vicinity of the gentleman and stole the watch with a 
certain slyness. The suggestion was made that the experiment 
Was not in any case to be repeated in the future, even as a joke 
that he was never to do anything of the kind under any cir- 
cumstance, but to continue to be what he always had been — an 
honest man. 

Mr. Sextus asserts positively, in regard to hypnotizing of 
the sick and the influence we thereby secure over them, that 
when the cure is complete the treatment can be concluded by 
suggesting that in the future the patient will not be able to be 
hypnotized in any way, no matter what method may be used, 
nor who tries — unless he on account of sickness should wish it, 
and by that means the hypnotist's power over him is broken. 

I had an opportunity to ascertain the truth of the above in 
the case of a lady who had been repeatedly hypnotized by her 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. I 67 

husband. She was very susceptible to hypnotic influence, but 
through suggestion I made it impossible for her to be hypno- 
tized. In the above rests great comfort, both for the sick and the 
hypnotists, who wish to see hypnotism used as a method of cure. 

VIGGO BENDZ, M. D. 
Sten Blichers Vej No. 5, Frederiksberg, Copenha- 
gen, Denmark, October 21, 1888. 



EXTRACT FROM STOCKHOLM DAGBLADET, JAN. 20, 1885. 

"After being present at Mr. Sextus' seance on the 17th, the 
subscribers feel justified in calling the attention of the jniblic to 
the wonderful experiments which we witnessed, and to begin 
with we would distinctly state, neither imagination nor humbug 
were elements of this exhibition. These experiments not only 
deserve the interest of the masses, but much more are worthy 
of the attention of. investigators, as they serve to enlighten us in 
regard to powers of nature "which are as yet almost, wholly 
unknown. 

" Anton Nystrom, M. D. 

" C. F. Klemming, Royal Chief Librarian." 



MEDICAL WEEKLY, COPENHAGEN, JULY 2, 1887. 

U A Case of Chronic Morphinism treated by Means of 

Hypnotism. 
' " In various French journals I had read of cases of mor- 
phinism which had been cured by means of hypnotism, and as 
I once more determined to free myself from my terrible habit, 
I grasped this idea as a drowning man clutches a straw. To 
thoroughly investigate the matter I placed myself in communi- 
cation with Mr. Carl Sextus, the hypnotist, whose method of 
handling patients I considered more rational and effective than 
that of any of the hypnotists with whom I had previously come 
in contact. 



l68 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

" I succeeded in inducing Mr. Sextus to remain in my home, 
and every day I was put into a hypnotic sleep for about an 
hour, after which I felt greatly strengthened and refreshed. 
At this time I was using about no centigrams — or 18 grains — 
daily, divided in four doses, which were administered by an- 
other, so that I did not have the syringe and solution in my 
possession. 

" On the sixth day I forgot to ask for an injection, and from 
that moment I appreciated the health-bringing influence of hyp- 
notic sleep and by availing myself of it. The amount of 
morphine used was in one month reduced from no centigrams 
to six centigrams, without bringing on any of the symptoms 
which usually follow abstinence, although I attended to my 
practice and lived as usual in other respects. 

" During this entire period I was constantly in the "best pos- 
sible humor, sleeping all night from 10:30 to 6, after being 
hypnotized in bed. I would only add, that every time I slept 
it was suggested to me that I would feel well and be able con- 
stantly to reduce the quantity of morphine consumed. 

"J. P. G. Johansen, M. D." 

" At the request of the author of the above statement, I de- 
sire to add that from Dr. C. A. Hansen, M . D., in Nysted, who 
also has treated the author, and who has closely followed the 
history of the case, I have received a statement agreeing exactly 
with the above in every detail. 

"V. Budde, M. D., Editor Medical Weekly:" 



DANISH CONSULATE, 

259 MILWAUKEE AVENUE, CHICAGO, ILL. 

EMIL DREIER. CONSUL. 



OTTO A. DREIER, VICE CONSUL. 

I hereby certify, that the four Danish doctors, Dr. V. 
Bendz, Dr. A. Lutkin, Dr. H. Schwartz and Dr. y. P. 
Johansen^ who have signed certificates endorsing the hypnotic 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 



treatment of Mr. C. Sextus, are regular physicians, graduates 
of the University of Copenhagen, Denmark, and also certify, 
that the reco?nmendations are genuine. 

^rTZi EMIL DREIER, 

] Seal i Consul of Denmark. 

Chicago, III., Nov. 14, i88g. 



Chicago, Nov. 16, i88g. 
It is hereby certifed, that Air. Carl Sextus has been rec- 
ommended by Anton Nystrom, M. D., and C. F. Klemming, 
Librarian of the Royal Library at Stockhohn, Swedeii, and is 
favorably mentioned by B. Meyer, M. D., and A. Doe, M. D. % 
from the University of Christiania, Norway, all of whom have 
been present at seances held by Mr. Sextus. 

l^Tal PETER S VANOE, 

1 Seal i Swedish and Norwegian Vice- Consul. 

48 Michigan avenue. 



ROYAL DANISH CONSULATE, 

CHICAGO. 

OTTO A. DREIER, ACTING CONSUL, 

209 FREMONT STREET. 

This will certify that I know the bearer, Mr. Carl Sextus, 
to be the well-known and accomplished hypnotist, 7iative of the 
Kingdom of Denmark, who, some years ago, in connection with 
some of the leading physicians and scientific men of Denmark, 
performed many marvelous cures and gave many astonishing 
exhibitions of his skill — which cannot be called in question — as 
well in Norway and Sweden as in Denmark. 

OTTO A. DREIER, 

Kgl. Dansk Vice-Conszd, 
f. t. Co?isul. 

Chicago, III., Feb. 20^ i8gj. 




I70 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

THE MYSTERIOUS SOUL-POWER OR WILL-POWER; ALSO CALLED 
TELEPATHY OR MENTAL TELEGRAPHY. 

Often people ask : " Is there any power in the mind to pro- 
duce a result by simply willing it?" 

Yes ; everyone has force or will-power more or less ; but 
very few understand how to use it. 

" Can human magnetism or will-power act at a distance?" 

Certainly. The magnetic aura^ or nerve ether, has a great 
sphere of action, as one, by its help, can operate at incredible dis- 
stances — especially when the operator has been in rapport with 
a sensitive person. The distances are so considerable that it 
seems as if no limit can be stated. In such cases of magnetizing 
or mental telegraphy at long distance the message, or the magnetic 
aura, is transported by the aid of the will and the sympathy. 
This peculiar power or will passing from the telegrapher or 
operator can frequently be applied with success upon persons, who 
besides being specially sensitive, willingly give themselves up to 
the operator, particularly upon persons who have been operated 
upon before. 

Magnetism seems to be the special agent of will-power ; and 
it belongs to the body, while the will is of the soul. There are 
various electric currents which travel through the earth ; and 
whatever emanates from the minci (and mind is the creator of 
all things) falls in with its like and journeys on doing its 
work. 

In the matter of personal magnetism a current can be con- 
veyed for miles when the two persons have previously been 
in rapport ; and then when a current has been established the 
positive can send it along to the negative by the mind power or 
will, which is superior to material force. My own experiments 
in hypnotizing at a distance, and other hypnotists' experiments 
in the same line, under the same or similar circumstances, will 
prove this. 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. I7I 

" There is a human telegraphy," says O. Isychismo (Lisbon.) 
" There has been reserved for human magnetism, perhaps, one of 
the greatest triumphs in modern discoveries, that is to say, the 
superseding of the electric telegraph for the transmission of 
thought to a distance. Numerous already are the cases in which 
magnetizers operate upon persons magnetized at enormous dis- 
tances, and oblige them to do what is required of them, by men- 
tal action, just as effectually as if they dictated to them by 
spoken words." 

In Spain there is a group called the " Spiritual Telephonic 
Net." One section of it is at Mahon (on the island of Minorca), 
and the other at Barcelona (on the coast of the mainland, about 
140 miles distant), and the expectations are that what Allan 
Kardec predicted in his " Book of Mediums/' will be realized. 



TELEPATHY. 

In presenting to my readers the portrait of Professor Robert 
A. Campbell, I desire to acknowledge my indebtedness to him 
for this excellent article on Telepathy, and also for much prac- 
tical assistance in putting this work through the press. Pro- 
fessor Campbell is an earnest, indefatigable and practical inves- 
tigator who has devoted the best portion of a persistently indus- 
trious life to the study of humanity; or as he himself puts it: 
"My studies are altogether concerning man's origin, nature, 
improvement and destiny; with especial reference to the theo- 
retical and practical means of man's betterment — physically* 
mentally and morally — here and now." 

There is probably no one who has given telepathy a more 
critical, exhaustive and practical study than Professor Camp- 
bell ; and he kindly furnishes the following as his conclusions in 
regard to the subject : 

" Telepathy is comparatively a new word — at least in the 
sense in which it is now frequently used. By telepathy in this 
paper I mean the influence which one person, by his will or 



173 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

mental suggestion and without any material media of communi- 
cation, may exert over another at a distance. 

" The French Academy of Medicine appointed a committee 
on mesmerism to make a thorough examination of the subject. 
This committee gave the subject their careful attention for a 
period of five years, and made an exhaustive report in 1S31. 
The fifteenth section of that report was as follows : 

" l When a person has once put another into what is called a 
magnetic sleep, he need not always have recourse to passes or 
personal contact to magnetize the subject again. The look of 
the magnetizer, his will even, without the look, may exert the 
same influence upon the subject. This influence is also at times 
effective when the subject is entirely ignorant of the will of the 
operator, and even when they are at a considerable distance 
apart, in different rooms with closed doors between them.' 

" The absolute truth of this statement has been abundantly 
verified time and again by scores of the most careful and relia- 
ble operators. Still it is no uncommon thing to hear seemingly 
intelligent and honest gentlemen — even those who claim to be 
scientists and students — sneeringly denounce mesmerism as a 
fraud or delusion, and superciliously allude to mesmeric opera- 
tors and subjects as being either charlatans or fools, or a mix- 
ture of both. It is enough here to say that no one who has 
fairly examined the subject has any doubt about the truth of the 
above statement, made more than sixty years since to the French 
Academy of Medicine. 

"Mesmerists — that is those who believe in a specific vital 
entity or influence, emanating from the operator, passing to the 
subject and acting upon the subject — offer no solution, or even 
suggestive solution of this influence of the operator's will, at a 
distance from the subject, when the latter is ignorant of the 
operator's intent. The hypnotists — that is those who claim 
that the operator simply uses mechanical means to induce trance 
— which they assert is a purely subjective proceeding — are 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 1 73 

equally unable to offer any plausible explanation of the admitted 
facts as above stated. 

" Those who follow Sunderland and his theory of sugges- 
tion — that is that the operator simply calls up in the mind of 
the subject the idea of being controlled, and then suggests the 
idea of certain thoughts and the consequent acts — call this telep- 
athic influence suggestio7i at a distance; but they offer no 
explanation as to how or why this suggestion is made effective. 

" F. W. H. Myers, the great London psychologist and secre- 
tary of the London Society for Psychical Research, says in an 
essay on this subject, read before that learned and well 
known society, and published in number ten of their proceed- 
ings of October, 1886: 

" c In my own view, no complete solution of the problem is 
possible. We are entirely ignorant of the nature of the force 
which may be supposed to be operated in the production of 
telepathic phenomena — to impel or facilitate the passage of 
thought or sensations from one mind to another without the 
intervention of the recognized organs of sense.' 

"Now, this seems very discouraging to one who desires a 
solution to this wonderful problem. Of course, there are scores 
and hundreds of self-assertively wise operators who have given 
this vast field of investigation a passing attention, who c can 
make the whole thing as clear as mud ' by their complete and 
complex theories; but no man of learning, who has given the 
matter serious study and extended examination, pretends to 
offer more than a merely suggestive and unsatisfactory expla- 
nation. 

"But we can admit the facts, and duplicate the phenomena 
without knowing the reason, the essential cause, or the special 
force that is involved in this class of results. We must have a 
greater array of facts, and a broader experience which shall 
employ more and different operators, as well as a wider range 
of subjects, before we need expect to understand thoroughly 



J 74 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

the modes of these operations — -much less the special force em- 
ployed. 

" To illustrate : Very few people in this community will 
question the fact that messages are sent from one city to another 
by means of telegraph. How many of those who read such 
messages or receive them are familiar with the material neces- 
sities of the telegraph line and the telegraph office ? How many 
are familiar with the mode of transmitting a communica- 
tion over the wires? How few ever realize that thoughts are 
never transmitted by telegraph ? The operator need not, and in 
fact does not usually take any note of the thoughts in the mes- 
sage. He simply translates the letters of the communication 
into dots and dashes. He simply opens and closes the current, 
that is, he presses on the key a certain time to suggest a 
dash to the operator at the other end of the line, and half as 
long to suggest a dot. He removes his pressure from the key 
a certain time between the dots and dashes that suggest a letter, 
for a longer time between the combinations that suggest a 
word, and for a still longer time between the end of one sen- 
tence and the beginning of the next. So thoughts are not 
transmitted by telegraph — only mechanical impulses. Nor, is 
it at all necessary that the expert operator understand the 
theory — or any theory — of electricity. The mode of operation is 
all he needs to know to be an operator. More than this, it is 
not necessary for any one to understand the nature of electricity 
in order to successfully build and operate a telegraph line — or 
any other electrical apparatus. All that needs to be known is 
the mode and conditions of its operation. 

" In fact no one knows the essential force or nature of elec- 
tricity, but only some of its conditions of action, and some of its* 
effects. The theory that electricity is a Jltiid that passes along- 
the conductors one way, or both ways, simultaneously, is affirmed 
and denied by equally honest and equally intelligent men, who 
have abundant practical experience in the laboratory and in the 
industrial application of this unknown force. 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 175 

" The undulatory or vibratory theory of impact from one 
atom or molecule, to its next neighbor, along the line of the con- 
ductor from operator to receiver, is equally asserted and denied 
as the fluidic theory. 

a But this lack of knowledge as to the real nature, and as to 
the essential method of electricity, does not, in the least degree, 
suggest that we should deny the phenomena of electricity; or 
that we may repudiate the mechanical conditions and practical 
methods. 

" Now if we accept the facts of electrical phenomena, and util- 
ize their practical results and mechanisms, without knowing all 
the reasons for these special appliances — except that they have 
been found effective — why should we deny the facts of telepa- 
thy ? And why should we demand a satisfactory and full the- 
ory and explanation of the newer and higher, while we accept 
and use the lower and older without any such satisfactory solu- 
tion ? 

" How many centuries since the clasp of the hands have intu- 
itively bound lovers in the bonds of affection? How long since 
a glance from one pair of eyes meeting recognition in another 
pair of eyes have aroused a latent affection to bless two lives ? 
How long since the impulsive meeting of masculine and femi- 
nine lips have aroused hitherto unknown passion, devotion and 
bliss? How often the peculiar accent of a word — often used 
before — has revealed and aroused an enthusiastic confidence? 
How often a gesture of the hand, a glance of the eye, a blush- 
ing or paling of the cheek, have established or utterly destroyed 
the bond between two hearts? How often even the marks of a 
pen on a sheet of paper have blessed or blighted the fondest 
hopes? 

" And who has denied these occult effects ? And who has 
explained hozv or why such things result from such causes? 

" But more than all these, how often the face of a dear one 
in a vision, or a dream — but still more real in the waking and con- 



Ij6 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

scious life — has appeared to announce the love, the welfare, or, 
mayhap, the death of the body — and thus the spiritual birth — of 
the loved one? Nay, how often the feeling of the impalpable 
and un visual presence of such a friend has set at rest the anxiety 
or aroused the apprehension of the sensitive? 

" How many question these last phenomena because they 
never experienced them ; not knowing that on the same ground 
the unloving may question pure affection ; and the blind also 
question light ; and the deaf question music, and the leper ques- 
tion touch? 

"And who among the blessed and favored throng, who 
from sweet experience, or anguishing revelation, know the truth 
of these spiritual companionships, or who among those who 
believe in them without such illuminated testimony; and who, 
I ask, has offered any mechanical or material or reasonable ex- 
planation of these heavenly experiences? 

" Telepathy, as it is now called, is simply the name for such 
experiences as the above, which are now becoming more com- 
mon — that is more general — than formerly. 

" The higher attainments of the exceptional few in any age, 
is only the prophecy of what will, in some succeeding age, be 
the general attainment of the fairly average human being. 

" The verbal suggestion of the operator on the sensitive 
subject has long been acknowledged. The self-suggestion of 
the subject is nearly as well acknowledged. How this operates 
is still an unsolved mystery. Why some can effectually suggest 
and others cannot; why some will be influenced by the sugges- 
tion and others not, is plausibly explained by a dominant or 
weak will, a sensitive or non=sensitive organization, all of which 
are convenient terms for artistically veiling our real ignorance. 
" Mental suggestion by the operator on the subject when in 
each other's presence, is freely acknowledged by all who have 
given the subject careful attention. 



HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 177 

" That some operators who are successful in verbal sugges- 
tion are not so in merely mental suggestion, or that some sub- 
jects are more readily responsive to such mental suggestion, no 
more impairs the facts of its occurrence than the parallel facts, 
that some are better subjects and some are better operators than 
others. 

" And the fact that purely mental suggestion has any influence 
whatever, takes the matter out of the domain of mechanism and 
outside of the ordinary channels of sensual communication, and 
into the realm of mind acting on mind, by means other than 
those recognized by the sensualist or the materialist. 

"Those who deny the fact of such mental suggestion — the 
operator and subject being in each other's visual presence, or 
near each other but not looking at each other, or neither look- 
ing at the other — cannot be convinced by anything I can say — 
they simply need to examine the subject. Then if such deniers 
have any faith in human intelligence and integrity they may be 
convinced. If they have no faith in any experience which they 
cannot duplicate, then the probability is they cannot be satisfied. 

"Now operators are not all equally effective, and are not 
always equally so. The same is true of subjects. The simple 
facts, however, are that some operators can and do influence 
some subjects at a distance ; and this is not explained on any 
known sensual basis. As soon as this is admitted, then the 
question of distance — a yard or a rod, a furlong or a mile, a 
mile or a thousand miles, is not a question of theory, but of fact. 

"And the facts are that persons who are not operator and 
subject, in any such sense as those names are used in mesmeric 
and hypnotic connections, can and do, at will, communicate 
intelligently with each other telepathically. 

" Now, this is not saying that they can at any time, and un- 
der all circumstances, communicate; nor that their communica- 
tions are full and entirely satisfactory. They do, however, at 
pre-arranged times, convey and receive consciously well-defined. 



I78 HYPNOTIC MISCELLANIES. 

intelligent and useful communications. There are, too, certain 



persons — not a great many, however — who can, whenever it is 
desired, call certain other persons' attention, telepathically. 
This is frequently done. 

" Now, all this is not abnormal, in the sense of being con- 
trary to health, intelligence or purity. It may be called super- 
normal, in the sense of being unusual. It is abnormal or un- 
natural only in the same sense that the ripe, mellow, toothsome 
apple is abnormal or unnatural as compared with the seedling 
or crab-apple. Telepathy may have an imperfect and uncertain 
illustration — by way of exception — in a nervous, hysterical or 
sickly super-sensitive ; but fairly reliable and fairly satisfactory 
results in this line can be experienced only by one who is in bound- 
ing health, organically and functionally, in mental harmony and 
intellectual clearness, and in the line of practical good will, and 
the consequent state of moral improvement. 

" The subject of telepathy, which properly embraces all 
methods of thought transference which does not mainly employ 
the usual mechanical means and the usual appeal to the senses, 
is comparatively a new study which promises great rewards to 
the patient and successful student. 

"I simply desire in closing to say that those who deny the 
possibility or fact of such phenomena as those referred to above 
are in good company with those who attempt to explain 
the phenomena by using such cheap and undefined terms as un- 
conscious cerebration, coincidence, muscle reading, hallucination, 
insanity, deception, dreams, delusion, imaginative projection, 
sympathetic ideal-realization, etc. It is just as scientific 
and consistent to apply these terms to the phenomena of chem- 
istry, steam and electricity as to those of telepathy." 



CHAPTER XL 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP=WALKING. 

This interesting and perplexing condition, known from the 
olden times, into which numerous people of all ages, but gener- 
ally young persons during seemingly normal sleep, are trans- 
ferred (often without themselves ever being aware of it), is, 
even to-day, an unsolved riddle. We have no certain informa- 
tion which throws any satisfactory light upon the source and 
appearance of this mystic state. I was myself for a couple of 
years, during my boyhood, frequently under somnambulistic 
influence. I have been since this condition ceased to appear 
with me, an earnest and constant investigator of this phenome- 
non. I have studied, not only my own case, but everything I 
could find having connection with this matter. It was in the 
commencement of my twelfth year that I experienced the first 
symptoms of this condition. Afterwards it returned frequently, 
though with monthly intervals. According to the statement 
rendered by my nearest relatives, the somnambulistic state into 
which I went, appeared in the following way : Immediately after 
my going to bed (as usual by 10) I fell into a very sound and 
deep sleep, during which I would remain in the same position and 
perfectly quiet. From one to two hours it was only with dif- 
ficulty that the sound of my breathing could be detected. Then 
all of a sudden my calm and restful appearance would be dis- 
turbed. I started to turn about in the bed, from one side to 
another, and I began to murmur — at first some undistinguishable 
sentences. Then I grew more eager and excited. I spoke 
louder, until at last every word could be clearly understood. 
By this time generally I would slowly raise my head from the 

179 



l8o NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 




A SLEEP-WALKER. 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. l8l 

pillow, until I sat up in the bed. Thus I would remain seated 
for a few minutes, looking around me with the eyelids partially 
closed, half bewildered, half surprised. Then, suddenly, as the 
result of some firmly taken decision, I jumped out of bed and 
without awaking kept myself at the very place a few moments 
as if recollecting or planning something, which as soon as ac- 
cepted I transferred into action. In general, the first thing I 
undertook was to remove an easy-chair which usually was 
placed in a corner of the sleeping room. In a very slow but 
careful manner I wheeled it across the floor toward an oak 
writing table at which my school books were placed. When 
this was done I, with a certain dignity, took a seat in the chair, 
and, opening my books, commenced eagerly and interestingly 
to peruse all my lessons for the next school day. After having 
spent half an hour to an hour in this way I replaced the 
chair in its former position and went to bed. The next day I 
had not the slightest recollection of my nightly undertakings. 
Usually a night lamp was burning in the sleeping room, yield- 
ing a little light for my reading; but occasionally when the 
lamp was not there and the room then was involved in com- 
plete darkness, I read, apparently, with as much ease as in the 
light. My brother, who was sleeping in the same room, was 
often awakened by the noise that I caused, and observed that 
my eyes were either closed tight or, what was more fre- 
quently the case, half opened. It is of interest to remark how 
greatly developed was my intellectual ability during the sleep, 
which I will state in the following example : 

At the school I had a great desire to create admiration among 
my school-mates by writing poetry, in accomplishment of which I 
earnestly admit that I failed entirely. The outcome of my great 
endeavors was always unmistakably poor. The rhymes, at which 
I arrived only through great patience and persistence, were mean- 
ingless — the whole poem being absurd when finished. Here is 
where the point coires in. I have, during my somnambulistic 



l82 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

condition produced poetry which, as far as concerns thought, 
style, rhyme and elegance, can be termed comparatively good 
poetry, even exposed to the critic of our modern time. I have 
often while asleep surprised those present by repeating English 
or French sentences, which languages I at the time spoken of 
did not study. The solution of the riddle is this: One night I 
had with remarkable exactness repeated a lesson which had 
given my brother a good deal of trouble to master, and as I had 
heard him go over this during the day time, I promptly repeated 
it during my unconscious state. I did this not only with gram- 
matical correctness, but with a true imitation of my brother's 
voice and attitudes. As a matter of fact, I generally recited 
some fragments without connection ; but in this special case I 
certainly must have followed his preparatory exercises with a 
great attention, as I had not only with perfection acquired my 
brother's way of pronounciation, but accompanied my repetition 
of the lesson with a certain attitude of the left hand which was 
identical with a characteristic movement of his hand whenever 
speaking or reciting. This caused my brother so much amuse- 
ment that he by loudly applauding forced me to wake. At 
other times I sprang out of bed so quickly that striking the 
floor hard with my feet caused me to awake. Hence my usual 
work was not performed, and in a kind of surprise I crawled 
once more into bed, resuming in a short while my natural sleep. 
Even during my natural sleep I often spoke and readily 
answered all questions directed to me, especially when the per- 
son with whom I was speaking did not address me too loudly, 
and closely followed the direction of my thoughts 

If he in some way attempted to change the subject of con- 
versation I would wake. Another interesting occurence was 
this : One night my brother woke up during a very clamorous 
speech of mine, in which I with threatening gestures declared 
that I was going to give two of my school-mates a regular 
licking, because they had hurt my partiality of good feeling 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 183 

and kindness toward animals. Not only had they teased our 
dog and thrown stones at it, but furthermore plundered a bird's 
nest, which I had preserved for a long time with the utmost 
care. I have always had an extreme fondness for animals, and 
never could bear to see anybody commit the slightest cruelty 
upon them without reproaching the abuser for his ill conduct, 
and in some cases giving him a severe bodily punishment to 
revenge my little friend. Evidently I had the previous day 
been irritated to see my fondness for this dog offended by the 
boys. I therefore vowed, on the occasion, to treat them accord- 
ing to their behavior as soon as the opportunity appeared. 
This intention of mine had occupied my last thought immedi- 
ately before going to bed. My brother, who is a couple of years 
my senior, spoke to me, and yielding as usual to my ideas, he 
inquired if it was not possible this time to forgive those boys, 
if they earnestly promised to do penance and be good in the 
future. "No," I replied eagerly, "this is not the first time 
these things have occurred and I am bound in this case to give 
them a square beating that may serve others as a warning 
example." 

My parents had without success applied several means by 
which to avert my nightly wanderings. Among other curious 
methods, they put a big tub with cold water beside my bed, so 
that when arising in my sonambulistic state I should jump into 
the water, and in this way be cured of my habit. But with 
great disappointment my parents saw me move down to the 
lower end of my bed and very carefully avoid stepping into 
the tub. This attempt proved altogether fruitless. The means 
from which I derived my cure was very remarkable. The 
main thing was that my brother as soon as I, during my sleep, 
became unrestful and commenced to speak loudly, acceded to 
all my ideas until I promptly and correctly answered all his 
questions. Then he in a cunning way managed to change the 
conversation into the direction of reminding me of my promise, 



l8& NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 




A SLEEP-WALKER CAREFULLY AVOIDING THE WATER-TUB 
PLACED AT HIS BEDSIDE. 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 185 

the day previous, according to which I was determined to com- 
pletely abandon my sleep walking. He emphasized that I, in 
this special case, would have to show great will power and 
energy. I promised this, and remained that night quietly sleep- 
ing in my bed. This method was continued during several 
successive nights with wonderful success. I remained in bed 
undisturbed. At the same time I drank every night a cup of 
elder tea, which is noted to have calming influence on the sleep. 
This advice was given to my parents by an old quack very 
widely known for the wonderful cures he performed. He further- 
more informed them that a talk with the sleeper in such case 
was necessary, and that if this, on account of unwillingness on 
the part of the sleeper, was not to be obtained, it was easily pro- 
duced by a slight pressure on the toe of the sleeper's left foot 
by the operator's first and second finger of the left hand. This 
was duly affirmed, as my brother successfully tried the experi- 
ment on me several times during the period of my recovery 
from the somnambulistic condition. 

I have myself merely for curiosity during my practice ap- 
plied this experiment, always with the permission of the party 
concerned. A very remarkable incident which I will not for- 
get to narrate is this : I was often seen standing asleep at the 
window, eagerly staring at the moon with a fixed interest, 
while I was in complete darkness with the shades all down. I 
was frequently observed standing motionless for a long time in 
the center of the room, with the head bent slightly backward as 
if beholding something — or with a close attention seeking a cer- 
tain object. It was proved later on that it was the moon which 
influenced me to a certain degree a least ; that I meant to see 
the moon is evident, although I was myself unconscious of the 
fact as well as ignorant of its position at the time of my Observa- 
tion, for mv eves were alwavs fixed in this direction of the 
firmament. In connection with this 1 will state that somnam- 
bulism usually appeared during the season of full-moon. I 



186 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

have thus briefly spoken of my boyhood experience as a som- 
nambulist, of which, in later years, I have found no sign of re- 
turning. I have done this, of course, with reservation and 
omittance of details from which no special interest could be 
derived. 

During my fifteen years of practice as a hypnotist, I have 
succeeded in completely curing several hundred individuals from 
this peculiar mental condition. The method of my treatment 
has been to produce artificial somnambulism — so-called "hyp- 
notism " — and by the aid of suggestion, cause the natural som- 
nambulism to disappear. It is not my intention — on this occa- 
tion — to proceed any further on the question, as I have in a 
preceding chapter on "hypnotism, somnambulism and sugges- 
tion" clearly expressed my views concerning this matter. 

That same old quack, who rendered the above mentioned 
advice, showed himself to be considerably ahead of his time, as 
he had an excellent understanding of the theory of " suggestion." 

THE DIFFERENT STATES OF SOMNAMBULISM AND THE 
PHENOMENA IN RELATION THERETO. 

As the reader will notice, we have several specimens of 
somnambulists among which to distinguish. I will name first 
the artificial somnambulists (hypnotized individuals). Persons, 
who according to their own will, through the hypnotizer's opera- 
tion are thrown into this peculiar condition, we call artificial 
somnambulists. The natural or spontaneous somnambulist is 
one who, without himself knowing it, and even against desire, 
is at times in a somnambulistic condition, by an influence un- 
known to us. Within this class of natural somnambulists come 
moon-sick, sleep-walkers and sleep-talkers ; these last are not as 
rare as is generally believed, because nearly all children of both 
sexes are during the period of sexual development found to be 
more or less somnambulistic. It is often in the season of full 
moon observed how people being in perfect health, suddenly 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 187 

during sleep, have arisen, spoken, sung or cried. They go out 
of bed and walk about the room, and the next morning when 
awake, they are completely ignorant of what has passed during 
the night. As we can regard somnambulism as a higher and 
stronger form of the hypnotic state, it seems strange that the 
highest degree of somnambulism is the waking sleep, with this 
kind of somnambulists appears immediately, while the develop- 
ment through artificial hypnotizing, without exception leads from 
the lower degrees upward, reaching at last the waking sleep. 
We can only explain these phenomena through this circumstance, 
that spontaneous somnambulism very seldom appears with in- 
dividuals when they are awake; but always at times when 
these are under influence of the normal sleep, and therefore the 
above named lower degrees of the hypnotic sleep or condition 
on account of the normal sleep do not manifest themselves in 
such a way that they can be made subjects for observation. 
For the evidence and correctness of this conjecture may be 
proven by addressing the sleepers in a low voice or by a fixed 
gaze when they will come into a state of clairvoyance, if they 
are in some degree disposed to somnambulism. Many such 
people cannot at all endure this direct gazing, but attempt in 
many ways to avoid it by turning the face away while the sleep 
is continued uninterrupted. It is very frequently the case that 
they after awakening will have a recollection of some dreams, 
during which a person stepped up to the bedside looking inten- 
sively at them or speaking with them. A recollection like this 
will never present itself after the normal sleep, neither will it 
do so after the higher states of somnambulism, but result after 
that condition only, which the lowest degree of hypnosis pro- 
duces on the individual. The exact influence that causes the 
development of somnambulism has never been thoroughly veri- 
fied, but we have good reason to believe that the moon plays an 
active part. At least several generally acknowledged facts speak 
to this effect, and it is certain that most cases of spontaneous 



l88 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 




DREAMING ABOUT THE MOON. 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 189 

somnambulism appear during full moon, and that sleepwalkers 
even if they be present in an absolutely dark room, where not 
the slightest moonlight could visit them, always seem to be 
quite sure of the position of the moon, as they constantly turn 
their faces toward this, and finally, that such persons always 
seek to avoid everything that prevents them staring at the moon, 
and appear anxious to shorten the distance between it and them- 
selves by ascending houses, towers, etc., and remaining there 
until the moon commences to go down. On account of this 
we can draw the conclusion that there is between the moon 
and the natural somnambulistic individual some relation — be it 
that the constant gaze at the moon to which especially young 
people are devoted, particularly women, has a kind of a hypno- 
tizing influence as has the eyes of the hypnotizer or the shining 
crystal-prism applied at hypnotic experiments. While younger 
I have often heard at my home in Denmark, a joke referring to 
the ladies sitting at the open window before going to bed, to 
look at the moon — that they need not trouble themselves as the 
moon had no male population. 

Our beloved Longfellow associates' the moon with senti- 
ment, sleep and dreams, as follows: 

Moon of the summer night! 

Far down yon western steep 
Sink, sink in silver light! 

She sleeps, my lady sleeps! 
Sleeps! 

Dreams of the summer night 

Tell her her lover keeps 
Watch while in slumbers light 

She sleeps, my lady sleeps! 
Sleeps! 

It is well known that particular positions of the moon in 
respect to the earth, are accompanied with marked effects upon 
somnambulists, cataleptics, and persons disposed to insanity (W. 
Fishbough); and it has from time immemorial been believed 



I90 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 




NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 



I 9 I 



uiat certain lunar positions have also a decided influence upon 
the vegetable and animal kingdoms. During eclipses of the 
sun, when the moon has been directly between that luminary 
and the earth, hungry animals have been observed to suddenly 
cease eating and become apparently sad and dejected ; and when 




IN ECSTACY BELIEVING THEMSELVES FLYING THROUGH THE 

AIR ON BROOMSTICKS AND HAVING COMMUNI- 
CATIONS WITH SATAN. 

eclipses have been total, birds have sometimes been known to 
fall dead from their perches. Now, neither of these effects can 
be supposed to result from any modification of the force of 
gravitation as owing to the relative positions in such cases of 



I92 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

the earth, moon and sun. But if we suppose, as above, that the 
earth and moon are enveloped in a common "odic" sphere of a 
nervoid and semi- vital character, and that in this change in its 
polar relations and consequent qualities of influence upon living 
organisms, with every change of relative position of the earth, 
moon and sun, we have an easy solution of the phenomena in 
question. The supposition of such a change of influence would 
seem to be countenanced by the results of Reichenbach's 
experiments. 

IDIO-SOMNAMBULISM. 

The wiiches of the middle ages, whom we must regard as 
entirely idio-somnambulistic persons, anointed their bodies 
with different kinds of salves, which contained narcotic elements; 
and they were by the alcoloid influence on the blood, or by phy- 
sical actions, thrown into a somnambulistic hypnotic condition. 

To Auto-Somnambulism belongs much that is usually called 
evil spells and diabolism ; and the Voudooism of the Africans, 
Kanakas and Southern negroes must be largely dependent 
upon earnest, though unrecognized self-suggestions, induced by 
mysterious rites and frenzied excitation. 

Goethe needs only this explanation to be fully understood in 
the following from Faust : 

Chorus of Witches: 

"The stubble is yellow, the corn is green, 
Now to the Brocken the witches go, 
The nightly multitude here may be seen 

Gathering, wizard and witch, below. 
Sir Urian is sitting aloft in the air; 

Hey over stock! and hey over stone! 
'Twixt witches and incubi, what shall be done? 
Tell it who dare! tell it who dare! 



A voice. 



Upon a sow-swine, whose farrows were nine, 
Old Baubo rideth alone. 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 



>93 



Chorus : 

Honor her to whom honor is due: 

Old Mother Baubo, honor to you! 
An able sow with old Baubo upon her, 

Is worthy of glory, and worthy of honor! 
The legion of witches is coming behind, 

Dark'ning the night, and outspeeding the wind. 

A voice: 

Which way comest thou? 

A voice: 

Over Ilsenstein. 
The owl was awake in the white moonshine: 

I saw her at rest in her downy nest, 
And she stared at me with her broad, bright eye. 





Voices. 



And you may now as well take your course on to hell f 
Since you ride by so fast on the headlong blast. 

A voice: 

She dropped poison upon me as I passed. 
Here are the wounds 

Chorus of witches: 

Come away! come along! 

The way is wide, the way is long, 

But what is that for a bedlam throng? 
Stick with the prong, and scratch with the broom; 

The child in the cradle lies strangled at home, 
And the mother is clapping her hands. 



94 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP- WALKING 

Semi-chorus wizards I: 

We glide in 
Like snails, when the women are all away; 
And from a house once given over to sin 
Women has a thousand steps to stray. 

Semi-chorus II: 

A thousand steps must a woman take, 

When a man but a single spring will make. 

Voices above : 

Come with us, come with us, from Felunsee. 





Voices below: 

With Avhat joy would we fly through the upper sky! 
We are washed, we are 'nointed, stark naked are we; 
But our toil and our pain are forever in vain. 

Both choruses: 

The wind is still, the stars are fled, 

The melancholy moon is dead, 
The magic notes, like spark on spark, 
Drizzle, whistling through the dark. 
Come away! 
Voices below : 

Stay, O, stay ! 
Voices above: 

Out of the crannies of the rocks 
Who calls? 

Voice below: 

O, let me join your flocks! 
I three hundred years have striven 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. I95 

To catch jour skirt and mount to heaven 
With company akin to me! 

Both choruses: 

Some on a ram and some on a prong, 

On poles and on broomsticks, we flutter along; 
Forlorn is the wight who can rise not to-night. 

A half -witch below : 

I have been tripping this many an hour; 

Are the others already so far before? 
No quiet at home, and no peace abroad! 

And less, methinks, is found by the road. 

Chorus of witches: 

Come onward away! anoint thee, anoint! 

A witch, to be strong, must anoint — anoint, — 
Then every bough will be boat enough, 

With a rag for a sail we can sweep through the sky. 
Who flies not to-night, when means he to fly? 

Both choruses: 

We cling to the skirt, and we strike on the ground; 

Witch-legions thicken around and around; 
Wizard-swarms cover the heath all over." 

[They descend^ 

When we trace history back to the olden times, and 
draw the remains from the past ages out of their obscurity, we 
encounter several thing's, which for the sake of their curiosity, 
put Egypt, Lybia, Greece and ancient Rome into consterna- 
tion, and likewise has arrested the attention of later centuries. 
In this way has been established among the public as eternal 
truths which, with a sacred esteem, regarded oracles — sages of 
a Delphian Apollo — a dodonish Jupiter, a Trophonius from 
Boeotia and different other sibyllis. Pythia sitting on a tripod 
outside the Delphian cavern was driven into an agitated ec- 
stasy by the mephitic vapors arising from the tripod. This 
was but a plain magnetic condition created by the priests (who 
were well versed in the medical profession), either by inhalation 



:q6 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

of vapors or incenses, by certain manipulations performed by 
the priests, or by bodily exercises in connection with several 
drugs for internal use, so-called charmed potions, or by rubbing 
the body with narcotic salves. The ecstasy produced in this way 
had different aspects. Sometimes the person was very weak, 
almost unconscious, at other times very noisy, and acted with 
the greatest vehemence. During this last condition the priest- 
ess rushed in a circle around the fuming tripod, her mouth 
foaming, tearing her hair and flesh, showing in all her attitudes 
insanity and rage. 

THE ORACLE IN THE DELPHIAN CAVERN. THE DIFFERENT 

PREPARATIONS USED PARTLY FROM AN ANCIENT AUTHOR. 

Great preparations were made for giving mysteriousness to 
the oracle, and for commanding the respect paid to it." Among 
other circumstances relating to the sacrifices that were offered, 
we may observe that the priestess herself fasted three days, and 
before she ascended the tripod she bathed herself in the foun- 
tain of Castalia. She drank water from that fountain and 
chewed laurel leaves gathered near it. She was led into the 
sanctuary by the priests, who placed her upon the tripod. . As soon 
as she began to be agitated by the divine exhalations, her hair 
stood on end, her aspect became wild and ghostly, her mouth 
began to foam, and her whole body was suddenly seized with 
violent tremblings. In this condition she attempted to escape 
from the prophets, who detained her by force, while her shrieks 
and howlings made the whole cavern resound, and filled the 
bystanders with sacred horror. At length, unable to resist the 
impulse of the god, she surrendered herself to him, and at cer- 
tain intervals uttered from the bottom of her stomach some 
unconnected words, which the prophets arranged in order, and 
put in form of verse — giving them a connection which they had 
not when they were delivered by the priestess. " The oracle 
being pronounced, she was taken off the tripod, and conducted 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. , 



91 




P VXHIA, THE D EL P „IA N ORACLE, SEAXEI, ON THE TRIPOD 
OVER THE SACRED CAVERN. 



I98 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

back to her cell, where she continued several days to recover 
herself from her conflict." 

Such effects were in those times considered necessary, par- 
ticularly so in the case of the priestess. It was of the greatest 
importance to give a mysterious appearance to the oracle, for 
the purpose of commanding feeling and respect from the " by- 
standers with sacred horror." 

NITROUS OXIDE THE EFFECTS OF ITS INHALATION. 

Coretus who it is said first discovered nitrous oxide's effects 
upon goats speaks thus : Prompted by curiosity he also ap- 
proached the mouth of the cavern, and found himself seized 
with a like fit of madness " skipping, dancing, foretelling 
things to come." But as we have no evidence upon which we 
can depend, this skipping, etc., being natural to goats and not 
agreeing with its effects upon the priestess, we may think of it 
as we would of all other things that have been said about it, of 
which the following is a specimen : " This place," speaking of 
the cavern, " was treated with a singular veneration, and it was 
soon covered with a kind of chapel, which Pausanius tells us 
was originally made of laurel boughs, and resembled a large 
hut. This, says the Phalian tradition, was surrounded by one 
of wax, and raised by the bees." 

THE DIFFERENT STATES OR DEGREES OF SOMNAMBULISM 
IN CONNECTION WITH THOSE OF THE NATURAL SLEEP. 

So far my investigations have shown that we can with the 
same authority divide these in the following way: Human life 
undergoes a process of development and falls into three chief 
periods before it reaches its degree of culmination; and we ob- 
serve in the awake condition of man a gradually ascending 
development from morning until noon, and later toward even- 
ing a descending, resulting at last in sleep. In the same way 
the nightly condition has a gradual development of a similar 
character. One and the same typical law rules not only the 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. I99 

development of human life in general, but also rules man's con- 
dition when awake and the nightly state of the somnambulist. 

From the special degrees I will name the following : 

The animal degree. — The somnambulism entering and act- 
ing on the animal system. 

The sensitive degree. — Somnambulism entering and acting 
on the sensitive system. 

The culmination of som?iambulism — complete night condi- 
tion. — The deepest sleep about midnight. 

The crisis — The change from night into day condition. 

The final fart of somnambulism — awaking. 

The vegetative system. — The phenomena are noted upon 
entrance of the day condition. 

Complete day condition — awaking. 

In order to return to the different kinds of somnambulism 
I will state, that besides spontaneous somnambulism, idio- 
somnambulism and artificial somnambulism, I have observed 
another class of somnambulists, namely : hysteric and epileptic 
somnambulists, who, during certain periods, from one or an- 
other bodily or spiritual cause, came under the influence of nat- 
ural somnambulism. It is not only in the night-time during the 
natural sleep that these individuals relapse into this condition ; 
but even in the day-time they may be met in somnambulistic 
states, in which they may continue days, weeks, months — even 
years — without giving their associates the least suspicion thereof. 

I have heard and read much of such strange cases. I have 
even met with a few, which I have studied with the greatest in- 
terest. It is remarkable that in general it is persons with dark 
complexion and a rich growth of hair, but with little beard, and 
people of pale and fair complexion, with the pupils of the eyes 
very dilated, who come under this condition. We can be con- 
vinced as to their condition by holding a lighted match close to 
the eyes of these persons ; we will then, as in certain degrees 
of the hypnosis, note only a slight contraction of the pupil. 



200 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

These somnambulists usually sleep with open eyes, resting on 
their back ; and they snore much. This often leaves a disa- 
greeable impression upon the stranger who happens to witness 
it for the first time. The pupils are unnaturally dilated, and the 
eyelids wide open. No winking or nervous drawing together, 
or movements of the eyelids, betray that the person is alive. 
The expression of the eye is that of the death-stare. Like the 
somnambulistic attacks of these last somnambulists their actions 
during the sleep are uncalculable. We must recollect that we 
have to do here with a special suffering; and in many cases we 
must consider severely attacked hysterics and epileptics as a 
mild form of insanity. We; also know how honestly and ami- 
ably they will naturally act ; and that they at other times are so 
unexpectedly irritable and distrustful — and also easily influenced, 
or exhibit even stranger character. Unfortunately when they fall 
in line with bad associates, they have no power of resistance. 
Just as uncalculable as they are when awake, so they are during 
the somnambulistic condition. As a rule dreams in the night- 
time are of those objects on which thought is most bent during 
the day. If persons during sleep speak loudly, we may be sure 
it is of matters which, during the daytime, puzzled their minds. 
If a person is a sleep-walker, he performs while asleep actions 
similar to those which occupies him in the daytime. We can, 
therefore, with perfect right, in general, proceed from this fact, 
that a person who during sleep makes an assault on somebody's 
life, thereby signifies and reveals the secret thoughts of his day- 
life. This is generally the case with apparently strong and 
healthy persons as far as the body and soul are concerned, whom 
we do not suspect as suffering from advancing insanity, hys- 
teria or epilepsy. With persons suffering from these mental 
disorders we could very soon, during their sleep, become aware 
of things which would stamp them very badly, if we believed 
everything said or done by them during their sleep, to be a sig- 
nification of their true character. Such sufferers could by no 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 201 




SOMNAMBULIST PLAYING WHILE ASLEEP. 



202 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

means be held responsible for their actions whether in awake or 
sleeping condition. We all know about the silly ideas they are 
yielding to ; they are easily scared, even when dreaming ; they 
become confused ; their thoughts are deranged ; they scream 
aloud during their sleep, and believe themselves attacked by 
wild beasts or horrible monsters. Contrary to this, the normal 
sleep-walker goes about carefully, in pleasant dreams and 
seems to throw an air of scientific interest into the task he per- 
forms. During this condition his intellect and sense is consider- 
ably increased ; while on the contrary it is removed to a far 
lower step with the other kind of somnambulists during the nor- 
mal sleep. It is, therefore, natural that a person who has com- 
mitted some bad action during his sleep, can not be altogether 
excused as he has, what numerous observations clearly show, 
only brought into action that which occupied his mindthe pre- 
vious day. The individual whose thoughts and conduct are 
conscienciously in conformity with the laws of society will not 
act against these laws while asleep. On the contrary, that per- 
son who only thinks of crime or revenge, will reveal during his 
sleep all his evil inclinations, which he, in awake condition, was 
forced to keep back — considering the surroundings, (In the 
same way will the drunkard, in almost every case, during his 
intoxication, show his real character; his cautiousness is aban- 
doned.) If a person commits a crime while asleep and the rec- 
ord of his past life causes suspicion, then it seems to me we can 
in most cases consider this crime a natural result of his bad char- 
acter, and we may be so much more at liberty in doing so as it 
is committed without any restraining power or influence. Be- 
ing far from considering these actions resulting from fantastic 
ravings, I will place them among the most independent in hu- 
man life. I am viewing somnambulism as it is in general, a 
higher, ennobling condition, with a refinement of feeling and 
character. The composer creates better music while asleep. 
The good person is through all his actions equally good, even 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING, 



203 



better, while asleep than he is when awake. This is particularly 
proven by what we know has been accomplished by men of 
prominence during their sleep. As I have formerly remarked 
these cases do not refer to the hypnotic or epileptic somnambu- 
list or others, whose mental balance is disturbed, whether this 
be due to the suffering of periodical insanity with hallucinations 
or to the ghastly nightmare. 




SOMNAMBULIST A JUDGE TRIES A CASE WHILE ASLEEP 



To illustrate these conclusions of mine, I will give the fol- 
lowing examples : 

It has frequently happened that studious men have done 
really hard mental work while asleep. A stanza of excellent 
verse is in print which Sir John Herschell is said to have com- 
posed while asleep, and to have remembered when he awoke. 
Goethe often set down on paper the day thoughts and ideas 



204 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

which had presented themselves to him during the preceding 
night. A gentleman one night dreamt that he was playing an 
entirely new game of cards with three friends. When he 
awoke, the structure and rules of the new game, as created in 
the dream, came one by one into his memory, and he found 
them so ingenious that he afterwards frequently played the game. 
A case is cited where a gentleman in his sleep composed an ode 
in six stanzas, and set it to music. Tartini, the celebrated 
Italian vocalist, composed the " Devil's Sonata," in a dream. 
Lord Thurlow, when a youth at college, found himself one 
evening unable to finish a piece of Latin composition which he 
had undertaken. He went to bed full of the subject, fell asleep, 
finished his composition in a dream, remembered it next morn- 
ing, and was complimented on the felicitous form which it 
presented. A remarkable case is given by Weinholt. A musi- 
cal student was in the habit of rising in the middle of the night, 
and going to the piano, would arrange his music and sit down 
and play correctly the piece before him. As showing the acute 
intelligence which existed in him during this sleeping state, 
some of his fellow students one night watched him, and sud- 
denly turned the music upside down. The sleeper, however, 
detected it, quietly restored the sheet to its proper position, and 
went on playing. On another occasion, one of the strings of 
the instrument being out of tune, the discordant note so jarred 
upon his sensibilities that he stopped playing, took down the 
front of the piano and tuned the offending string before con- 
tinuing his practice. Another student was accustomed to trans- 
late passages from Italian into French during his sleep. He 
used a dictionary and was most assiduous and correct in his 
search after the words needed. Touching the sense of sight, 
which is brought into play during such sleep efforts, a remark- 
able case is recorded of a young lady, who would rise from her 
bed and write intelligently and legibly in complete darkness. 
The most curious feature in connection with her efforts, was 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 205 

that if the least light was admitted into her room, she was 
unable to continue. A ray from the moon, passing in at her 
window, was sufficient to disturb her. She could only continue 
as long as she was enveloped in perfect darkness. Not content 
with doing their duty throughout the day, and when they are 
awake, there seems to be some people who are not satisfied 
unless they keep themselves employed while they are asleep. 
Not infrequently individuals have projected and carried to a 
successful issue, projects which they were quite incapable of 
attempting when awake. No doubt because they couldn't even 
if they wished to, dream of doing them unless asleep. 

THE INFLUENCE OF MUSIC ON THE SOMNAMBULIST. AS A PROOF 
OF THIS I WILL STATE A VERY INTERESTING EXPERIMENT. 

In the first place I will remind the reader of the great influ- 
ence of music on every human being. If we hear the resonant 
ball music, we will naturally undertake certain movements in 
close connection with the character and tempo of the piece 
played. Similarly the military band, when playing a national 
air, will animate and enrapture the people. In the same way 
will the funeral march relax the muscles, make the walk slower 
and the expression sad, while not to forget it depresses the tem- 
per. Recollecting this, I undertook during my stay in Alexan- 
dria (Egypt) seven years ago, an experiment with a natural 
somnambulist (sleep-walker). I was remaining about a month 
with a French family, Lamont by name; and it was with a son 
of the family that I carried out the following experiment: The 
person mentioned was not directly a sleep-walker, as he re- 
mained in bed throughout the entire night, but his sleep 
was restless, during which he always spoke. As I am a 
little musical, I had from several instruments selected an excel- 
lent mouth organ with very soft and melodious tones, on which, 
during the twilight hours, I would play some fragments of a 
noted composition, or at other times, simply fantasy productions, 



206 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

when I felt inspired to do so. It was very late on a very sultry 
summer evening, when, after playing for about an hour on the 
veranda, I left it to retire. I had not the slightest desire for 
sleep, so I took up a book to read awhile; but I was immedi- 
ately interrupted by hearing the young man loudly snore in the 
room adjoining mine. Still holding in my hand my 
little mouth organ, an idea inspired me. I walked into the 
room where he was sleeping, and after having placed myself 
languidly in a chair, I commeneed in a soft and faint way to 
play my instrument. After a lapse of some minutes I observed 
that he raised himself up in bed. He listened to my music with 
apparently great attention, and kept his body motionless. Even 
the usual snoring ceased ; and he drew his breath very faintly. 
In order to make a directly recognized impression, I played 
almost inaudibly, and as the music grew weaker and weaker he 
still more attentively bent himself toward me. Suddenly I 
ceased playing ; he was still sitting upright in the bed. After a 
short time he leaned himself quietly back and continued his 
sleep. Soon after this his usual snoring could again be distin- 
guished. The next day at the dinner table I narrated the oc- 
currence, which caused great amusement. My next experi- 
ment took place a week later, on a clear summer night about 
12 o'clock, with the same effect as above stated, though I noted 
some new and very interesting observations which I will relate: 
It was especially interesting to notice the different expres- 
sions of his face according to the variety of the tunes. While 
I played "Tycho Brahes' Farewell to Denmark," (the world's 
famous Danish astronomer) his aspect was a very serious one ; 
but when I changed it to "The Last Rose of Summer," his 
face was beaming with delight. His eyes were continually half 
opened, and I noticed a nervous motion of the eyelids such as 
we find in hypnotized individuals. He would wake if I sud- 
denly approached his face with my instrument and changed to 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 207 

a new tune, or when I played false, though in this case only 
when it was done with a certain force. 

The above mentioned experiment I have since tried upon 
several other persons, and in the majority of cases with success. 
At other times I have failed, either partly or perfectly. 

OTHER EXPERIMENTS. 

Another interesting experiment is to take a lighted candle 
in your left hand, and hold it as high as your face. Take posi- 
tion a few steps from the bed and somewhat bent forward, have 
your eyes and thoughts directed at the sleeper. Clench your 
right hand tightly*, and concentrate your thought to the effect 
that the sleeper shall leave his bed and follow you. This will 
occur if he is in some degree subject to somnambulistic influ- 
ences. The person will first become restless, try to lift his head 
from the pillow, and finally he will sit up in bed. If the opera- 
tor slowly moves from the bed, the sleeper will follow him, 
walking with him till he stops. You must carefully consider 
the direction you go so that no tables, chairs or any kind of 
furniture, are in the way of the sleeper, as otherwise he is very 
likely to stumble against some of them. It is of interest to 
notice the difference between this and the natural somnambu- 
lists who are spontaneously sleep-walkers. The latter will, as 
we know, seem to be very careful and see or feel everything in 
their path, and in this way avoid collision with any obstacle 
they meet; while the former kind of somnambulists are like 
the hypnotized mediums who will stumble against anything 
in their way, if the operator does not take proper care to pre- 
vent it. Of course this experiment is not to be commenced 
until the sleeper has been resting a couple of hours. No light 
should be in the room previous to this operation, during which 
you must proceed as quietly as possible. As soon as the sleeper 
begins to move, you must retire a little from the bed, steadily 
holding the candle in your outstretched left hand, while you 



208 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

slowly draw yourself backward you will signalize by motions 
of your head and right hand that the person is to follow you, 
The thought must all the time be concentrated upon the success 
of the experiment. The reader will bear in mind that he re- 
mains at the very same spot while experimenting, and avoid the 
least noise ; furthermore, he must not gaze too sharply at the 
sleeping person, when the experiment is about to succeed, as he 
might easily awake in consequence of the continued staring. 
The operator must, as a rule, look at the whole person or in the 
direction of his breast, while he slowly retreats from the bed. 
This experiment furnishes material for a line of still more re- 
markable experiments. That the operator's mind, concentration 
and eye power has a great influence on the sensitive sleeper, is 
a well known fact. The reader knows surely, of the common 
experiment by which one can force a person, walking or sitting 
in front of him, to turn around and look at him, by simply star- 
ing at the person's neck for a few minutes. While a mere 
youth this caused- me great amusement. Often when walking 
with my friends at the crowded thoroughfares of Copenhagen, 
I offered to bet them that within a given time I would make a 
certain party walking ahead of us to turn around. Who has 
not at the theater seen a night scene in which a burglar breaks 
in; how he in great fear will shyly look at the sleeping occu- 
pants, and then suddenly as if frightened, will withdraw his 
glance to look at everything else but the sleepers. The cause 
is that the burglar fears that by his look he may awaken them, 
while the noise he -will probably make in carrying out his inten- 
tions does not so much bother him, because his instinct more 
than his judgment tells him that he at any risk, must not gaze 
too often at the sleepers. In this way it is represented by a 
clever actor who is real and true in the conception of his role, 
and in every detail seeks to come up to that special part of the 
play in which he appears. This is not only represented at the 
theater; we see it also in real life upon the great stage of 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 2O9 

human life. We all know that a play to gain the proper effect 
must be a true and correct copy of nature. 

THE INSTINCT OF THE SOMNAMBULIST. 

The natural somnambulist will almost always see or antici- 
pate a danger, and as if by instinct avoid it. If the natural som- 
nambulist walks while asleep in dangerous places or on dizzy 
heights, he will generally return unhurt from his wanderings — 
if not suddenly awakened by some alarm or voice. In the city 
of Hamburg, about ten years ago, there occurred a very sensa- 
tional case, the details of which I will narrate. Upon a moon- 
light summer night as a gentleman hurried along the streets 
towards his home, he saw a person, apparently very thinly 
dressed, walking from one roof to another of the four-story 
buildings. He called the attention of some young merry fel- 
lows to what he saw; and in connection with them called very 
loudly to the person in order to attract his attention to the threat- 
ening danger to which he was exposed. By a wild roar in 
which they all united the person awakened, became dizzy and 
lost his balance. For a moment it looked as if death should in- 
evitably be the lot of the unfortunate one, and the party on the 
street understood how inconsiderately they had acted. But for- 
tunately — who understands the fate or the invisible hands of 
providence — the person fainted and remained upon the sloping 
roof where a nail caught his clothing. The combined efforts of 
those present with the help of the occupants of the house at 
last succeeded in bringing the sleep-walker into a place of safety. 
It was a young woman, who, disregarding the defects of her 
dress, had undertaken this night wandering. By a closer ex- 
amination it was found that her right arm was broken — thanks 
to the heedlessness of her apparent helpers. As we may un- 
derstand, not this young woman only, but generally the greater 
number of somnambulists, would escape unhurt from their 
nightly wanderings in dangerous places if no heedless specta- 



2IO NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

tors, by erroneous acting, as yelling or screaming, caused the 
sleepers to awaken too suddenly. 

In the other case, the catastrophe will undoubtedly present 
itself and the unfortunate will meet sure death, unless it hap- 
pens as in the above case, that providence interferes for a more 
fortunate result. Of course it is not the idea in such perilous 
cases to leave the somnambulist walking from one dangerous 
place to another. In such cases we must by a sensible and well 
considered method, in a quiet self-possessed manner, try to re- 
move the sleeper from the threatening danger. This will 
always result in success for that person who with good will at- 
tempts to perform his duty towards his fellow men whenever 
they are in danger. 

SOMNAMBULISM AND ITS PECULIARITIES. 

We are entitled to the admission that the moon exerts much 
influence upon the somnambulist. Why otherwise should he 
ascend the most perilous walls or scaffolds, if it is not with the 
intention of getting up as high as possible, to look at the moon. 
These somnambulists are as a rule women — rarely men — who 
never, while awake, would have strength enough to ascend such 
dangerous places, and who never before have attempted any- 
thing of the kind, or even for a moment stopped to consider the 
possibility of such an undertaking. This shows clearly that the 
claim made by several celebrated physicans that somnambulists 
could not ascend places or perform work which had not previ- 
ously occupied their minds is altogether an erroneous one. They 
state, as a proof, that during sleep it is the spine that directs us 
and does our thinking, and as a result, while we are asleep, 
fancy occupies itself with such things as we have previously 
thought of while awake ; furthermore, that the spine is the dom- 
inating control during our sleep, which guides us in an auto- 
matic way to perform such actions as we in daytime have 
received an impression of through our chief director, the brain. 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 211 

This all sounds very plausible, but it can only be accepted in 
very few cases. Such an one-sided, unreliable theory can not 
be in harmony with somnambulism in general. 

Somnambulism with all its varieties presents itself differ- 
ently. It is all dependent upon the class to which the person 
(the sleep-walker) belongs; and to the mental or bodily causes 
prevailing. 

I will mention here the remarkable somnambulistic perform- 
ance of a Detroit young lady. " One of the most remarkable 
exhibitions of somnambulism ever given in this city took place 
about one o'clock Saturday morning, near the corner of High 
and Sixth streets," says the Detroit Free jPress. " The princi- 
pal actor in the serio-comic drama was an eighteen-year old Miss, 
named Annie Barton, and she was first discovered by C. W. 
Hedges. He was on his way home, when his attention was at- 
tracted by a queer-looking object seated on the top of a grape- 
vine arbor just over the fence. Stopping, Mr. Hedges looked 
at the figure until he saw it move. Then he spoke to it ; but 
received no answer. At this juncture Captain C. C. Stark- 
weather, of the Turnbull Avenue Police Station, came along 
on Sixth street on his way home. He was stopped by Mr. 
Hedges, who pointed out the queer figure, and they were not 
long in doubt as to the nature of the apparition. ' It's a woman !' 
said Captain Starkweather, c and she must be asleep,' contin- 
ued Mr. Hedges- Arriving at that conclusion the men opened 
the gate, and, walking to the arbor, called the sleeping girl, but 
received no reply. Captain Starkweather began climbing up 
the arbor, at which the girl started on a lively run, and going 
the whole length of the arbor roof, made a jump — clearing a 
space of about eight feet — alighting on the roof of a wood- 
shed. This maneuver astonished men, who awakened Mr. 
Tompson and his family, and told them that there was a sleep- 
walker upon their wood-shed. Soon Mr. Tompson, his wife 
and son joined Mr. Hedges and the Captain in the chase. 



212 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

What was their surprise to find Miss Barton had clambered 
from the shed to the wing, and thence to the apex of the roof 
of the main building, where she stood leaning against the chim- 
ney. Finally a ladder was procured, and young Tompson 
climbed to the side of the roof, but getting there found it so 
covered with snow and ice that it was impossible for him to 
reach the girl. So down he came, and the ladder was carried 
to the front of the house, when it was put in position, with one 
end against the roof-peak. This time Captain Starkweather 
took off his boots and climbed up. The girl stood quietly until 
he was within a few feet of her, when she ran toward the wing, 
and sliding went from one roof to the other ; thence she jumped 
back to the grape-arbor, and before any of the men could get 
to her, she jumped to the ground ; and dashing through a back 
gate, ran up High street. The chase was then continued to 
the Crawford Street Park, where she was captured. Then it 
was found that she was completely dressed, with the exception 
of a hat and shawl, and that during all of her hazardous mid- 
night ramble she had not received the slighest injury. She was 
taken to the Turnbull Avenue Police Station until her relatives, 
being notified, put in their appearance and took, her in charge. 
Her friends say this is the second occasion of the kind in which 
Miss Barton has taken part." 

THE STRANGE EFFECTS OF SPONTANEOUS SOMNAMBULISM 
ON PECULIAR INDIVIDUALS. 

Spontaneous somnambulism happens very often — much 
more frequently than is generally supposed. A person awakens 
in the morning, and he is, in his thoughts and, in fact, in all 
respects, an entirely different person than his normal self — as he 
went to sleep the night before. Let us admit that the person, 
from the normal sleep, little by little, goes over into the som- 
nambulistic state. He awakes in the morning at the usual time 
without leaving the somnambidistic state. His thoughts will 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 213 

then only occupy him with those suggestions or ideas he re- 
ceived in the dreaming condition the night before. Besides 
going from the normal sleep over into the somnambulistic con- 
dition a person may also, while in the normal awake state, go 
over into this peculiar state of spontaneous somnambulism — even 
in the midst of the day. We have often heard of such cases, 
in which a person temporarily goes into the somnambulistic 
state and as suddenly imagines himself to be an entirely differ- 
ent person, and consequently he acts and thinks as another per- 
son. How often do we hear of persons who suddenly, without 
any reasonable cause, leave their homes or business. They 
disappear, for a longer or shorter time, from their circle of daily 
acquaintances, and later on someone finds them somewhere in 
the same city, or in an entirely strange place, wandering about 
aimlessly, seemingly without any purposes or ideas what to do. 
They appear awake, but they are confused and unable to ex- 
plain what they have done while absent. I will state only a few 
examples. Some time ago a well-known, honest, highly esteemed 
government officer disappeared, and a couple of weeks later he 
was found employed as a waiter in a fifth-class restaurant, situ- 
ated in an obscure part of the city. Another case : A very 
well- known and highly esteemed minister suddenly disappeared 
from his congregation and family. He was accidentally found 
many miles away, where he had opened a sfore — buying and 
selling second-hand clothes. He dealt with the persistence of 
an expert, like an experienced business man in this line. He 
went under another name, lived quietly and secluded from all 
other human beings, except in the line of business. As a busi- 
ness man he was just as honest and respectable as he was as a 
minister, but without having the slightest idea of having occu- 
pied such a position. By a couple of weeks"' careful treatment he 
recovered, little by little, from his slumber (somnambulism) 
and became again the old jovial minister. 



214 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

There is no doubt that many of those persons whom we 
believe to be insane — instead of being brought into an institu- 
tion for insanity — could be easily cured of their erroneous 
imaginations by simply using hypnotic treatment ; for we know 
that natural somnambulism disappears under artificial somnam- 
bulism. 

A fact I have observed, and which I think is of great impor- 
tance, is that those somnambulists who come under the influence 
of this condition in day time, never appear to be sleep-walkers at 
night; and if it happens they will only perform very slight, 
insignificant things as they never expose themselves to any 
danger. We have apparently only a few examples of this pecu- 
liar condition ; but they are nevertheless, in minds more numer- 
ous than it is supposed. We find people who after going 
through some disease, unnoticeably yielding to somnolent con- 
ditions without their associates having the slightest knowledge 
thereof. I will here briefly state an example of these peculiar 
cases of spontaneous somnambulism occurring in day time with 
one of these formerly mentioned strongly hysteric or epileptic 
persons, born with a morbid tendency towards this remarkable 
condition. We read frequently of judges falling asleep during 
the hearing of a case, but for a prisoner to be slumbering peace- 
fully during the whole of his trial, is probably an unprecedented 
occurrence. This curious spectacle was witnessed recently in 
the Tenth police court, Paris, where a man named Emil David 
was charged with illegally personating a barrister, and with 
common swindling. After giving his name in answer to the 
magistrate, the defendant ceased to reply to the questions put to 
him, and his counsel explained to the court that David was fast 
asleep, though his eyes were wide open. The magistrate was 
of course rather suspicious of such an explanation and in order 
to prove that his client was not shamming, Maitre Ranaud 
placed his hands before the prisoner's eyes, and drawing them 
slowly back, caused him to rise and leap over the barrier which 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 215 

separated the dock from the court. He was led back to his seat 
but it was found quite imposible to awaken him. The trial, 
however, was proceeded with, and Maitre Ranaud in David's 
defense, explained that he was a highly hysterical, hypnotic 
subject, and that at times he would remain for long periods in 
what is known as the "automatic ambulatory" stage of the 
disease or spontaneous somnambulism. This means that the 
patient, although in a state of complete somnolence, acts like an 
ordinary individual, and can travel, carry on a conversation or 
play cards without any one suspecting that he is asleep. On 
waking, however, he is entirely unconscious of what he has 
done while in that condition. This David on one occasion, 
traveled from Paris to Troyes without being conscious of doing 
so, and on recovering his senses discovered that he had lost his 
overcoat with a sum of money in one of the pockets. He had 
no recollection as to where he had left the garment, but some 
months later, on telling the story to a surgeon at the Hotel 
Dieu, the latter artificially threw David into a state of hyp- 
notic sleep, during which he explained the position and the 
number of the room in a hotel at Troyes where he had left the 
coat. The landlord was communicated with and the story 
found to be perfectly correct. The hearing of the case was 
terminated some time before David could be awakened and the 
passing of the sentence was delayed for two hours, as the court 
did not wish to condem a sleeping man. Finally, when he re- 
covered his senses, the prisoner was informed that on account 
of his extraordinary temperament his offense would be visited 
only with a penalty of one month's imprisonment. 

There are persons who are thrown into somnambulistic condi- 
tion while asleep by one or another unknown causes, and who 
still maintain this condition even after being, seemingly, awake in 
the morning. They leave home and enter upon the day's business 
or occupation, and they seem to fill their different places satis- 
factory, but they never show any special ability or intelligence. 



2l6 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

They are what we in daily talk would term dull and habitual — 
beyond this they have no interest. ( The reader must not here 
be mistaken as to the difference between these sickly somnam- 
bulists and the natural somnambulist, who while the condition 
lasts shows a greater intellectual power than he is known to 
possess awake. We must therefore arrange the sickly som- 
nambulist under some such classification as hysterics and 
epileptics, etc.) We find people who perform all the functions 
of life, live, work, eat and drink, tend to all their daily duties 
without they themselves or their companions ever understand- 
ing the unition hereof. Such people will by some sudden vio- 
lent shock, sensation, disease or other equal causes rapidly extri- 
cate themselves from this condition which has held them captive. 
We see mail-carriers who travel a certain route every day, 
mechanically stop to look in the same dull way whether they 
have a letter for Mr. Brown or Mr. Peterson, deliver this if 
found, walk as their duty may call to the next house — and so on 
continually. These persons are not always able to recollect 
what they have done half an hour before, for instance, an occa- 
sional conversation, a parcel or letter delivered at a certain 
place, etc., sirnjyly because it is not directly their dtdy to remem- 
ber such things, and it is outside of their mechanical daily duty. 
They have taught themselves the recollective power merely for 
the sake of existence. They will mechanically avoid any dan- 
ger on the public thoroughfares or crossings but they pay no 
attention to details. As an example I will state how a mail- 
carrier often collides with by-passing people, where the thick- 
ness of the crowd or any particular hurry on the part of 
the mail-carrier is not the cause. At the moment of the 
collision he looks up with a kind of dumb, absent expression 
on his face, making an excuse and walks on proceeding with 
his occupation in the old state of apathy. I could state num- 
bers of other examples if space permitted. The reader may 
suggest that the person spoken of has been lost in his own 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 217 

thoughts, occupied merely by his duty, perhaps trying to solve 
some scientific problem. No, — this is, so far as the mail-carrier 
and his duty is concerned, hardly acceptable. If a deep thinker 
who really performs wonderful work with his brain is at times 
apt to relapse into a state of dreamy reveries it will appear to 
be periodical and, under such conditions, only when the 
moment demands his full attention. With the other persons 
mentioned this condition is without these or similar reasons — 
always present year after year, often half a lifetime — until some 
sudden change throws them out of the remarkable half-dreamy 
existence and restores them to that absolute normal state of 
awakened life in which they were found before the interference 
of the condition spoken of. 

A very interesting case of auto-somnambulism, or self-hyp- 
notizing, occurred eleven years ago to a photographer in New- 
castle, England, of which I was an eye-witness. One day I 
was visiting the photographer in his atelier when a working- 
man with wife and two children came in to sit for a picture of 
the whole family. As the family expressed their willingness I 
remained. After being placed in their respective positions and 
asked to look at a certain point, the photographer proceeded 
with his work. At the time of which I speak the photogra- 
pher was not provided with the excellent apparatus of the pres- 
ent day. Persons who desired a picture often sat several min- 
utes in the same position looking in a certain direction. To sit 
like that is always very tiresome, and it frequently happened 
that it had a peculiar hypnotic effect upon the sitter, as is illus- 
trated by the following. The first sitting was not a success, 
and when the second was taken to his satisfaction he said to the 
family: " You are through ; you can leave your seats." The 
whole family arose except the husband, who remained in his 
position without moving. The photographer again told him in 
a louder voice that he was through, but he remained still as 
motionless as before. The photographer slapped him on the 



2Ic5 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

shoulder and, looking right in his face, told him in a loud voice 
that he was through. The man's face flushed, and he jumped 
from his chair as from a slumber. He was now fully awakened. 
The party left the atelier and I asked the photographer if he 
had seen cases like this before. He answered me: "Yes, very 
often; but it seems to me that in general it happens with people 
who are not used to being photographed, and to those whose 
movements are lazy and drowsy. No doubt it is people who 
mean to exactly follow my instructions that are affected in this 
way." 

I have seen people employed in a factory or in the field, 
sleepy fishermen, and others in this remarkable condition. With 
the striking examples that I have studied I could easily fill a 
book. At the east and west coast of Denmark there are scat- 
tered a number of villages which are, with only a f ev>T excep- 
tions, inhabited by fishermen. I have here seen many interest- 
ing cases. These people are easily influenced by the melan- 
choly aspect of the Danish heaths, the monotonous roaring of 
the sea, and the breaking of the waves against the stones of the 
beach ; and their occupation, taught when in boyhood, calling 
for their strict attention day after day, leaves no time for mental 
activity or development. How often have I while a boy sat 
down at the seashore as children like and, with great interest, 
watched the endless waves, listening to the roar of the gale 
and then, with a certain anxiety, have seen the fishermen of the 
village go into their boats and gradually disappear from my 
view. Always I heard the same monotonous melodies, the 
same sorrowful songs, nearly all of which had a religious ten- 
dency, describing unfortunate love, or those evil spirits that 
dwell in the ocean watching with greedy covetousness for the 
victims of the sea when it rages. These people, notwithstand- 
ing their daily duty with repairing boats and nets, their nightly 
excursions on the sea, the repetition of their melancholy songs 
— appear to be living-dead, performing all absolutely necessary 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 2I9 

functions and actions — always in a certain somnambulistic 
mentally sleeping condition. Such people are frequently met 
with on the coast of Scotland and other places in Europe. 
They are at the same time known to be seers and clairvoyants, 
of which they have often given satisfactory proofs. This is 
analogical with the person who in bed during a somnambulistic 
condition has similar visions ; also with the artificial somnam- 
bulist, the hypnotic individual who, during this condition, some- 
times shows a similar clairvoyant ability. These and similar 
conditions are worthy a closer study and observation. It is of 
great disadvantage to modern science that these cases have not 
been taken up by some advanced scientist who could give it a 
close investigation ; but perhaps this, too, will find its remedy 
some day in the future. Among others I find the natural sleep 
worthy a real study, as we, in fact, know nothing of it, and I 
consider it an interesting condition. An experiment which I 
find of much value to observe, and to which most people pay 
no attention, is self-suggestion. Numerous people are able to 
fix the hour at which they wish to awake in the morning and 
to awaken at exactly the time appointed. Furthermore it is of 
interest to observe our dreams during the so-called normal sleep, 
among which the plurality surely are due to an overfilled 
stomach, bad digestion, and similar causes. Other dreams may 
appear completely independent of these reasons — dreams that 
really have come to pass at a later time, dreams of things that 
had occurred already, dreams of approaching danger, dreams 
in which the sleeping individual beheld deceased persons or liv- 
ing friends that were hundreds of miles from the dreamer. 
This is often, as we know, the case with the other kind of 
dreamers ; namely, the somnambulistic sleep-walkers, who, with 
their eyes wide open, either lying in bed or walking around the 
floor, believe themselves engaged in conversation with deceased 
or absent friends. Homer has, in different works, several times 
treated this interesting subject in a way that shows the deep 



220 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

familiarity and knowledge this great spirit possessed in regard 
to somnambulism and dream life. Even the ancient philosoph- 
ical authors of Greece, Hippocrates and Aristoteles, have paid 
somnambulism a certain attention in a still higher degree than 
we find it discussed by some of our modern scientists. 

Hippocrates wrote : " I have known many persons during 
sleep moaning and calling out, . . . and others rising up, 
fleeing out of doors and afterward becoming well and rational 
as before — although they may be pale and weak." 

Aristoteles said : " Some are moved while they sleep and 
perform many things which pertain to wakefulness, though not 
without a certain phantasm and a certain sense ; for a dream is 
often in a certain manner a sensible perception." Altogether 
there were in ancient times those who paid great attention to 
these things, not merely among the masses, but the great poets 
sought among these phenomena objects for some of their most 
wonderful poems. From the abundance I cite Homer in the 
following poem: 

Hush'd by the murmurs of the rolling deep, 

Achilles sinks in the soft arm of sleep. 

When, lo! the shade, before his closing eyes, 

Of sad Patroclus rose. He saw him rise 

In the same robe he living wore. He came 

In stature, voice, and pleasant look the same. 

The form familiar hover'd o'er his head. 

And sleeps Achilles (thus the phantom said), 

Sleeps my Achilles, his Patroclus dead? 

Living, I seem'd his dearest, tenderest care, 

But now forgot, I wander in the air, 

Let my pale corse the rites of burial know, 

And give me entrance in the realms below. 

And is it thou? (he answers). To my sight 

Once more returnest thou from realms of night? 

O more than brother! Think each office paid, 

Whate'er can rest a disembodied shade; 

But grant one last embrace, unhappy boy! 

Afford at least that melancholy joy. 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 221 

He said, and with his longing arms essay'd 

In vain to grasp the visionary shade; 

Like a thin smoke he sees the spirit fly, 

And hears a feeble, lamentable cry. 

Confused he wakes, amazement breaks the bands 

Of golden sleep, and starting from the sands 

Pensive he muses with uplifted hands: 

'Tis true, 'tis certain; man, though dead, retains 
Part of himself, the immortal mind remains; 
The form subsists without the body's aid 
Aerial semblance, and an empty shade! 
This night my friend, so late in battle lost, 
Stood at my side, a pensive, plaintive ghost; 
Even now familiar, as in life, he came 
Alas! how different! yet how like the same! 



SLEEP-WALKING. 

BY D. HACK TUKE, M. D., LL. D., LONDON. 

One of my correspondents sends me a remarkable instance 
of a girl learning her lessons in her sleep. How this came 
about I must briefly state. Her father, who had held a good 
position as a country' gentleman, died in debt. The mother 
was in great distress, and having given up her country house, 
sent her daughters to a day school, telling them that they must 
profit to the uttermost by the teaching, which she could so ill 
afford to give them. They were much impressed with their 
mother's words, and set to work industriously. They took their 
school books up to bed with them, intending to learn the lessons 
set them. In the morning when they awoke, one of the daugh- 
ters found, when fully awake and applying her mind to her les- 
sons, that she had learnt them already. Now, this happened 
morning after morning, and the mother puzzled herself over 
the mystery in vain. One night, however, she happened to be 
visiting, and did not return home till very late. The moon was 
shining brightly on the window of the room where the daugh- 



222 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

ter slept, and she descried her daughter's form. She went 
quietly upstairs, and entering the room, found her daughter 
seated at the window in her night-dress only and sound asleep. 
Her lesson book, which was in her hand, was the subject of her 
earnest but unconscious study. The mystery was solved. She 
was trying to obey her mother's desire " to profit to the utter= 
termost" by the instruction given her. 

I confess that I received this remarkable statement with 
some hesitation in the first instance.* At the same time it is 
not more extraordinary than working out a problem in Euclid, 
as in the following instance. The process of committing to 
memory is, indeed, not so high a mental deed as this. A school 
teacher, now living, had conducted a geometry class among the 
boys for some months, and gave them, as an examination exer- 
cise, to prove the 47th problem of Euclid, Book I., taking 
nothing but the axioms and postulatis as granted. Many tried 
it, but only one succeeded in the contest. For some time he 
was baffled with one stage of the proof, and retired to bed with 
his mind full of difficulty. Late that night the teacher, in go- 
ing round the bed room before retiring to rest, found this boy 
kneeling on his bed, with his face to the wall, and pointing 
from spot to spot, as if following a proof in a figure on a black- 
board. He was so absorbed in his occupation that he neither 
noticed the light of the candle nor answered when addressed by 
name ; in short, he was asleep. He was not disturbed, but was 
left still proving his problem. 

Next morning, before he left his bed room, the teacher said 
to him : " Well, John, have you finished your proof?" His 
reply was : " Yes, I have ; I dreamt it, and remembered my 
dream this morning, and got out of bed as soon as I could see 
and wrote it out at the window." 



*I have met recently with a passage in Abercrombie's Intellectual Powers, in which 
he says: " There are many instances on record of persons composing' during' the state of 
somnambulism; as of boys rising in their sleep and finishing their tasks which they had 
left incomplete." (P. 239.) 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 223 

A barrister sleep-walker writes : " On one occasion I came 
down stairs in my night-dress to warn my family not to drink 
the beer, as I had seen a crow fall into it when it was brewing. 
This was, of course, only a dream, as no such thing had really 
occurred." He adds : " Very vivid dreams are always associa- 
ted with sleep-walking, in my case. I always dream, when I 
sleep, if only for a moment, and always did so. I compose 
poems and solve problems in my dreams, and feel great delight 
and satisfaction in so doing ; but when I awake I find the poems 
often without any meaning, and the solutions of problems are 
trash and false. I have also words and sentences of horror in my 
dreams which are nonsense. Moreover, I often wake with an 
impression of the enormous size of the furniture of my bedroom." 

Lord Culpepper's brother, famous as a sleep-walker, and 
whose portrait, by Sir Peter Lely, is given in Lodge's Histor- 
ical Portraits, was indicted at the Old Bailey, in 1686, for shoot- 
ing one of the guards and his horse. The defense set up was 
somnambulism, and he was acquitted, after his counsel had 
called in his favor nearly fifty witnesses to bear testimony to the 
marvelous exploits he performed during sleep. See Macnish's 
Philosophy of Shep. 

Dr. Yellowlees writes to me: "I know an individual who, 
when a boy, was found one night standing up in bed and fu- 
riously shaking the bedpost. The explanation was that he had 
been reading Uncle Tom's Cabin, and believed, in his dream, 
that he had got hold of Legree ! When a student he was 
amazed one morning to find that he had the fire-irons beside him 
in bed, and could only explain it by remembering that he had 
dreamed that robbers were going to break into the house, and 
that he had intended to confront them with the poker. Substi- 
tute for the bedpost a child in the bed or room, and clearly this 
might have easily become a criminal case." 

Furthermore D. Hack Tuke says : " One of my correspon- 
dents, a schoolmaster for forty years, informs me that he has 



224 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

from time to time met with cases of sleep-walking among his 
boys, and that he can not recall a single instance in which he 
has failed to effect a cure. He thinks he owed the idea to some 
observations in Upham's Mental Philosophy. He thus writes: 
Shortly before the sleep-walker's usual time of going to bed, I 
call him to one side and say in a serious tone: 'Henry, I find 
you were out of bed, and making a disturbance in your room, 
last night. 5 ' Sir,' he replies, ' I was asleep ; I know nothing 
about it ! ' Then I say, ' I will say nothing more about it on 
this occasion, but such a thing must not occur again.' * But, sir, 
I could not help it. I was asleep.' ' Well,' I respond, l you 
hear what I say. I would not advise you to let it occur again.' 
The boy leaves me, possibly with the feeling that he is some- 
what hardly dealt with, but with an established motive for 
checking the tendency to somnambulism, a motive which 
doubtless will continue to actuate him, even in sleep." 

A lad of eight, very fond of his rocking-horse, got up in 
his sleep, went into the nursery and mounted it. The motion 
of the ride awoke him, and he was astonished to find himself 
thus engaged. 

One boy who is more intelligent than the others, told 
Dr. Beach, that another boy got out of the bed one night and 
offered to fight, and that the boy's eyes were open. He pulled 
this boy back to bed, and asked him next morning what he 
wanted to fight him for, and the lad replied that he had nightmare. 

A girl, about twelve years old, walked in her sleep, the only 
occasion, as she believes, in her life. She was at the time at 
school, and had a quarrel with a schoolfellow on the previous 
day. She arose from her bed in her sleep, whether or not after 
a dream is not known, and proceeded to the bed of the other 
girl, and then violently pulled her hair. The assaulted girl 
called out lustily, when assistance arrived, and the unconscious 
assaulter was discovered to be in a state of somnambulism. On 
awaking she knew nothing whatever of what had happened. 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 225 

Dr. Ireland, in reply to my inquiries, has sent me only one 
case, and that was in a most intelligent imbecile who was sub- 
ject to severe epileptic fits. He had dyschoramatopsia, being 
quite unable to distinguish colors. He could speak freely on 
ordinary subjects. One evening he walked up stairs in a state 
of somnambulism, and went to the right bed. One day in the 
school, he suddenly ceased attending to what was going on, then 
left his seat and walked about, regardless of the remarks of the 
other boys, and what was said to him. When he awoke he 
was quite oblivious of what he had done. He also walked in 
his sleep in the night, but awoke so quickly that Dr. Ireland was 
unable to see him in time. 

Yet what did the celebrated Foderi say as to the criminal 
responsibility of somnambulists? He pronounced them to be 
culpable. " It seems to me," he writes, " that a man who has 
committed a bad action during sleep is not wholly inexcusable, 
since in accordance with most observations, he is only execut- 
ing the plans which occupied his mind when awake. He, in 
short, whose conduct is always in relation to his social duties, 
does not belie his character when he is alone with his soul. He 
on the contrary, who only thinks of crimes, deceit and ven- 
geance, displays during sleep the recesses of his depraved inclin- 
ation which external circumstances had restrained when awake. 
If such a man then commits a crime, and he is a suspicious 
character, one is justified, it seems to me, in considering this 
crime as a natural consequence of the immoral character of his 
ideas and one should judge this action as all the more free, in 
that it has been committed without any constraint or particular 
influence. Far from considering these acts insane, I regard 
them as the most voluntary that can be witnessed in human 
nature." 

Macario records a case of sleep-walking in an old woman 
of eighty-one. 



1 



226 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

SLEEP-WALKING. 

BY JAMES ESDAILE, M. D., CIVIL ASSISTANT SURGEON, 
H. C. S., BENGAL, INDIA. 

Sometimes one or more senses remain active after the others 
have gone to rest ; the wants of the waking organ are trans- 
mitted to the sensorium, and are followed by an effort of the 
the will to gratify them. The sleeper rises and performs the 
actions necessary to satisfy his desires ; eye-sight to a small ex- 
tent, usually assists ; if not, hearing and touch come to his aid, 
and guide him with singular accuracy in known localities. I 
may here give an illustration from my own experience, of the 
preternatural acuteness of hearing, developed to aid the som- 
nambulist in getting out of his troubles. In my youth I was 
an eager sportsman, by flood and field, and one night after a 
fatiguing day's sport, I found myself in the middle of the room 
and very cold, but could not possibly contrive to get back to bed 
again. My last waking impression was made by the ticking of 
my watch under the pillow, and this recollection came to revive 
me from my difficulties. After the most mature reflection, it oc- 
curred to me that if I could only detect my watch by its ticking 
I should also find my bed. Acting upon this happy idea, I 
hunted my watch by ear, till I actually found it and got into 
bed again, as the reward of sound reasoning and perseverance. 

I may also here notice a similar instance which occurred to 
my brother, a clergyman in Scotland. I give it in his own 
words : " Returning to London, after a tedious and dangerous voy- 
age from the continent, I retired to bed shortly after reaching my 
hotel. I had taken possession of a spacious apartment, in which 
were two beds, of which only one was occupied. I soon fell 
asleep, as I thought, but in a short time I left my bed, and wan- 
dered about in the greatest perplexity, under the idea that I was 
still on board the foreign steamer, which I recently left. I 
went from berth to berth, as I conceived, beseeching all 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 227 

to show me my own berth. At last I came in contact with 
the empty bed, and creeping over it, got in between it and the 
wall. I was long in getting out of this new dilemma, and re- 
suming my applications to the numerous sleepers by whom I 
fancied myself surrounded. I remember well one part of the 
affair, which filled me with the greatest trepidation. I came 
up to a small table, on which I distinctly heard a watch ticking. 
The idea came into my head that should the owner awake and 
find me in such a suspicious proximity to his watch, he would 
denounce me as a thief. I spoke long and eloquently, rebuking 
the base suspicion, but the sleeper remaining unmoved, I passed 
about in despair. I came to the door, but having locked it, it 
did not yield to my attempt at opening, but on coming to the 
window I drew up the blind, and was still more bewildered on 
seeing the mighty mass of London spread out before me. The 
light of the moon, however, striking on the watch was at last 
the means of restoring me to the full use of my senses. It sud- 
denly occurred to me that the watch was my own. I instantly 
seized it and forthwith was wide awake. I was in the middle 
of the room and in a cold sweat. A considerable time must 
have elapsed during the occurrences above described, and the 
curious thing is that my eyes were wide open the whole time. 
I spoke only French and that with the greatest volubility." 



SLEEP-WALKING. 



BY WINHART, THE WELL-KNOWN GERMAN PHYSICIAN 
AND SCIENTIST. 

The sleep-walker, when otherwise healthy, falls at a parti- 
cular period into a common sleep, which cannot be distinguished 
from the natural state of repose. After a longer or shorter 
time, he rises from his couch and walks about the room — some- 
times about the house. He frequently goes out into the open 



225 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

air, walks upon known and unknown paths as quickly and with 
as much activity and confidence as in his waking state ; avoids 
all obstacles which may stand, or have been designedly placed 
in his route, and makes his way along ruggect paths, and climbs 
dangerous heights which he would never think of attempt- 
ing when awake. He reads printed and written papers, writes 
as well and correctly as in his waking state, and performs many 
other operations requiring light and the natural use of the eyes. 
All those actions, however, are performed by the somnambulist 
in complete darkness as well as when awake, and generally with 
his eyes firmly closed. When the period of his somnambulism 
has elapsed, he returns to his bed, falls back again into his nat- 
ural sleep, awakes at his natural hour, and in most instances, 
knows nothing of what he has done in his sleep-walking state. 
At the same time, there are very few persons who exhibit all 
of these phenomena, or even the greater number of them. For 
the most part, they only wander about without any other pecu- 
liar manifestations ; and the instances in which several of the 
phenomena in question are exhibited are rare. 

A very remarkable case from the "Breslau Medical Collec- 
tions." It relates to a rope-maker who was frequently over- 
taken by sleep, even in the day time and in the midst of his 
usual occupations. While in this state, he sometimes re-com- 
menced doing all that he had been engaged in doing the previous 
part of the day ; at other times he would continue the work in 
which he happened to be engaged at the commencement of the 
paroxysm, and finished his business with as great ease and .suc- 
cess as when awake. When the fit overtook him in traveling, 
he proceeded on his journey with the same facility, and almost 
faster than when awake, without missing the road or stumbling 
over anything. In this manner he repeatedly went from Nur- 
emberg to Weimar. Upon one of these occasions he came into 
a narrow lane where there lay some timber. He passed over it 
regularly without injury, and with equal dexterity he avoided 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 229 

the horses and carriages that came in his way. At another 
time he was overtaken by sleep just as he was about to set out 
for Weimar on horseback. He rode through the river lime, 
allowed his horse to drink, and drew up his legs to prevent 
them getting wet, then passed through several streets, crossed 
the market place, which was at that time full of people, carts 
and booths, and arrived in safety at the home of an acquaint- 
ance, when he awoke. These and many similar acts requiring 
the use of the eyes, he performed in darkness as well as by day- 
light. His eyes, however, were firmly closed and he could not 
see when they were forced open and stimulated by light brought 
near them. His other senses appeared to be equally dormant 
as were his eyes. He could not smell the most volatile spirit. 
He felt nothing when pinched, pricked or struck. He heard 
nothing when called by his name, or even when a pistol was 
discharged close beside him. 

There is another case, somewhat older, observed and circum- 
stantially reported by a trustworthy physician, Dr. Knoll, which 
equally deserves our attention. The subject of his observation 
was a young man, a gardener, who became somnambulous, and 
while in that state performed many extraordinary operations. 
He generally fell asleep about 8 o'clock in the evening and then 
began to utter devotional sentences and prayers. Afterwards 
he went out of the house, clambered over a high wooden parti- 
tion and a still higher wall, uninjured, passed through several 
streets and returned. At another time he climbed up to the 
roof of the house and rode astride upon the ridge, as if upon 
horseback, clambered about for some time upon the roof, and at 
length descended in safety. With a view to prevent accidents, 
he was locked up in a room and watched. When he became 
somnambulous, at the usual time, he began to perform all sorts 
of operations with his clothes and the furniture of the room. He 
climbed up to the window sill, and from thence to a stone 
which was much higher and at some distance, and rode upon 



23O NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

the latter as if upon a horse. The height of the stone, the dis- 
tance from the window, and its small breadth, were such that 
a person awake would scarcely have ventured to attempt these 
operations. After descending from the stone, he knocked a 
large table about hither and thither, and finding it was likely to 
fall on him, he very dexterously contrived to evade it. He 
gathered together all the clothes he could find in the room, 
mixed them together, then separated them carefully and hung 
them up, each article in its proper place. The old stockings 
and shoes he endeavored to arrange in pairs, according to their 
shape and color, as if he actually saw them. He then laid hold 
of a needle, which he had stuck in the wall some weeks before, 
and sewed his small-clothes. Besides these, he performed a 
variety of other operations, all requiring the light and the use of 
the eyes, with which it would appear, he was enabled to 
dispense. 

Furthermore, I may refer to the case observed by the Arch- 
bishop of Bordeaux, and reported in the great French Ency- 
clopedia. It is the case of a young ecclesiastic, in the same 
seminary with the Archbishop, who was in the habit of get- 
ting up during the night in a state of somnambulism, of going 
to his room, taking pen, ink, and paper, and composing and 
writing sermons. When he had finished one page of the paper 
on which he was writing, he would read over what he had 
written and correct it. Upon one occasion he had made use of 
the expression " ce divin enfant" In reading over the passage 
he changed the adjective " divin''' into " adorable." Perceiving, 
however, that the pronoun " c<?" could not stand before the word 
"adorable," he added to the former the letter " t." In order to 
ascertain whether the somnambulist made really any use of his 
eyes, the Archbishop held a piece of pasteboard under his chin 
to prevent him from seeing the paper on which he was writing, 
but he continued to write on without appearing to be incom- 
moded in the slightest degree. 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 23 1 

The paper on which he was writing was taken away, but 
the somnambulist immediately perceived the change. He wrote 
pieces of music while in this state, and in the same manner with 
his eyes closed. The words were placed under the musical 
notes. It happened upon one occasion that the words were 
written in too large a character, and did not stand precisely un- 
der the corresponding notes. He soon perceived the error, 
blotted out the part, and wrote it over again with great exact- 
ness. 

I hope that these examples, to which I might add a great 
many others, will be sufficient to show that the somnambulist, 
during this extraordinary state, is enabled, apparently without 
the use of his eyes, to receive impressions equally well, or, at 
least, with the same consequences to his perceptive faculty as 
when awake. 



SLEEP-WALKING. 



FREAK OF A SOMNAMBULIST HE GETS HIS KNIFE AND 

STARTS TO DISSECT HIS ROOMMATE WHILE ASLEEP. 

A somnambulist sometimes does queer things, and here is 
one of the queerest things a somnambulist ever did : Mr. Roe 
Edwards, a traveling salesman for Moor, Marsh ■& Co., is as 
well known through south and southwest Georgia as any gen- 
tleman on the road, says the Atlanta Constitution. For years 
he traveled for Seisel & Hech, of Macon, and during that time 
it was a crime for any man in that section of the state to wear 
a hat not sold by Mr. Edwards. But now people will begin to 
wonder whether Mr. Edwards was awake or asleep when he 
sold those hats. Among Mr. Edward's many acquaintances is 
Mr. Will Johnson, who is known from Atlanta to Richmond 
as a traveling salesman for J. W. & E. C. Atkins. It was Mr. 
Johnson who discovered that Mr. Edwards was a somnambu- 
list. The discovery was a startling revelation to both gentle- 



£32 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

men. A day or two ago Mr. Edwards casually met on the 
street an old friend from Webster county, who is now attending 
lectures at the Atlanta Medical college. Mr. Edward's friend 
was none other than William Terry, a bright and promising 
young man. The meeting was an agreeable surprise to both 
gentlemen, and as they separated Mr. Edwards said : 

" Terry, we haven't met since I sold a big bill of hats in your 
town, and I want to talk with you. Suppose you come and 
pass the night with me?" 

Mr. Terry, who will soon be a full-fledged doctor, accepted 
the invitation, and that evening met Mr. Johnson. The next 
morning, as Mr. Terry was leaving, he said: 

" Roe, I have been talking to you about the science of med- 
icine. Have you ever been in a dissecting-room?" 

" No, I haven't," answered the drummer. 

"Would you like to see one?" 

"You bet I would." 

" Then if you'll meet me at 1 o'clock I'll see that you get a 
chance to go through a room full of dead bodies all under the 
knife." 

Mr. Edwards asked Mr. Perry to call at the store for him, 
and at the appointed time the medical student was there. The 
two friends went to the college and through the lecture rooms, 
and then into the dissecting room. As they entered the door 
Mr. Perry turned to his friend with a smile, saying : 

" Now, Roe, don't faint, or I'll have you for my first pa- 
tient." 

"That threat is sufficient," said Mr. Edwards, "to prevent 
the weakest woman from fainting." 

The interior of the dissecting room did not seem to affect 
Mr. Edwards, except to interest him. There were fifty or 
sixty students in the room, who were working upon a dozen 
subjects with the knife. The drummer looked at the work 
carefully and commented upon it. 



NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 233 

That night Mr. Edwards, with his friend Mr. Johnson, 
went to De Give's. " Around the World in Eighty Days" "was 
on the boards, and was interesting to Mr. Johnson, but Mr. 
Edwards wore an abstracted air during the performance. As 
the two gentlemen were walking home Mr. Johnson said: 

" How did you enjoy the show, Roe ? " 

"I did not enjoy it much," answered Mr. Edwards, "for I 
could not get that blamed dissecting room off my mind ten 
minutes. The more I think about it the more vivid those sub- 
jects appear to me. The first thing I thought of when the 
duelists started to fight was if they would both be killed they 
would be fine subjects for dissecting. When the sutler was 
rescued and the priest shot, I thought that the medical institute 
would like to get hold of him, and again, where all the Indians 
were killed I would think if that college could secure their 
bodies they would have subjects enough to last them some time, 
and it was just that way throughout the entire play." 

After reaching home the two gentlemen retired. They oc- 
cupied the same room, and in a short time they were both 
asleep and dreaming. Mr. Edwards' dreams, however, carried 
him back to the dissecting room, and, thinking he was a doctor, 
he began glancing at his knife. In his overcoat pocket Mr. 
Edwards carried a pair of gloves. In the dissecting room he 
observed that students used gloves, and, arising, he secured the 
gloves and drew them on. Then his dream went on. 
But the dream was fast approaching reality. Just why 
Mr. Edwards' mind in his dream turned to a scientific 
explanation of the ear cannnot be told, but it did. After put- 
ting on his gloves and securing his knife, he approached the 
bed upon which his friend, Mr. Johnson was asleep. As he 
walked up to the bed his mind appeared to be saying : 

" Oh, here's that dissecting table and here's the subject." 

Then he reached down, and, catching Mr. Johnson's ear 
with one 3iand. held the knife up with the other. He began 



234 NATURAL SOMNAMBULISM OR SLEEP-WALKING. 

hunting for the part which distinguished sound, thinking to 
himself : 

" I'll see why people are deaf." 

The knife-blade touched the ear and Mr. Johnson awoke 
with a jump. He then threw his hand to his head as he arose, 
and drew it away covered with blood. At the same time he 
observed Mr. Edwards standing beside his bed, knife in hand 
His eyes were wide open, but there was a peculiar gaze in them. 

"What in the name of God is the matter?" asked Mr. 
Johnson. 

" I am going to dissect this body," said Mr. Edwards in an 
even tone. 

Mr. Johnson sprang from his bed, and, grabbing his 
friend by the shoulders, exclaimed : 

"Edwards! Edwards! What's the matter?" 

Mr. Edwards did not move, and in an instant Mr. Johnson 
realized that his friend was in a somnambulistic state. Gather- 
ing him by the shoulders again, Mr. Johnson gave Mr. Edwards 
a shake. 

" Oh ! " said Mr. Edwards, pleasantly, " boys, this corpse 
has come to." 

Mr. Johnson continued to shake his bedfellow, and finally 
succeeded in awaking him. The situation was a painful one to 
Mr. Edwards, and, turning his knife over to his friend, he said : 

" Take this, and I'll tie myself to the bed." 

He then' tied his feet to the bed with his suspenders, but 
could not sleep again. 



CHAPTER XII. 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

HYPNOTISM INTRODUCED INTO WELL-KNOWN CHICAGO 

RESIDENCES IT IS NOW APPRECIATED AND UNDERSTOOD 

- — NOT MERELY AS A MEANS OF ENTERTAINMENT J 

BUT IT IS ALSO RECOGNIZED AND RECOMMENDED 

AS A METHOD BY WHICH NUMEROUS 

DISEASES ARE CURED. 

I. 

My first private seance in Chicago took place at the resi- 
dence of Mr. Robert Lindblom, the noted Board of Trade ope- 
rator who is widely known as a man of liberal ideas, progres- 
sive thought, and one who takes a great interest in everything 
new in the field of economics, science and art. Shortly after 
my arrival in Chicago I was introduced to this gentleman, and 
later I received a very courteous invitation to spend the even- 
ing with his family. The hearty reception from Mr. Lindblom 
and his family in their hospitable home, soon put me in the best 
disposition, and the cordial amiability of all present gave perfect 
condition. This culminated when Mr. Lindblom ordered in the 
champagne, and, lifting his glass during an elegant speech, 
bade me welcome to the "land of the free," while extending his 
wishes for my future success and prosperity. 

My hospitable host endeavored to keep hypnotism out of the 
conversation (in order to oblige me as a guest), but it was all in 
vain, for the inquisitiveness of those present gradually became 
more pressing. The result was that I was asked to perform a 

235 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 237 

few hypnotic experiments. To secure the necessary subject 
proved rather difficult ; for the ladies were afraid, and the gen- 
tlemen simply would not submit themselves. The interest in 
the matter was not diminished ; but everyone would be a spec- 
tator, and no one cared to be the subject. 

At last we found a trial subject — an elderly, well known 
gentleman, Captain S., a friend of the family, who consented to 
submit himself to my proceedings. Captain S. was a little past 
sixty years, and had been an artillery captain in the Northern army 
during the late war. His health was not good, as he had a 
poor appetite and suffered from insomnia and attacks of melan- 
cholia. Dr. Pratt and Dr. Wimermark, well - known Chicago 
physicians, both of whom had frequently treated the captain, 
were present; and they asked him repeatedly to yield to 
the trial. I was of course willing, although I stated that a 
young person would have been preferable, especially in con- 
sideration of the captain's hesitation. Those present grouped 
themselves at a safe distance from my dreaded proximity, and 
anxiously awaited the result. I asked the captain to take a seat 
in a comfortable chair; to give himself up entirely to my influ- 
ence, to be utterly passive for about ten minutes and to remain 
in the position in which I first placed him. Mr. Lorenzo Fager- 
steen took his place at the piano and played masterly Chopin's 
mourning march, which soon brought about the real hypnotic 
mood; even the good-humored captain was seemingly impressed 
and influenced by the music. During the music, I seized the 
occasion to perform my manipulations. After a lapse of about 
five minutes the captain's head dropped upon his chest, and loud 
snoring announced that he had entered upon a deep hypnotic 
sleep. The party now formed a circle around me and the sub- 
ject. Commencing, I outstretched the captain's left arm, made 
a few passes from his forehead down to his finger tips, thereby 
making it impossible for him to lower his arm. With his arm 
outstretched on a level with the shoulder, the captain made 



2 3 8 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 



every effort to force it down, but in vain. The cataleptic con- 
dition ceased instantly upon a couple of manipulations. By a 
slight touch of his forehead I made it impossible for him to 
answer my questions ; likewise by a few passes I prevented him 
from closing or opening his eyelids according to my wishes. In 
spite of all his efforts he was not able to leave his seat. The 




THE SUBJECT HAS FORGOTTEN HER NAME. 

quick beating of his heart I made normal simply by placing my 
right hand over his heart, the left on his forehead, at the same 
time suggesting the heart to beat slower and slower until it 
finally would be normal. Several other experiments were then 
presented, but the most interesting was the last suggestion 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 239 

given to the captain before his awakening. I suggested to him 
that he in the future should retire every evening at 10 o'clock, 
when no necsssary business prevented him doing so ; that he 
should enjoy a comfortable night's sleep, wake up in the morn- 
ing at 7 o'clock and feel himself hearty and strengthened. The 
suggestion was repeated a couple of times in order to deepen 
the effect. Furthermore, I suggested to him that a few minutes 
after being awake, he should approach his old friend Mr. Lind- 
blom, heartily shake hands with him, and tell him that the cap- 
tain was feeling exceptionally well. This was all accomplished 
in every detail — after the cessation of the hypnotic sleep. The 
captain's wife also being present, was somewhat anxious when 
her husband submitted himself to the experiment, because she 
believed hypnotism to be dangerous to him — either it would in- 
jure his system, or that possibly he could not be released again 
from the condition. She was fully relieved when she saw her 
husband in the happiest of moods, feeling even better than he 
did before the hypnotization. With regard to my suggestions 
concerning humor, sleep and appetite, they all brought the best 
result. Mr. Pfeiffer, representative for the Chicago Tribune, 
who was also present, had asked me to perform the post-hyp- 
notic experiment, as to what the captain should do after being 
awake. When the experiment was performed in close con- 
formity with the order given, Mr. Pfeiffer was seemingly very 
much pleased. Mr. Pfeiffer declared that he had been highly 
interested in my experiments, and that they had far surpassed 
his expectations. 

II. 

My next seance was at the home of the well-known 
merchant, Fritz Frantzen. Among those present were 
B. Meyer, M. D., A. Doe, M. D., Louis Pio, editor, C. F. 
Bryhn, editor. In the course of the evening two persons were 
put into the hypnotic sleep, one of these being Miss P., a rela- 



2/|X> 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 



tive of Mrs. F. Frantzen. With her I performed a line of gen- 
eral experiments, one of which was that, through my sugges- 
tions, she for about fifteen minutes believed herself to be the 
famous Diva Adelina Patti, from whose repertoire she gave 
several numbers in such a remarkably attractive and fascinating 
manner that, even with her splendid voice, she could not repeat 
when awake. The other subject was a young man, twenty-one 
years of age, employed with Mr. Frantzen. My first attempt 




DRAWING THE SUBJECT BACKWARDS. 

with him failed ; upon repeating it I brought him completely 
under control. During his hypnotic condition he enjoyed for 
about half an hour the happy belief that he was first Napo- 
leon the first, then the president of the United States. While 
this happy inspiration lasted he diverted us with speeches, either 
as Napoleon speaking to his soldiers or as the president in 
the council of his cabinet officers. The young lady, who often 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 24I 

suffered from headache and who, before the hypnotic action, 
complained thereof, when awaked from the hypnotic condition, 
declared herself completely relieved. 

III. 

My third hypnotic seance in Chicago was with the late 
Colonel John C. Bundy, editor of the Religio-PJiilosophical 
yournal. This seance was of a more serious nature, as it 

was for the purpose of curing- a sufferer. Mr. Bundy and his 
wife both took a living interest in hypnotism and I am glad to 
state that I have passed several enjoyable evenings in this com- 
fortable home, where our conversation mostly concerned hyp- 
notism and related phenomena. An interesting proof of the 
curative powers of hypnotism can be found in the following : 
When Mr. Bundy's servant was very sick, suffering from 
fever and rheumatism, I was sent for one forenoon about 10 
o'clock in order to aid him through hypnotism. As soon as I 
entered his bedroom I took a stand at the head end of his bed 
and asked him to look steadily at my eyes. After a lapse of 
four minutes he was entirely under my influence. I then placed 
his limbs in different positions, which he was unable to change. 
This proved the presence of the cataleptic condition. Sugges- 
tion was then given him that he inside of a couple of hours 
should feel much better, desire to rise from bed, eat a good 
meal and proceed with his work as usual. At 2 o'clock p. m. 
he left his bed lively and happy and soon ate his dinner with 
good appetite. At 4 p. m. he was able to perform his usual 
work, being in such good humor that he was singing and 
whistling at it. 

IV. 

My fourth seance in Chicago took place at the residence of 
Mrs. Papin, 2926 Michigan ave., a lady well known in Chicago 
society. The interest of my experiments in this centered in a 
young man, twenty-two years of age, who was then first 



I 



242 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

brought into hypnotic condition, and with whom I performed a 
number of different and very interesting experiments. The 
young man, who was of a bashful disposition, maintained, during 
the entire hypnose, exactly the same appearance. Before his 
hypnotization the ladies served refreshments, and he was asked 
whether he liked tropical fruits, and he answered "Yes." 
During the hypnose I presented him with a couple of raw po- 
tatoes declaring them to be newly imported oranges from Mes- 
sina, at the same time asking him to forego all formality and 
eat all he desired. The taste and delight for fruit which he en- 
joyed in a normal condition was not diminished during the hypnotic 
state. It was my intention to let him have only a couple of 
bites of the potatoes ; but before I was able to stop him he had 
with greedy rapidity swallowed more than half of one of them. 
The look of arrogance and satisfaction he gave us while like a 
gourmand he enjoyed the imagined tropical fruit was altogether 
comical. An emperor at his table could not act with more 
splendor and the delight he showed in drinking Lake Michigan 
water for champagne was evident as the effects from a real in- 
toxication did not fail in presenting themselves. 

A young lady who had formerly been hypnotized was now 
brought under influence. I performed with her a line of inter- 
esting experiments. Among other things she gave us in an 
interesting and entertaining way remarkable answers to several 
inquiries directed to her — answers that would be worthy of an 
oracle. She was in a clairvoyant condition. One of the first 
experiments I performed with her was to give her the idea that 
she was in a garden picking flowers. I suggested that a cer- 
tain flower would produce sneezing when she smelled of it, and 
it proved to be the case. By suggesting to her that she was out 
on the lake sailing in stormy and tempestuous weather, all the 
symptoms of a beginning sea-sickness appeared and she was 
awakened. Another young lady (a relation to the family) was 
hypnotized. It took me seven and one-half minutes to produce 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 



2 43 



a complete hyjDnose. Different experiments of interest were 
then presented, of which I will mention that after being placed 
on a certain spot she had no ability to move; and she could not. 
in spite of all her efforts, open her clenched hands. It is of 
special interest to remark that the lady, during the hypnose, 




UNCONSCIOUS SELF-INDUCED TRANCE. 

seemed to be also in the clairvoyant state ; for I noticed that 
she made several movements which I thought of suggesting to 
her, and this, although her eyes during the sleep were perfectly 
closed, with her back turned on me, she repeated, with close 
exactness, my different attitudes and expressions, the different 



i 






244 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

moods expressed in my face. As the family was very anxious 
concerning her during the hypnose, I, in accordance with their 
wishes, caused her to awake after these experiments. After 
being awakened she declared that she felt remarkably well. 

V. 

My fifth seance was given at the home of Mr. and Mrs. 
Babut, the well-known French family, No. 274 La Salle ave- 
nue. Like most French people they showed a living interest in 
hypnotism (we know that France is the motherland of hypno- 
tism), and I had the pleasure here of demonstrating several of 
those wonders reached only by the aid of hypnotism. In this 
hospitable home I had the opportunity of experimenting for 
once, in the real sense of the word, to a cosmopolitan attend- 
ance, as there were present two American attorneys, an English 
judge, a French physician, an Italian, a Russian, an Austrian, 
and a Dane. Mr. P., a young bookkeeper, was first hypno- 
tized. After having performed a few of the more introductory 
experiments one of the guests asked me whether it was possible 
to make the subject, who was an American born in Philadel- 
phia, believe that he was really a native of France, and in true 
accordance herewith get the bearing, manners, and appearance 
of a real Parisian gentleman. By the aid of suggestions this 
was successfully done, and he soon thought himself an officer 
and then believed himself speaking for the ladies at a dinner 
party. At other moments he imagined that he was strolling 
along the gay boulevards of modern Paris. Mr. P. was then 
given the suggestion for a shorter time that he was a Paris bal- 
let-master, and when he then commenced, at my order, to whirl 
around in the most daring ballet attitudes, which all had an ap- 
pearance of grace and elegance, he seemed evidently so highly 
interested in his new dignity that it was only at the expense of 
much time and continued efforts that he was led back to reality 
once more to be the serious and amiable bookkeeper. 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 



2 45 



A young lady, Miss M., a delicate blonde, with blue eyes and 
a pale complexion, was then hypnotized, and was the subject in 
a number of interesting experiments following each other 
quickly. It was suggested to her that she saw the heavens 




PLEASING EFFECT OF THE NORTH POLE OF A MAGNET. 
DR. LUY'S EXPERIMENT IN HYPNOTISM. 



open, and kneeling down, with outstretched arms, she beheld 
with a reverent gaze, the fancied clouds and listened with ex- 
treme delight to the angelic music that was suggested. She re- 
mained in this position for about ten or twelve minutes without 



246 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 



the least trembling of her arms to betray any exhaustion what- 
ever ; on the contrary, she seemed with true delight to enjoy 
her vision. Different other suggestions were then given her 

■4Br 



f/i W 



i 1 




HYPNOTIZING BY PASSES ONLY, WITHOUT TOUCHING THE 

SUBJECT. 

and the result was, in every case, excellent. She proved to be 
a brilliant subject. The last suggestion, according to which she 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 



247 



was to wake up at a certain time, was also successful. Another 
young lady, Miss C. C, 19 years old, with a lively temper, very 
dark eyes and hair, was then hypnotized. The young lady was 
French, and a relative of one of the families present. The 
hypnose was in this case very rapidly produced. By the aid of 
the fascination method I commanded her suddenly to close her 
eyelids tight and sleep. Then I made a few passes and she was 
completely under influence. After experimenting for a while I 
suggested to her that she, at a certain time after being awake, 
should suddenly arise from her seat, walk across the floor in the 




THE SUBJECT CANNOT STRIKE. 

direction of Mr. Krzisch, give him her hand saying, loudly and 
distinctly, " How do you do?" This all came to pass in accord- 
ance with the instruction given, at exactly the time appointed, 
although the young lady was not aware of the suggestion and 
had not once looked at her watch. 

During a second seance at the residence of Mr. R. Lind- 
blom four persons were hypnotized. Mr. Lindblom who, as 



248 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 



above stated, took a great interest in hypnotism, had in the 
mean time taken a course with me in its theory and practice, and 
on this occasion gave an illustration of his skill in several very 
interesting and successful experiments. 

My first subject was a young mechanic, with whom I had a 
perfect success. A movement of my hand, and he could not 




TELLING OF THE ABSENT. 

remember his name. With my arm outstretched and my hand 
clenched I asked him to aim well and hit it; but in spite of all 
his efforts it was impossible for him to do so. By a slight 
pressure on his forehead and a couple of manipulations from 
head to feet he was altogether cataleptic — as stiff as a piece of 
wood, so that when placed on top of two chairs, his neck rest- 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 249 

ing on one and his heels on the other, he was completely origid 
and capable of bearing heavy weights. An intermission fol- 
lowed, during which the servant served refreshments. I was 
then asked to make an attempt with him. He consented, and 
was successfully and quickly influenced. The next subject was 
Mr. Lindblom's coachman, with whom the former had already 
experimented successfully. Before leaving we had still an- 
other very interesting illustration. A young lady, Miss F., was 
hypnotized. She whistled for us as a real virtuoso — believing 
herself to be a young man. At the wish of Count Lovenhaupt, 
the secretary of the Swedish Legation at Washington, I consented 
to try an experiment in clairvoyance. This was done in the follow- 
ing manner : The gas was turned down, and a decanter filled with 
water was placed in front of the subject at such a height as to 
be on a level with her eyes. A lighted candle was put behind 
the decanter with the flame at the center of it. The subject 
was now asked to gaze at the water and relate to us what she 
saw. A few minutes passed in silence, when suddenly the sub- 
ject's face became animated ; her lips began to move — but her 
words, if any, were inaudible. Upon asking her to speak 
louder she increased her voice, and very lively scenes soon fol- 
lowed. She described lovely valleys with the melodious chirp- 
ing of birds — then dark and majestic mountains with dashing 
rivers, and the stunted vegetation laid waste by sweeping winds. 
Then she was out in the fields caressing the horses or scolding 
a big red cow which, as it seemed in her vision, had attacked a 
large black dog of hers. After these descriptions of varied 
scenery which aroused, by turns, gravity and merriment in the 
audience, I placed my hand at the lady's head and asked one of 
those present to think of a certain object unknown to my sub- 
ject and myself. In order to make the subject describe the ob- 
ject thought of Mr. Lindblom concentrated his thoughts upon 
a certain person of whose location he was at the time ignorant. 
Mr. Lindblom asked me to inquire of the subject as to this per- 



250 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

son's whereabouts and his present occupation. The subject re- 
mained silently looking into the water; then she commenced to 
speak with great excitement giving a good description of a well- 
known Board of Trade member who was then seated at a card- 
table, with other gentlemen, in a room of which she also gave 
a very exact description. The gentleman mentioned seemed to 
be in some kind of excitement — having a little "scrap" with his 
comrades. Then she commenced to imitate the attitudes and 
movements of this gentleman with such remarkable exactness 
that there could be no doubt that she had found the person 
thought of by Mr. Lindblom. The next day, on the Board, 
Mr. Lindblom asked the gentleman mentioned as to where he 
had been the previous evening and his occupation there. The 
answer given proved in every detail the correctness of the sub- 
ject's statement. 

I gave a seance at the Ashland club, corner Washington 
boulevard and Wood street. As it was the visitors day, 
the club-house was crowded, although it was a warm spring 
evening. After the appearance of different artists and music 
by the Tomaso mandolin orchestra, my seance was the next 
number on the program. On account of the large audience the 
space given me for the performance of my experiments, was 
rather limited — which was, of course, somewhat inconvenient. 
I began experimenting with five members of the club. After 
a lapse of ten minutes I had two gentlemen under influence. 
With the first — a young man — I had but a limited success. I 
controlled him as to the opening and closing of his eyes ; but 
could not further influence him. I therefore dismissed him, 
o-iving my full attention to the other — Mr. S., secretary of the 
club, with whom I had excellent success. I now entered upon 
a number of interesting experiments among which were the 
following : Placing the subject's hands upon the palms of my 
own, I told him that I would nail them to mine, so that he, a 
minute after could not withdraw them, regardless of all his 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 



251 



attempts to do so. The minute passed, I asked him to try; but 
in spite of all his struggling, covering his forehead with per- 
spiration, it was impossible. I now took a large bottle contain- 
ing strong ammonia and suggesting to him that he had a severe 
cold, and that in order to avoid catarrh he should inhale this 
excellent, soothing and fragrant perfume. I put the bottle to 
his nose. With his face beaming with delight, Mr. S. inhaled 
the strong ammonia with eager desire to continue, for his eyes 




IMITATING THE HYPNOTIST. 

followed the direction of the bottle with the most living expres- 
sion of disappointment when I removed it. I asked several 
among the audience, to convince them as to the contents of the 
bottle — by smelling it. The effect was that their eyes watered 
and they started from their seats with various grimaces. Ask- 
ing one of Mr. S.'s friends to put the palm of his hand up to the 
subjects nose, I suggesting to Mr. S. that a famous physician 



252 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

from Paris had him under treatment for his catarrh, and that it 
was an absolute necessity for him to inhale some very strong 
ammonia. Mr. S. commenced to inhale the fancied ammonia 
with the greatest aversion shown upon his face ; and when the 
hand of his friend was placed still closer to his nose, he held out 
his hand in an averting manner, turning his head with a vivid 
expression of resistance. The suggestion had resulted in pro- 
ducing tears in his eyes, as well as convulsive contraction of the 
facial muscles. Before Mr. S. was awakened I was asked to 
give him a post-hypnotic order, by which we understand an order 
to perform a certain action at a certain time after his waking. 
Several members of the club asked me presently, to suggest to 
Mr. S. that he, six and a half minutes after being awoke 
should sing a song. I asked whether Mr. S. was a singer and 
received the answer, "No, not very much, for the simple reason 
that he is completely lacking in voice." I attempted to explain 
how unnatural it would be to suggest Mr. S. to sing under such 
circumstances — that it was a fact that I could improve the fac- 
ulty and talent of an individual in such case, but that it was 
impossible where the necessary foundation of voice was lacking. 
But the audience, in a humorous mood, insisted on the song. I 
at last yielded, giving Mr. S. the suggestion. I repeated the 
instructions a couple of times and asked Mr. S. to distinctly 
remember my wish, and about two minutes after I awakened 
him several of his friends gathered around him, asking him all 
kinds of questions as to how he felt — if he didn't have a head- 
ache — whether he was sure of being perfectly awake. To the 
last inquiry he responded with a statement of his sincere convic- 
tion thereof. 

Meanwhile the minutes passed away and the time drew near 
for the suggested song. Suddenly, while Mr. S. was engaged 
in a lively conversation with a couple of gentlemen, and the rest 
of the audience was giving him very close attention, he inter- 
rupted the conversation, gazed fixedly out upon space, made a 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 253 

few motions as of a man whose coat is too tight, spread out his 
legs, hemmed as if in the need of more air, made elegant passes 
with his right hand as if he were the famous Mierzwinski him- 
self, opened his mouth, made a quick step forward, shook his 
head and hemmed again. Then he clasped with both hands 
around his collar, trying to widen it out as if he was near being 
strangled, exclaiming rapidly with a faltering voice: "Profes- 
sor what have you done with me ? Get me out of this. I feel 
just as if I am not myself any more." Suddenly he hums 
another tune and exclaims in utter despair : " I can't sing." A 
loud applause followed the confusion; and by a few manipu- 
lations I soon released him from his embarassing situation when 
he was first completely awake. Mr. S. afterwards told me 
that he had never been in a more peculiar state than while he 
was standing there amidst the eagerly waiting audience, feeling 
within himself for the first time in his life a strong desire to 
appear as a singer — being at the same time convinced of his 
own inability. After about twenty minutes intermission, I hyp- 
notized Miss W. N., a young lady, with whom many experi- 
ments showed my complete influence. One of special interest 
was when I asked the young lady to speak upon a subject 
which some one present might suggest. In the midst of the 
lecture she suddenly exclaimed: "Look there what a large 
beautiful cat ! " and calling it by name, she pointed at one of 
the gentlemen sitting near by. The gentleman was very much 
surprised, and explained that just at that very moment, without 
being able to give any special reason for it, he had been think- 
ing of a cat called by the name mentioned, which was to be 
found at his home down south. This gentleman was the son 
of a well-known senator, and a transient visitor in Chicago. 

I gave a very interesting seance at the residence of Mr. 
Wright, president of the Chicago Theosophical Society, where 
I had in every respect, a most enjoyable evening, and where I 
had the pleasure of performing for Mr. Wright and his guests. 



3 54 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 



a number of successful hypnotic experiments. Before the arrival 
of the parties invited, Mr. Wright and I had a long and inter- 
esting conversation concerning the progress made in the mag- 
netic treatment of different diseases — that is treatment in the 
awake condition through passes not accomoanied by any sleep. 




CHARCOT LECTURING UPON HYPNOTISM. 

Late in the evening I had the satisfaction of practically proving 
the correctness of my statement, as I had the opportunity of 
treating a couple of those present, for nervous sufferings. Mr. 
Wright himself had been very busy during the day and did not 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 255 

feel altogether well in. the early part of the evening. I asked 
him to be seated as comfortable as possible, and at the same 
time to make himself passive to my influence. Then by the aid 
of a few magnetic passes, I caused the indisposition to disap- 
pear. Mr. Wright, who is very sensitive, declared that during 
the treatment he felt a, soothing warm rush, like a current 
through his entire body from head to foot, whenever I touched 
him lightly or moved my hands along the nerves. Mr. Wright 
stated further, that he was able to perceive my magnetic atmos- 
phere which was of a piquant sweetly odor, especially strong 
when my finger tips were moved downward through the air at 
a distance of about an inch from his face. This declaration 
from Mr. Wright interested me particularly, because many of 
my patients have noticed and spoken of the same thing. 

One of my seances took place at the editorial office of the 
daily Skandinaven. In order to convince the editors that no 
special preparations are necessary to produce the hypnose with 
a susceptible individual, I requested a couple of the editors to 
submit themselves to my influence. But as they all wished to 
be spectators, I was compelled to abandon the idea of getting 
an editor asleep. A young printer, Mr. M., responded to my 
request and submitted himself as a subject, on the conditions 
that he was not to be kept under influence for a longer time 
than that agreed upon, and that he should not be exhausted in 
performing too many experiments. After a lapse of about 
seven minutes he was completely hypnotized ; and I then per- 
formed with him a number of interesting experiments, in regard 
to which I quote from an article in the Skandinaven of the 
next day the following : 

Mr. Sextus proved his hypnotic powers by a series of experiments 
in the editorial office of the Skandinaven, among which were the follow- 
ing: A young man was brought into hypnotic sleep. A match was held 
right up before his eyes, and as this did not produce contraction of the 
pupil, it was decided that the sleep was not simulated. During this con- 
dition it was suggested to the hypnotized person, that ten minutes after 



256 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

being awake he would enter the office of the chief editor and shake 
hands with him, at the same time shouting, "Hail and long life for the 
SkandinavenP Mr. M. was then awakened. He declared himself "all 
right;" but after being seated for awhile he commenced to show some 
agitation. When questioned in regard to this, he expressed a sincere 
wish to see the chief editor, and upon entering the office of that gentle- 
man, he did what he was told to do. 

In a seance given at the residence of Mr. W. T. Delihant, 240 
East Indiana street, all the experiments were successful. At a 
second seance at the same place, in accordance with a request 
from Mr. D. who, besides being a successful business man is an 
excellent amateur hypnotist, I performed the following experi- 
ments: I made the subject turn his back on me so that he was 
facing the wall (where there was no mirror) with his eyes 
tightly closed. Then I placed a penholder with a pen between 
my lips having my mind closely concentrated with a view of 
transferring the thought to my subject that he was performing 
the same act and that he could also taste the ink. After two 
minutes the subject commenced to spit continually and, when 
questioned as to his reason for so doing, he answered that 
he had the feeling of having a writing pen in his mouth which 
tasted disagreeable from ink. I influenced the same subject so 
that he expressed my thoughts. 

XI. 

I gave a seance at the residence of Mrs. L. Mason, who is well 
known in Chicago Theosophical circles and who takes a lively 
interest in all occult phenomena. Among others present were 
Mr. Henry C. O. Heineman, editor of the Chicago Press, and 
Colonel Louis Ayme, now at the World's Fair headquarters, 
Mr. Koloman Ritter von Krzisch, Mr. Ed. F. Bideleux, Mr. Her- 
mann Meyer, Mr. R. O. Wardwell and Mr. Charles Matthey. 
I performed successfully several hypnotic experiments similar 
to those already mentioned. As a last number on the program 
of the evening Col. Ayme kindly gave us a surprising evidence 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 



2 57 



of his remarkable psycometric power. I will especially men- 
tion the following experiment: I had in my pocketbook a very 
rare and valuable coin which, shortly before my departure from 
Denmark, was presented to me by a noted Danish landowner. 




DR. CHARCOT EXPERIMENTING IN HYPNOTISM AT THE 
LA SALPETRIERE. 



The detailed circumstances under which this coin was presented 
to me, as well as everything else connected with its history, I 
had never related to anyone in this country. Col. Ayme placed 
the coin in his hand, closed his fingers over it, and asked for a 



258 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

few minutes' silence. Being seated in an easy position, with 
his eyes closed, he described (inside of twelve minutes) the his- 
tory of the coin to the least details; and he even pictured the 
person from whom I had received it — his residence as well as 
its location. 

Mrs. Mason likewise surprised us the same evening with 
some wonderful experiments in Psycometry. 

XII. 

I gave a seance at the residence of Mr. R. J. Francis, editor 
of The Progressive Thinker, 40 Loomis street, where I met 
a sympathetic assembly among whom were Dr. R. Greer, Sr., 
and Rufus H. Bartlett. I hypnotized two ladies and one gen- 
tleman. With the ladies, Mrs. W. and Miss A. M., I performed 
several interesting experiments; but as these were only a repe- 
tition of previously mentioned experiments I will not weary the 
reader in reviewing them here. With the gentleman, Mr. F., 
I performed an experiment of more noteworthy interest. I 
was informed that he had a great devotion for music, and a 
short time ago had purchased a violin; but that as yet he had 
received only a few hours' instruction. Upon my request a vi- 
olin was brought, which I handed to the subject. I now sug- 
gested to him that he was the world-famous Ole Bull, now ap- 
pearing on the brilliantly-lighted stage with a select audience be- 
fore him. I told him to play the "Last Rose of Summer," but 
with such a feeling and melodious harmony as only he, the 
grand master of the violin, was capable of. Earlier in the even- 
ing he had expressed to me his wish to learn especially to play 
this melody. The reader must remember that, in his normal 
condition at this time, he was unable to play the tune mentioned. 
His face took on a serious expression, and, with great dignity, 
he began to tune his instrument. Then he commenced to play 
the c » Last Rose of Summer" with such pathos and excellence 
in performance that an expert musician present declared it to be 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 259 

wonderful, and the whole party of course shared this opinion. 
Mr. Francis, at a later date, reviewed my experiment in his 
paper in terms very nattering to me. 

XIII. 

I gave a second seance at the same place ; when after an 
excellent musical prelude I hypnotized Mrs. H, Concerning 
this entertainment I will simply quote as follows from the 
Progressive Thinker: 

After the music, Mr. Carl Sextus gave a proof of the wonderful 
power of hypnotism. After some very amusing experiments, he 
demonstrated how a hypnotic subject would act under a suggestion, and 
tnat he keeps time after coming out of the hypnotic sleep. 

XIV. 

I gave a seance with Mr. and Mrs. Voorhees, 47 Campbell 
Park, and out of six persons I hypnotized four ladies, with 
whom, in the course of the evening, I performed all the exper- 
iments which it is possible to produce through hypnotism. My 
host and hostess were especially interested in the general suc- 
cess of my experiments, which they had also formerly wit- 
nessed. 

XV., XVI., XVII. 

I gave three seances in Room 33, Central Music Hall 
which was then a general meeting place for societies for Psy- 
chical Research. As it would take up too much space to give 
a full description of the three seances I simply quote from the 
Chicago Tribune in regard to one of them under the heading : 
"His Strange Powers — Remarkable Feats of Prof. Sextus, the 
Hypnotist," the article runs : 

A meeting of the Chicago Psychical Society was held last night in 
Room 33, Central Music Hall, and thirty people witnessed the strange 
performances of a young man and woman, who were successively hyp- 
notized by Prof. C. Sextus. ... In obedience to an order given a 
lady, while in the hypnotic sleep, she arose exactly two minutes after 



26o INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

she opened her eyes, as she had been told, hunted out a person in the 
audience, who had been mentally suggested to her, and shook hands with 
him — apologizing for her boldness. 

XVIII. 

During a seance at the home of Mr. and Mrs. Koehler, 38 
St. Johns Place, Mrs. A., a lady about forty-five years of age, 
was brought into hypnotic sleep. The special feature in the 
case was that this lady, during the sleep, suddenly began to 
speak very loudly of different subjects of a purely personal 
character. The interest increased as she soon talked with her 
own natural voice, then more deep — like a man; then more tim- 
idly, as a boy of fourteen ; and finally in a more murmuring, 
creaking way of expression. At every transition to a new voice 
she changed bearing and expression of countenance. The dif- 
ferent talkings of the lady were questions and answers directed 
to and and responded to by different persons whose voice and 
manners she assumed. 1 was afterwards informed that the 
man's deep voice was a true imitation of her former husband's. 
The timid voice was that of an adopted son, arid the creaking 
voice belonged to a certain attorney. The lady mentioned had 
a short time previously secured a divorce from her husband ; 
and she was then engaged in a suit concerning some property 
to which she claimed a just title. 

I gave a seance at the North Side Turner Hall for the 
Swedish society, " Vikingen," in behalf of founding a Swedish 
reading room. Besides my seance there was a lecture by Mr. 
Robert Lindblom and a quartet song of the "Glee Club." Be- 
fore my seance I gave a brief outline of hypnotism ; and during 
the evening I had the pleasure of producing a line of successful 
experiments with several members of the society. With regard 
to this seance I refer the reader to the Szuedisk American, 
which says, among other things, in a very kind review of my 
experiments : 






INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 26l 

A number of the greatest interest was Mr. Sextus' seance. It was 
successful as usual. Four persons were hypnotized and completely 
under the control of the hypnotists With these Mr. Sextus performed 
the most remarkable experiments; they kissed fancied ladies, rode wildly 
on chairs, which they believed to be racing horses; they swam in an 
imagined lake, and sang French songs, etc. One of the persons hyp- 
notized was brought into the cataleptic condition. Of special interest 
was it when the hypnotist loudly called out the name of a person down 
among the audience, who had previously been hypnotized, and thereby 
caused the hypnose to appear so that it was impossible for him to open 
his eyes, etc. 

I also gave seances at the residence of Mr. Lorenzo Fager- 
steen, Wentworth avenue; for the editors, Jacob Bonggren and 
R. Lindstrand, at the office of the Swedish American, 33 Clark 
street ; and at numerous other places in Chicago. 



PRESS CLUB OF CHICAGO, 
133 CLARK STREET. 

April 22nd, 1890. 
Prof. Carl Sextus, City: 

Dear Sir: As you kindly consented, we have arranged 
for your appearance and cooperation at our fortnightly club 
dinner next Saturday evening, April 26th. We sincerely trust 
nothing will occur to prevent your being present on that 
occasion. 

Enclosed we hand you invitation as issued to members. 

Yours very truly, 

Charles Eugene Banks, ) ~, 

T3 r^ T }■ Committee. 

K. C. JACOBSEN, J 



PRESS CLUB OF CHICAGO. 
133 CLARK STREET. 



April 19th, 1890. 
Dear Sir: You are invited to attend the fortnightly house 
dinner at the Club dining rooms, Saturday evening, April 26th, 
at 5:15 o'clock. 



262 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

The dinner will be supplemented by an exposition of hyp- 
notism by Professor Carl Sextus. Major Jno. C. Bundy will 
deliver a short dissertation on this interesting science. Subjects 
for hypnotic experiment will be selected from the audience. 

The dinner will be equal to those heretofore provided by 
the Steward, and will be under the same conditions. 

If you purpose attending- you are requested to notify the 
Steward before 6 o'clock p. m., Friday, April 25th. Otherwise 
a seat at the table will not be guaranteed. 

Charles Eugene Banks, ) 

R. C. Jacobsen, V Committee. 

Hill C. Smyth, \ 



PRESS CLUB OF CHICAGO, 
133 CLARK STREET. 



May 1st, 1890. 



Mr. Carl Sextus: 

Dear Sir: By order of the Board of Directors of the 
Press Club of Chicago, I am instructed to extend to you its 
cordial thanks for the interesting experiments you so kindly 
made at its last house dinner. 

J. R. Weddell, Secretary. 



interesting cases present themselves daily at my 

office people wish, not merely treatment for 

troublesome diseases, but also apply in order 
to have their talents developed through 

hypnotic influence generally very 

excellent results are reached. 

"The Impossible is never to be found, 
Except, perhaps — in the fool's calendar." 

Of interesting cases where hypnotism can be successfully 
applied, I will state the following : Mr. Geo. L. Bliss, M. D., 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 263 

of Maple Rapids, Mich., together with a colleague, last sum- 
mer entered my office. Mr. B. wished to be hypnojized, as he 
intended in the near future to deliver a series of lectures, and he 
desired to have his oratorical powers developed through hyp- 
notic suggestions. After a lapse of eight minutes I brought 
him into a deep hypnose, during which I suggested to him that 
he inside of two minutes would rise from the chair, and, with 
inspiration, in clear expressive terms, deliver a lecture upon the 
subject which I then named. At the same time I gave him 
the idea that he was then appearing on the stage in Central 
Music Hall before a large and brilliant audience. Mr. Bliss, 
who was fifty-five years of age and strongly built, was in pos- 
session of a very good voice, and without any mispronouncia- 
tion, but did not speak loud enough; besides this he expressed 
himself rather slowly. On this occasion, however, he was an 
accomplished public actor. Before awaking him I suggested to 
him that the next time, under a repeated hypnose, he would 
speak still more freely, and with still more inspiration. 

The next day at the same time we had our second seance to 
which, among others, I had invited Prof. R. A. Campbell, 262 
North State street. The hypnose was produced inside of four 
minutes, and after a few of the more common experiments I 
suggested to him that he was at present in Michigan giving a 
great lecture upon hypnotism. I gave him a few ideas that he 
was to present, whereupon he arose and delivered his lecture — 
not only with great oratorical force, but with such a full voice 
that the other occupants of the house, little by little, gathered at 
the windows and doors in consternation at the thundering tones. 
Even across the street the people enjoyed the free speech. I 
will remark in passing that this was not only a clear and forci- 
ble representation of the subject spoken of, but the philosophy 
was correct and the diction elegant. I only regret that I was 
not in possession of a phonograph, as the lecture was worth 
publishing. Before I awakened Dr. B., I suggested to him that 



264 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

in the future, whenever speaking to a larger audience, he would 
speak as freely and with as much inspiration as on the present 
occasion. This case is not at all a rare one. Mr. W. Howard, 
a young Scotch engineer, came to my office in order to have his 
speaking powers developed through hypnotism. The young 
man, who had a large social acquaintance, was often invited out 
and had, on such occasions, several times attempted to make a 
speech, in which he utterly failed. The engineer, who other- 
wise had a very fine voice, would begin to falter in a very tire- 
some way even during common conversation or upon meeting 
strangers, whose questions he could not answer satisfactorily to 
himself although he could form that answer clearly in his mind. 
Mr. H. was, in the presence of several witnesses, hypnotized by 
me. For the occasion I had an expert shorthand writer pres- 
ent. I let him sleep uninterrupted for about fifteen minutes. 
Then I commanded his full attention, suggesting to him that he 
was now what he had wished to be — an eminent speaker who 
was able to treat fluently any desired subject. I now spoke a 
number of Latin sentences whose sound, under other circum- 
stances, the subject would have been unable to repeat ; but he 
repeated them all correctly and without hesitation. 

I next told him that he was a great speaker, and I placed 
one finger on the top of his head, saying: "You are the Prince 
of Wales now, speak ! You are talking to your court !" 

The subject now stood up, threw back his head, put his hand 
on his chest, and began in a very commanding voice : " My dear, 
honest subjects: It pleases me at this opportunity to see you 
collected here about the throne in loyal respect for the King's 
legal power, you gallant Lords and Knights. The country is in 
danger ; that is why your King has summoned you here so that 
together we can decide how we easiest can chase the enemy out 
of the country " 

I interrupted him, saying: "Now you are an old parish 
clerk in the country ! Speak I" 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 



265 



The subject immediately changed position, shrunk together 
as if old, bent his head, folded his hands and commenced, with a 
changed and shaking voice : " When I speak to you, my dear 
villagers, it is because I know that infidelity has spread itself 




THE ORATOR. 

amongst you, and that licentiousness increases day by day. The 
young people need to be led and advised. I shall do my best 
that you sinners may be brought into the right road. Therefore, 
let me say to you a serious word : Believe in God, trust to the 
Bible, and abandon all the devil's work." 



266 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

Again I tapped the subject on the head and said: "Now you 
are a young gentleman who at a festive entertainment speaks 
to the ladies. Speak !" 

The subject straightened himself into a gentlemanlike 
and graceful position, at the came time speaking with a flu- 
ency that was truly surprising: "Ladies and gentlemen: 
Wherever I direct my gaze in this gathering it is caught by a 
magnet that chains it — that is, the ladies — the pride of the fes- 
tival, queens of the dance ; strains of the music still sound in 
our ears; the bosoms still heave from the electricity of the 
dance, just as our senses are infatuated with the ladies' magnifi- 
cent toilets in their radiant brightness. It is, therefore, no 
wonder that we are infatuated. Perhaps we are still more so 
when we see the woman occupy herself in her home* I pre- 
sume we all strive to obtain that ideal, but the ideal ceases to be 
an ideal when it is reached and obtained. It is only the strug- 
gle for it that gives substance to life." 

I once more tapped the subject on the head and said: 
" Now you are a nonsensical alderman, a grocer, who is going 
to speak in the town council. Speak !" 

The subject put both hands in his pockets, assumed a tough 
air and began : " Yes, gentlemen, what I wish to propose, is 
zhat I may have a lamp-post put in front of my house. It is 
very necessary. It is just like this, for instance: sometime ago 
my roomer came home, and he was — with all due respect to 
him — what will I call it, feeling a little gay? Well, you need 
not laugh, gentlemen, for that is liable to happen to any of us. 
But as I said, my roomer had quite an accident because there 
was no gaslight." I let the subject assume several other charac- 
ters and then awakened him. 

PECULIAR DOUBLE STATE DURING THE HYPNOTIC CONDITION. 

Joseph Singer, a professor of music, came to my office and 
requested me to hypnotize his son Walfried, whom he had 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 



267 



heretofore in vain attempted to get under hypnotic influence. 
He had consulted several of the most noted hypnotists in 
America in connection with well-know physicians, but without 
result. The last he saw in regard to this case was the highly 
esteemed C. G.Davis, M. D.,of this city. The reason why Mr. 
Singer wished his son to be hypnotized was of a private charac- 
ter which I will not mention here. Among other things that 
Mr. Singer wished me to do by the aid of hypnotism, was to 
suggest to his son (who had a natural talent for music) that he 




FACE MUSCLES CATALEPTIC CANNOT CLOSE THEIR MOUTHS. 



devote himself in the future, with more interest and industry to 
his musical studies. After several seances we perceived an 
evident effect of the hypnotic suggestions. He played now at 
the certain fixed hours, and seemingly with far greater interest. 
After a periodical hypnotization during several months, we 
reached the desired result. 

Concerning the Singer boy and his double state during the 
hypnose, I will remark that this condition with hypnotized 
individuals (hereby to be understood, persons who during the 



268 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

sleep speak of themselves as an entirely different person) 
appears but seldom. As soon as Walfried Singer was brought 
into hypnotic condition, he was subject to a great change in 
every direction. The boy, who in his normal condition was 
rather wild, became during the hypnotic sleep serious, and 
acted exactly like a grown-up person, in manners, attitude and 
ready answers. Among several curious things, I briefly men- 
tion the following. To my question whether he had arisen at 
the right time in the morning or given any attention to his play- 
ing, he would generally sit down in silence and listen to my 
words for some time and then suddenly reply (as if he were 
another person — not Walfried): "O, yes, I notice you are 
again speaking of this Singer boy. Yes, he is undoubtedly 
rather wild. He ought to become straitened somewhat, he has 
too much of a good time, that boy." Or he would say some- 
thing like this : " Lazy fellow, that Singer boy. Rather irreg- 
ular in everything he undertakes, and a little unreliable." At 
other times he would sit from ten to fifteen minutes talking in 
a whisper to himself as if philosophizing about the boy that he 
had heard mentioned. 

To my question whether he was acquainted with this boy — ■ 
as he seemed to take some interest in him — his eyes lightened 
up; he raised his voice, and humming a couple of tunes, said : 
" Certainly I know this Singer boy, as I have said before ; but 
if you have a special desire to get a description of his appear- 
ance, then listen : For his age he is not very tall ; his face is 
roundly shaped ; he is strongly developed — better formed than 
his father ; he used to wear long hair which was very thick and 
pretty — it has been cut short now, to his great dissatisfaction. 
But he has no idea, that boy, of what is best for him." After 
some few minutes reflection he continued in the following way : 
" Yes, as I say, it may be of some good to a fellow to have his 
hair cut short ; but I cannot see why his hair must be an inch 
long in front, when it is cut to a regular shave about the ears. 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 269 

But let the boy and the father decide these things." Then fol- 
lowed an exact description of his apparel. He also remarked 
that his nose was a little clumsy, the eyes rather beautiful, the 
upper lip a little too large — but not to such an extent as to in- 
terfere with his beauty. Finally he gave his weight, going 
into the very details, naming pound, ounces and drachms, and 
concluded in this way : " Taken altogether, he is good looking 
that boy; and he may have a future; but, as I said, he must be 
kept strictly in reins. But, mark you well my words, only to a 
certain extent shall he be kept strictly. He must not be forced ; 
we must take into consideration that he is yet only a boy of 
eleven years; and how much can we expect, anyhow, of a 
child at his age? He must be treated with reason, although 
closely watched and kept on duty." 

The boy showed also, during the hypnose, a double condi- 
tion, which is not only interesting, but at the same time rare. 
A similar example is the French somnambulist, Leonice, de- 
scribed by Liebault and Bernheim (Nancy) and others. 

As a proof of Prof. Joseph Singer's great interest in the 
case and of his appreciation of the treatment given his son, I 
take the liberty of quoting an extract from his article, which 
appeared in the Progressive Thinker, November 7, 1891 : 

Due to the kindness of the Progressive Thinker^ I am privileged to 
refer to Mr. Sextus, the well-known Danish hypnotist. I do this with 
double interest, as I am proud to acknowledge him as my personal 
friend, and am still gladder to yield the tribute of my opinion of him as 
a profound investigator and an exceedingly skillful practitioner of his 
wonderful science. Mr. Sextus is too thoroughly honest to ever de- 
scend to the trickery of the stage fakir. The "I don't know" or "I 
believe" carry more conviction to me than the dogmatic assumptions of 
many spiritualists; for they reveal the genuine modesty and true under- 
standing of a deep thinker. I have personal knowledge of some of his 
remarkable experiments, and I am now watching the development of a 
psychic transformation under his influence which, when it is perfected, 
I will reveal to the readers of the Progressive Thinker. In the mean- 
time I would advise all those whom these lines will reach to test Mr. 
Sextus' wonderful hypnotic powers. Joseph Singer. 



270 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

THE FACTS SHOW THAT THE MAJORITY OF PEOPLE CAN BE 
HYPNOTIZED IF NOT IMMEDIATELY, BY THE FIRST AT- 
TEMPT, THEY CAN ALWAYS BE MORE OR LESS INFLU- 
ENCED BY REPEATED EXPERIMENTS AT LEAST 

SIXTY PER CENT. CAN BE HYPNOTIZED IF THE 
RIGHT METHOD IS EMPLOYED AND THE 

PARTY CONCERNED IS WILLING YOUNG 

AND VIGOROUS PEOPLE IN GEN- 
ERAL ARE MOST SUSCEPTIBLE 
TO HYPNOTISM. 

The public has in general the idea that people who per- 
form much brain work cannot be hypnotized. Such an idea is 
erroneous ; the person who performs work that demands 
much thinking can be hypnotized as easily as another who per- 
forms physical labor, if he willingly submits himself to the ex- 
periments and abandons disturbing thoughts. 

Among cases which have presented themselves during my 
practice in Chicago, apt to illustrate my expressions, I will 
briefly notice a few. Theo. B. Thiele, the editor of Germania, 
appeared at my office, together with a friend of his, in order, as 
he himself expressed it, " to investigate the hypnotic phenomena 
and their general results." Mr. Thiele had read several 
works upon hypnotism and tried repeatedly to be hypnotized 
by a couple of traveling hypnotizers; but without success. 
After a brief interval he requested me to bring him under hyp- 
notic influence, although he seemed to be rather skeptical as to 
its accomplishment ; but he pronounced himself willing to sub- 
mit to my instructions. That he, as a gentleman, meant this 
exactly, I understood by his manner and the good will he 
showed for the desired result. The editor did not this time go 
away disappointed, for fifteen minutes of earnest endeavor suc- 
ceeded in getting him completely hypnotized. 

It was not only his body, muscles and Mood circulation that 
I was able to influence, but I could also direct the course of his 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 2 1 ]! 

thoughts, so as to produce any hallucination wished for by me 
or by his friend then present. Before awakening Mr. T., I 
suggested to him that at a certain time after awaking he should 
say a few words upon hypnotism, at the same time giving his 
friend his hand. Everything came to pass in close exactness 
to the order given. Eight and a half minutes after being awak- 
ened, Mr. T. raised to his feet, walked across the floor, shook 
hands with his friend, and in his full voice expressed the ideas 
suggested. Mr. T. and his friend left my office highly satisfied 
with the seance. As I afterwards hypnotized Mr. T. a couple 
of times, the hypnose was more easily as well as more rapidly 
produced. Ge?'mania contained several interesting articles about 
my experiments and methods of cure. 

Mr. N., an elderly well-known reporter for the Chicago 
Tribune, was also hypnotized with great success at my office. 
Mr. N. had for a long time been suffering from a painful rheu- 
matism, and had unsuccessfully resorted to all the modern medi- 
cines. Mr. N. was completely hypnotized at my first seance, 
and I suggested to him then during the sleep, that he after being 
awakened would feel much better, be relieved from the rheu- 
matic pain, and be able to walk home with natural ease. When 
Mr. N., in company with a couple of friends, appeared at my 
office it was only with the greatest difficulty that he was able 
to move his limbs ; after the hypnotization Mr. N. was once 
more able to master his arms and legs, while the pain had dis- 
appeared. 

Mr. P. H., engaged with the Chicago Press, who had never 
been hypnotized before, was brought under influence by me at 
the second experiment. He was suffering from nervous head- 
ache and periodical neuralgia ; but after the treatments he de- 
clared himself entirely relieved from his sufferings. 

Mrs. D. A., a well-known Chicago physician, with an office 
in the Masonic Temple, was brought into hypnose at my first 
experiment. She was afterwards hypnotized a couple of times 



272 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

and after three treatments was restored to health from nervous 
suffering. 

Dr. T. N., a well-known homoeopathic physician, who was 
periodically a sleep-walker, and had a nervous, faltering way of 
speaking, was treated by me six times with excellent results. 
He has abandoned his sleep-walking and enjoys now a com- 
plete control over his voice. 

A young Board of Trade man, who for a space of five years 
had been devoted to the use of morphia, I cured inside of a 
month by tri- weekly treatments. 

A noted attorney from Omaha, who was in the habit of 
smoking from fifteen to twenty cigars a day, was, after five 
treatments, able to control his great desire for tobacco; and of 
late he smokes only three cigars a day — sometimes even less. 
For reasons of his own he did not wish to have the desire for 
tobacco completely abolished. 

An elderly gentleman had been partially lame since 1862 ; 
he could only with the greatest difficulty walk about in his room 
with the aid of crutches. I succeeded in fifteen days daily treat- 
ments in restoring his limbs to their normal use. 

A young lady, twenty-one years of age, who suffered from 
melancholia and who had tried all known remedies without 
benefit, I cured in seven treatments, restoring her to a happier 
mood of life. 

In the same way I have cured numerous persons of painful 
diseases, such as nervous deafness, weakness of mind, neuralgia, 
bad digestion, sleep-walking, etc. At different places in this 
book I have mentioned the diseases which we are able to cure 
by the aid ofj hypnotism, as well as the methods employed, 
and will not enter any further upon this subject. 

MANY PROMINENT MEN THROUGHOUT THE COUNTRY ARE 
DEEPLY INTERESTED IN HYPNOTIC PHENOMENA. 

Among these I would especially mention Hon. Lyman J. 
Gage, president of the First National Bank of Chicago. Mr. 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 2J3 

Gage, who is a man of rare amiability and courtesy, has, during 
my stay in Chicago, shown me much kindly attention and hos- 
pitality. In the library of Mr. Gage's elegant North-side resi- 
dence I have passed many interesting evenings, where our con- 
versation always turned to hypnotic and occult phenomena.. 
Mr. Gage, who possesses hypnotic power and skill in no lim- 
ited degree, has for a number of years studied everything con- 
cerning hypnotism, and I have found in his library nearly every 
work published on the subject. That a business man like Mr. 
Gage, who has most of his time completely occupied with so 
many different and complicated business transactions, still finds 
ample time and opportunity for devotion to art and science, is 
more than pleasing. In relation to experiments in mind-read- 
ing, or thought-transference, so often discussed in our papers 
and magazines of late, I take pleasure in stating that several 
times, during my meetings with Mr. Gage, I have received the 
most satisfactory proof of his remarkable ability in this line. 
Mr. Gage has, in connection with his clear, keen sense, an un- 
usually quick perception ; but this is not sufficient to account for 
the results observed. Mr. Gage is sensitive to a high degree, 
and he feels intuitively (if I may so express it) what people 
wish, and he is very often able to name in advance exactly what 
is desired by the party in question. As I am myself very sens- 
itive I have personally, in Mr. Gage's home, had the most un- 
mistakable proofs of his ability. Mr. Gage has, whenever we 
touched upon this subject, declared that this remarkable ability 
has been of great usefulness and help to him in his position as 
a banker. 

EVEN IN THE NINETEENTH CENTURY WE FIND PEOPLE IN 
CHICAGO WHO CONSIDER HYPNOTISM DEMONIACAL. 

I delivered some time ago in the southwest part of Chicago 
a public lecture upon hypnotism accompanied by experiments. 
The audience was large, and my experiments were exceedingly 



274 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

successful. Beyond doubt the people in that part of the city 
entertained some queer ideas of hypnotism. After some parley 
with the audience, about twenty young men appeared on the 
platform in order to submit to my experiments. After being 
seated I was greatly surprised to see a couple of fellows take 
from their pockets some lemons which, in accordance with some 
ceremonies to me unknown, they cut into pieces. With these 
they carefully rubbed their temples, forehead, etc. ; even their 
poorly-blacked shoes did not miss this peculiar treatment. These 
mystic experiments I learned later were supposed to be safe- 
guards against my hypnotic influence. Another young gen- 
tleman, who was seemingly well-built, had a prominence on his 
chest which looked like a deformity. Later in the evening I 
succeeded in bringing this gentleman, among others, into hyp- 
notic sleep, and I suggested to him that it was unbearably hot, 
when he removed his coat and vest. There was much merri- 
ment in the audience when a couple of thick copper plates, some 
roofing zinc, and a large horseshoe dropped to the floor with 
resounding noise. This gentleman was evidently very well 
prepared; and as he now had once more regained his good fig- 
ure I asked him to put on his clothes, and placed in his hands 
the protecting amulets. I now exclaimed, loudly, "Awake!" 
and the expression of his consternation when beholding in his 
hands these things can better be imagined than described. This 
genius was the famous ever-talking barber of the street, who 
was generally called " The Dramatic," a name he acquired on 
account of his continued but ever- failing efforts as a manager of 
an amateur stage. I never learned whether some silly person 
had given him this suggestion or if it was only a joke played 
upon him ; but the report was that the barber had been so highly 
assured of his unsusceptibility that he lost a bet which he had 
made with a tailor living across the street. That I was able, 
during the hypnose, completely to check this barber's incessant 
talking created much astonishment throughout the entire neigh- 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 



2 75 




276 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 

borhood. I am naturally very fond of children, but I discov- 
ered to my great surprise that wherever I appeared on the street 
the children hurried away, stopping their play, ceasing their 
merry laughter, "while they sought shelter in the doors and 
alleys. A tall boy about ten years old, who had the courage to 
stare at me in daring proximity, was taken into the house by his 
anxious mother. Polish, Bohemian and Italian women crossed 
themselves solemnly whenever I passed them during my stay in 
that locality. Later on I heard that I was used as a bug-a-boo 
by the worthy mothers ; when the little children preferred to 
cry evenings instead of sleeping, they were told to be quiet, 
otherwise Sextus would be called. The suggestion to the 
children, I am told, had an almost magic effect. 

THE VISIBLE SYMPTOMS IN PARTIAL AND PERFECT HYPNOSE. 

It is a fact that the subjects in the first degrees of the hyp- 
nose are, in many directions, very sensitive, especially to a sud- 
den noise or to a momentary strong light directed upon the 
pupils of the eyes. In many cases the pupils are more dilated 
than usual ; in others more contracted. 'But even with those 
persons whose pupils are much dilated, it very often hap- 
pens that we notice a contraction by approximation of a lighted 
candle. The pupils, however, are not in general so easily influ- 
enced as when the person is in the usual condition; and even 
these people whose retina can be easily effected by sudden 
strong light are at the same time in other directions insensible 
to push, sting, pinch, etc. After being awakened they are often 
entirely without recollection of the experiments performed during 
the hypnotic condition. In the deepest hypnose, when the pupil 
is almost insensible to the light and when we are able to affect 
the pulse and temperature, the remembrance as to what was 
going on during the sleep, has disappeared ; but as we know 
the next hypnose will produce the remembrance as to what 
occurred during the previous one ; while the subject in the inter- 



INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO. 277 

jacent awake condition does not remember anything. In other 
cases again the hypnose appears as if there was no unconscious- 
ness whatever^ and the subject seems to be in every particular 
like one in a normal condition. 

Concerning hypnotism, in general, I allow myself to give 
the following advice : One should not allow himself to be hypno. 
tized or treated by an operator in whom he has not confidence. 
The hypnotist ought to be experienced and thoroughly under- 
stand what he undertakes. Especially must the patient have a 
little knowledge of the character and the principles of the hyp- 
notizer before he yields to his treatment, and never forget to 
have friends or acquaintances present during the hypnotization. 
Concerning the power of hypnotization, the majority of people 
can more or less influence each other ; but it may be said of this 
power, as of many others, that some people have a greater apt- 
ness than others to make good hypnotists. Of the principal 
conditions I will especially mark a healthy constitution, a strong 
will in connection with power of concentrating it. It is of great 
benefit also if the party concerned has received both theoretical 
and practical training. 

As a matter of fact, hypnotism then is not merely for pleas- 
ure and entertainment, but, as formerly remarked, of great 
value as a remedy for different diseases. The prejudice toward 
hypnotism as a means of entertainment is too pronounced. 
When the hypnotization is skillful, by an expert operator, 
there is no danger whatever. It has been a necessity for me 
and other pioneers in the field of hypnotism, at public and pri- 
vate seances, to bring the great public into a closer contact with 
this matter. In this way we have gained more than people in 
general apprehend ; because we have effected, through the 
great public, a certain pressure on the medical profession, the 
result of which has been that a great many celebrated physi- 
cians, who had time and opportunity to devote themselves to 
the study of hypnotism, thereby became convinced of the 



278 INTRODUCTION OF HYPNOTISM IN CHICAGO, 

great benefit that medical science derives therefrom. Further- 
more, the masses, as well as the profession, have a right to be 
informed of every discovery which appears in this field. 

Tn this country, as well as in Europe, I have found physi- 
cians who have shown practical interest in the matter. Among 
others, in several highly esteemed European scientific periodicals, 
which in very flattering terms have spoken of my practice as a 
hypnotist in the medical territory.. I will name Ugebladet for 
Lceger, issued by the Danish Medical Association, with Dr. M. 
D. V. Budde, Copenhagen, Denmark, as chief editor (No. 1-2, 
January 2, 1887, and No. 34-35, December 3, 1887). In the 
same way has the well-known scientific periodical, Hospital 
Tideitde^ Copenhagen, contained a long article upon " Hypno- 
tism and Suggestion," in which I was mentioned in a very flat- 
tering way. The chief editor of this magazine is Dr. M. D. C. 
Lange, professor at the University of Copenhagen, and well- 
known throughout the entire civilized world. Others of the 
editorial members are Dr. D. J. Bondesen, Dr. A. Friedenreich, 
Dr. E. Ingerslev. That hypnotism was not forgotten after my 
departure from Denmark is clearly proven by this article 
which appeared in the magazine mentioned eight months there- 
after. If, as I hope, in this work, and in a way as entertaining 
as I could make it, I have been able to arouse a deeper and 
broader interest in this cause; and if hypnotism in the future 
may be given the place and appreciation so justly its due, my 
zeal is satisfied and my aim fulfilled. In conclusion, I will 
allow myself to cite the following words of Victor Hugo : 

The real is narrow — 

The possible . . . immense. 



Public Press Comments. 




HE press has always 
been most kind to 
me. Editors and re- 
porters have ever looked 
leniently upon my 
shortcomings ; and they 
%tg- have used good spec- 
tacles when their atten- 
tion has been given to 
my merits. That my 
readers may know how 
my work is regarded and 
valued by the newspaper world, 
I herewith present a few ex- 
tracts from the multitudinous per- 
sonal notices of myself and my science which have recently 
appeared in the public press. 



Extract from a four column article in the Chicago Herald, 
January 26, 1890: 

SECRETS OF HYPNOTISM — SOME PRACTICAL ILLUSTRATIONS — PROFESSOR 

CARL SEXTUS, OF CHICAGO, GIVES AN EXHIBITION OF HIS 

STRANGE POWER — HISTORY OF A MYSTERIOUS BRANCH 

OF SCIENCE — CURING NERVOUS DISEASES. 

In the window of a house on Wabash avenue, not far from the 
Auditorium building, a little square, black sign with white letters peeps 
out upon the passers-by and conveys the information that within is the 
abode of "Carl Sextus, Hypnotist." It is in this modest fashion that 
hypnotism, perhaps the greatest discovery of science, makes its bow to 
Chicago. 

281 



282 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 



Carl Sextus is a small man with a light brown mustache — a man who 
would pass through a throng unnoticed, unless you caught sight of his 
eye. If by chance your eye should meet his, you might not feel a trem- 
bling in your limbs, but you certainly would say to yourself: " Here is a 
remarkable man." For his eye is one of those things which possess a 
strange fascination for the beholder. As an organ of vision it perhaps 
does not differ from others. It is brown in color and the pupil is large 
and healthy looking. Thousands of men in Chicago have similar eyes. 
But this ,eye has a mysterious power, which is felt by every one who is 
fixed with it This power the most learned physician would despair of 
locating and describing, and it has no scientific name. Still, it exists. 
It is the power that comes as the result of years of constant command. 

It probably gleamed in the 
eyes of Csesar and Napoleon. 
But there is the difficulty. Na- 
poleon swayed men's bodies; 
the hypnotist dominates men's 
minds. The subject obeyed 
the commands of the emperor 
because he knew that it was to 
the interest of his peace and 
happiness not to disobey him 
who had power to kill or tor 
ture him; the subject obeys 
Carl Sextus because he cannot 
help it. 

A few evenings ago Mr. 
Sextus gave a private seance 
to which reporters from the 
The room in which the ex- 




FROM LETHARGY TO CATALEPSY. 



Herald were invited, among others, 
periments took place did not differ from the ordinary parlor. In 
one corner stood a piano, a marble-topped table occupied the center 
of the apartment, and two or three indifferent paintings adorned the 
walls. The guests were grouped around the sides of the room in 
chairs. The seance began without preparation of any sort. As none 
of those present were willing to be operated upon, the experiments 
necessarily were confined to the person of one of Mr. Sextus* patients, 
a woman about twenty-one years of age. She was apparently of a san- 
guine temperament, having a very fair complexion, light yellow hair and 
pale blue eyes. She said that she had been hypnotized on several occa- 
sions, and was a good subject. This assertion Mr. Sextus confirmed. 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 



283 



The subject, who was called Marie, placed herself in an easy chair and 
assumed the most comfortable position. The operator then placed in 
her hands a small metal button, painted black with the exception of the 
center, which was of the color of silver. She was now requested to fix 
her gaze upon the bright center of this disk, and to concentrate her 
mind upon the idea of sleep. The operator stood in front of her, and 
began, in a low tone of voice, to repeat Bernheim's formula: 

"Think of nothing but sleep. Your eyelids begin to reel heavy. 
Your eyes are tired. They begin to wink, they are getting moist; you 
cannot see distinctly. Your lids are closing, you cannot open them 
again. Your arms feel heavy, so do your legs. You cannot feel any- 
thing. Your hands are mo- 
tionless You see nothing. 
You are going to sleep. Sleep !" 

In five and one-half min- 
utes the subject was found to 
be asleep. Her eyes were 
closed, she breathed heavily 
and regularly — in short, all 
the phenomena of sleep were 
present. 

"But," objected one of the 
spectators, "she is not really 
asleep. It is impossible that 
she should go to sleep so 
quickly. She is only simulat- 
ing sleep." 

Mr. Sextus said nothing, 
but quietly raised the subject's 
arm until it was stretched out 
on a level with the shoulder. THE SOMNAMBULIC STATE. 

"You cannot lower you arm," he said to the subject; "it is immova- 
ble." The arm remained in the position in which the man had placed it. 
"Now," he added to the person who had spoken, "feel of her arm. You 
will see that the muscles are rigid, tetanized. She cannot move it. It is 
cataleptic." 

The objector examined the arm. The muscles were fixed and hard 
and it was impossible to bend it without using such great force as might 
break it. There was no doubt of the truth of what the hypnotist had said. 

"Lower youarm," said the operator. The muscles relaxed, and the 
arm fell to the side. 




284 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 



"A very sad thing has occurred," the operator continued. "One of 
you' friends has just died." Tears began to flow from Marie's ^eyes. "It 
is a mistake, a false report that has been brought me. Yoi# friend has 
recovered and is now quite well." The tears stopped instantly. In like 
manner the subject was made to laugh and to sing. Various hallucina- 
tion were produced and finally entire catalepsy. The subject was placed 
on two chairs, which supported her heels and the back of her head, as 
illustrated in an accompanying picture. The muscles of the body were 

perfectly rigid, and even the 
greatest pressure did not avail 
to bend the frame. The hyp- 
nosis was complete. After a 
number of equally interesting 
experiments, such as compel- 
ling Marie to believe that am- 
monia was cologne, and stick- 
ing needles through her flesh 
the operator said: 

"In five minutes you will 
awake and you will see all of 
those who were present ex- 
cept Mr. M. [designating one 
of the reporters]. Three min- 
vtes after you awake you will 
take that vase which you see 
on the mantel and hand it to 
Mr. C." 

In exactly five minutes the 
subject stretched herself, 
yawned and awoke. She had 
absolutely no recollection of 
what had passed, and even 
denied that she had been asleep. In just three minutes she arose, 
went to the mantel-piece, took down the vase and handed it to Mr. C, 
saying: "I think this is such a pretty vase, don't you?" Thus she 
attempted to find an excuse for the impulse she felt but could not ex- 
plain. Presently she turned to Mr. Sextus and said: "Why, what has 
become of Mr. M.? He was here a few minutes ago. Did he have to 
go so soon?" At this time Mr. M. was in plain view not three feet 
away. "Yes," replied the operator, "he was called away." Then, turn- 
ing suddenly, ne added: "Why, he did not go, after all. There he sits," 




CATALEPTIC AND SOMNAMBULIC. 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 285 

pointing to M. "Sure enough," promptly said Marie; "but he was not 
here a moment since. Where have you been, Mr. M.?" 

On another occasion Mr. Sextus hypnotized two little girls, aged 
respectively six and seven years. All that was required to put them 
into the hypnotic state was to close their eyes and tell them they were 
asleep. They were now in what is known as the lethargic condition. 
They answered questions and did whatever they were told to do. The 
operator placed his hands on their heads and immediately they became 
somnambulists. Now Sextus told them that the sky was open and that 
they could see beautiful flowers, trees and fountains, and hear the sing- 
ing of the birds. They looked up and saw and heard these things. It 
was at this moment that the photograph from which the accompanying 
illustration is made was taken. The expression in the faces of the 
children is rapt and beautiful. The operator said to them: "The skies 
have closed." They no longer saw the flowers, and the music ceased for 
them. On being awakened, they remembered nothing. The same little 
girls were the next day cast into lethargy. Sextus opened their eyelids 
and they remained open. They were now in the cataleptic stage of the 
hypnotic condition. One of them was placed on two chairs, as in the 
picture, and the other was made to assume a rigid position on the pros- 
trate body of the first. Thus they remained immovable while the pho- 
graph was being taken. 

It is not possible here to give instances of diseases cured by hypnotism. 
It is sufficient to say that all diseases of the nervous system yield readily 
to the treatment by suggestion. Not the least important fact in connec- 
tion with it is that drunkards and opium eaters are cured in a wonder- 
fully short time. In insomnia it never fails. The time is not far distant 
when the American medical profession will be compelled to take it up, 
though up to this time their lack of information has deprived them of 
its benefits — Barrett Eastman. 



Extract from a three-column article in the Chicago Sunday 
jPress, November 22, 1891 : 

HYPNOTIC INFLUENCES — AN EVENING WITH DR. SEXTUS — A CHILD IS 
MADE TO BELIEVE AMMONIA IS COLOGNE — A WHOLE 
CLASS HYPNOTIZED — MADE TO CALL AT A 
CERTAIN HOUSE NEXT DAY. 

Picture a young man of a trifle more than medium height; muscu- 
lar, well-balanced figure; head well set, and with clean-cut, handsome 



2 86 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 



features * a high, wide sweep of intellectual forehead; dark-brown hair, 
and eyes that can blaze with fire or be as soft and limpid as a girl's. 
That is Carl Sextus. 

Dr. Sextus, who early made a study* of the phenomenon of hypno- 
tism, astonished the students and scientists of Europe with the display 
of his powers. For the last two and a half years he has been a resident 
of the United States, and for twelve months or more has lived in Chi- 
cago, being now located at No. 179 La Salle avenue. 

He has given several exhibitions of his powers in this city. One of 
the most interesting, particularly in its after results, was at the home of 

a North sider a few days ago. 
There were twenty or more 
people present. As a prelim- 
inary proceeding, each person 
who was willing to subject 
himself to the hypnotic force 
was given a circular disk of 
polished zinc, with a center of 
copper. The disks were pos- 
sibly two inches in circumfer- 
ence, and the candidates for 
hypnosis, sixteen in number, 
were told to hold them in the 
palms of their hands and look 
at them intently for ten min- 
utes. Ten minutes is a long 
time. In less than five, six 
persons gave unmistakable 
evidence of an abnormal 
mental condition. Three 
young men and a girl of per- 
haps 14 years were sent 
into a hypnotic sleep, from 
which they drifted into the somnambulistic state. The only experiment 
of interest in which the girl was a participant consisted of a suggestion 
by Dr. Sextus that a phial of ammonia contained perfumery. The bot- 
tle was held beneath the girl's nose, and as she became conscious of the 
presence of the ammonia she expressed the liveliest gratification. As a 
matter of fact the fumes would almost cause a brazen image to shed 
tears. At the request of the child's parents she was relieved of the in- 
fluence, and remained a spectator of the ensuing incidents. 




THOUGHT IT SMELLED SWEETLY. 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 



287 



The three young men as subjects were all that a hypnotist could 
wish. When aroused from their lethargy they obeyed the slightest 
suggestion of Dr. Sextus as if they were automata of which he held 
the controlling strings. 

After twenty minutes or more, during which the young men were 
thrown into cataleptic conditions and made to act under all manner of 
hallucinations, Dr. Sextus entered upon a series of supreme tests of his 
art. To one of his subjects he said sharply and distinctly : " Five min- 
utes after you awaken, go to the piano and sing « Die Lorelei,' " 

To the second he said: "While your friend is singing, steal his 
handkerchief from his pocket 
and hide it. Don't let any one 
see you do it." 

The third was informed 
that precisely ten minutes 
after he was awakened his 
right hand would close with 
cramp and he could not open 
it. The suggestions were re- 
peated to each three times, and 
with a few passes of his hands 
and a peremptory command 
they were aroused. 

The conversation was gen- 
eral for a time, several persons, 
unobserved by the subjects, 
holding watches Exactly at 
the elapse of the five minutes 
the musician, with a request 
that he be pardoned for inter- 
rupting the talk, walked 

over to the piano and began 

. . , t ,. A CATALEPTIC HAND. 

" Ich weiss nicht was soil 

es bedeuten" to his own accompaniment. Then the sneak-thief saun- 
tered over and, backing up against his friend, scientifically " nipped " the 
handkerchief according to direction, and, with affected unconcern, 
strolled into an adjoining room and hid it. Meantime the third patient 
was enjoying the situation. He had been told of the injunctions laid 
upon his fellow subjects, but was not informed that he was 'also under 
orders. At the last second of the ten minutes an expression of intense 




288 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 



suffering came over his face, and he cried out that his hand had cramped 
and he could not open it. 

Dr. Sextus presently released the sufferer. None of the subjects 
could give any connected statement of what they had done while in the 
hypnotic state. They had felt a sensation of dizziness and a succession 
of slight chills, after which the disks which they held had faded from 
sight. Of subsequent events they had but confused recollections. 
Again one of them was subjected to the hypnotic influence. 
"To-morrow at 2 o'clock," said Dr, Sextus, "you will call at this 

house, take a seat between two persons — who were named and fall 

asleep. You can be awakened 
only by these two men reach- 
ing over you and shaking 
hands." 

It may be said here that 
the proceeding was exactly as 
indicated. At the appointed 
hour the young man, who had 
never been at the house until 
the night before, walked in 
like a member of the family 
and, speaking to the five or six 
members of the last night's 
party, sat down between the 
men as directed. All ordinary 
methods, such as loud calls and 
violent shakings, had no effect ; 
he slumbered on with remark- 
able persistence. Then the 
two to whom Dr. Sextus had 
transferred the controlling 
power clasped hands over the 
sleeping man and he at once 
awoke. He was much surprised upon learning where he was. He had 
no recollection of what had passed after i o'clock. About that time he 
felt a slight dizziness, which was succeeded by an absence of conscious- 
ness. 

To return to the parlor experiments. Dr. Sextus 5 culminating effort 
was phenomenal. He created a physiological paradox. One of the subjects 
was placed in a lethargic condition and his pulse and temperature was 
taken. With his hand resting upon the young man's head, Sextus 6aid: 




BELIEVES HIMSELF A CRIPPLE. 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 289 

" I wish your temperature to fall and jour pulsations increase." 
Within four minutes the pulse had increased in rapidity from 95 to 120 
beats to the minute. An application of the thermometer showed that the 
physical temperature had decreased 2.2 degrees, having fallen 
from 98 to 9$.8 degrees. Then the action was reversed. The pulse was 
lowered to 80 beats and the temperature sent to 101 degrees. 

Then followed several experiments in which the power of the hyp- 
notist to transfer the control of the subject to another person was 
demonstrated. 

The series was concluded by Dr. Sextus obliterating from the mem- 
ory of one of the subjects all recollection of the events of the evening. 
"You have had a pleasant evening," said the hypnotist, "but beyond 
remembering that fact, you will be unable to recall anything that has 
transpired." Although repeatedly questioned that night and on subse- 
quent days, the subject could recall nothing; not even the place where 
he spent the evening. A few days later Dr. Sextus gave an exhibition 
of clairvoyance. A young lady was thrown into a somnambulistic state 
and in this condition gave detailed accounts of the doings of absent per- 
sons and descriptions of places she had never seen. 

Some of her descriptions of places, particularly those wherewith any 
of her auditors were familiar, were tolerably correct. 

"I recognize three degrees or conditions in the hypnotic state," 
continued Dr. Sextus, "these are the lethargic, somnambulistic and 
cataleptic. The lethargy is first produced, then either of the others at 
will. Hypnotists whose instincts are purely commercial, claim that 
they are able to cure all manner of diseases by the exercise of their 
powers. Organic diseases cannot be cured by means of hypnotism. A 
disordered tissue will not regenerate itself in obedience to command. 
I might, for instance, make a crippled patient believe that his amputa- 
ted arm had grown out again, but I could not make the new arm develop. 

"With nervous maladies it is different. These succumb more readily 
to hypnotism than to drugs. In the one case the cure is permanent, in 
the latter the relief is often but temporary. In Sweden and in Den- 
mark I had much success in treating victims of dipsomania, both in and 
out of the hospitals. Old men and the youth of both sexes, that is per- 
sons between the ages of sixteen and twenty years, I find, are the most 
readily controlled. Out of every three or four persons who submit 
themselves one subject is generally found. This is about the proportion 
although in exhibitions among students in European schools I have 
found as many as fifty subjects among sixty young men, with whom I 
experimented. In America I have found that a great many people who 



29O PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 

applv for hypnotic treatment do so not from any necessity for it, but 
because they have a craving for a new sensation." 

In Chicago Dr. Sextus has made one remarkable cure of the habit 
of drinking, and that without the knowledge of the patient. 

At one of his exhibitions there appeared a man of middle age. He 
had been suffering from rheumatism in the region of the heart and his 
physician prescribed port wine as a remedial agent. The malady dis- 
appeared, but the love of wine remained. Dr. Sextus hypnotized or 
magnetized the man — whatever you will — and at the request of his 
friends said: 

"If you attempt to drink wine or any liquor containing alcohol, it will 
make you sick." 

The subject was then aroused and nothing said to him about the ex- 
periment, except that he had succumbed to the doctor's personality. 

The following morning as usual, a bottle of wine was set at his 
plate. He poured out a glassful, but could not drink it. Since that 
time he has had no desire for the wine which was before a daily neces- 
sity, and when he has attempted to take a drink in a social way he has 
been utterly unable to do so. Dr. Sextus attempts no explanation of 
these phenomena. He simply says, "These are the facts." — Wm. E. 
Lewis. 

f^rom Chicago Sunday Tribune, February 23, 1890: 

EXPERIMENTS IN HYPNOTISM — CURIOUS SCENES AT THE HOME OF A 
DANISH HYPNOTIST. 

Some highly interesting experiments in hypnotism were made 
before a select private party at No. 470 Wabash avenue one evening 
last week by Carl Sextus, a Dane, who is trying to introduce hypnotism 
as an aid to medical science in a manner in which it has been used for 
some time in Europe, especially in France. The theory is simple. 
While in the hypnotic state the patient is given a suggestion, which he 
retains, unconsciously, after he awakes. The impression having been 
made upon his nervous system by a strong will power, not his own, it 
remains with him. Mr. Sextus had a man present named Andrew 
Scott, a workingman, whom he was treating for nervousness. He 
placed the patient in the hypnotic state and said to him: "A week 
from to-day you will feel splendid. You will not be nervous at all any 
more." After repeating this several times he awakened the patient. 

The extraordinary and hitherto unexplained strength of sugges* 
tidns given to a subject in the hypnotic state was illustrated by several 
experiments. A man named Hans Jurgenson was told in the hypnotic 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 2C)1 

state to pick up a silver dollar from a table and return it to its owner, 
who had placed it there unseen by the subject. 

The subject got up, picked up the coin, and returned it to the owner. 
The subject did not know who the owner was, but Dr. Sextus, who con- 
trolled him, did. 

A Tribune reporter agreed on an experiment with a lawyer who 
was present, none of the party being in the secret. An intelligent 
young man, who is in the insurance business, was hypnotized and Dr. 
Sextus placed him under the control of the lawyer, who gave his in- 
structions, "Two minutes after you wake up," he said to the subject, 
"you will pick up a little roll of twine that lies on the table, unravel it, 
and tie it to a baggage check which has the number ioo on it and is at 
the other end of the room." This check was in the reporter's 
pocket. After the subject awoke from the hypnotic state he 
was engaged in conversation. Dr. Sextus did not know what in- 
structions had been given. Exactly two minutes after he awoke 
the subject rose from his seat, picked up the string, unraveled it, and, 
after playing with it, walked across the room to where the reporter 
stood. He commenced to handle some of the things on a bureau, look- 
ing curiously at the reporter all the time. He was evidently nonplussed. 
If he was to follow his inclination, he said, he would have to make free 
with some of the things on the bureau. But he did not. He stood for a 
while, until the lawyer called to him to turn around. When his back 
was turned the reporter placed the check on the bureau. Shortly after 
the subject turned around again. He saw the check and, without a 
word, picked it up, tied the string to it, and returned to his seat, evi- 
dently much relieved. 

The same subject when in the hypnotic state was told by Mr. Sextus 
that three and a half minutes after he awoke he would be unable to see the 
Tribune reporter and would ask for him. The persons in the room 
would tell him the reporter was sitting in the armchair next to the 
lounge on which the subject sat, but they would be fooling him, for it 
was a big dog on the chair. After waking up, at the expiration of three 
and a half minutes the subject, being then fully conscious, asked: 
"What has become of the Tribmie reporter? I was just talking to him 
a second ago. I wanted to see him." Some one pointed to the arm- 
chair where the reporter was sitting. The subject looked at the chair 
and said: "Doctor, when did you bring your dog down?" The reporter 
rose from his chair and started toward the subject, who moved back as 
if afraid and left the lounge. The reporter sat down on the lounge. 
"Where did you come from?" asked the subject, recognizing him. 



292 PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 

Sextus exhibited the usual hypnotic tests of stiffening the arms and 
limbs of his subject, putting him in a cataleptic state, making one man 
eat a potato for an apple and relishing it; and smell a bottle of ammonia 
as if it was the most delicious perfume. By suggestion he caused his 
subject to have a cramp in his hand five minutes after awakening from 
the hypnotic state, the man being then perfectly conscious and remem- 
bering nothing of the suggestion given him when he was in the hyp- 
notic condition. — Henry C. O. Heineman. 



Extract from a three-column article by Victor Debrimant in 
the Progressive Thinker, June 11, 1892: 

HYPNOTISM AND VITAL MAGNETISM FROM THE PRESENT POINT OF 

VIEW — ITS DEVELOPMENT AND ADVANTAGE — ALSO A DESCRIPTION 

OF SOME VERY INTERESTING HYPNOTIC EXPERIMENTS. 

Hypnotist Dr. Carl Sextus for the last couple of years has resided 
here in Chicago, and with his hypnotic experiments and numerous suc- 
cessful hypnotic cures, has created a well-deserved sensation, and is an 
unusually successful hypnotist and healer. It is, nevertheless, to be 
greatly regretted that such a wonderful gift of nature is not more highly 
appreciated, or more generally known. The great number of dis- 
eases where hypnotism, properly applied, would be of valuable assist- 
ance, are too numerous to be mentioned here; but a brighter future is 
near at hand, when hypnotism will be accepted as the universal remedy 
for a vast number of diseases that mock the art of the physicians of 
to-day, and all the so far known medicines from pharmacies. 

The Chicago press, both the daily and Sunday papers, have lately 
given more attention to the science of hypnotism, either describing 
wonderful cures performed in Europe, or giving long articles relating in 
flattering terms the wonderful power Dr. Sextus possesses. 

I have been personally acquainted with Dr. Sextus for the past two 
years, and in him found an unusually gifted and sincere gentleman — a 
man who with his whole mind, body and soul has devoted himself to 
this science; and it must be admitted that it is to the benefit of suffering 
humanity he devotes himself, and not, as is generally the custom with 
a good cause, to exhibit it at public performances and concert halls. 
No, when Mr. Sextus performs hj'pnotic experiments, it is only strictly 
in private, for interested physicians, scientists and newspaper men, as 
through that channel he is able to circulate knowledge concerning his art 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 293 

From the Sunday Iittei' Ocean, Chicago, January 19, 1890: 

CURING BY HYPNOTISM — DECAY IS SUGGESTED FOR THE OLD-TIME 
METHOD OF DOCTORING — RHEUMATISM AND NERVOUS DISOR- 
DERS QUICKLY BOW BEFORE THE HYPNOTIC INFLU- 
ENCE — IT IS THE PRINCIPLE OF SUGGESTION 
THAT IS MADE AVAILABLE — PRAC- 
TICAL HYPNOTISM. 

Hypnotism is not a new thing. Under some form and varying names 
it has been manifest and its phenomena marveled atin all times. But it 
is only of late years that hypnotism has been differentiated from simi- 
lar and cognate phenomena and force results. 

The spirit of this century is keenly analytic and has a distinct ten- 
dency toward classification. Hypnotism has thus been separated, par- 
tially, from mesmerism and similar little understood phenomena. The 
experiments of Charcot at the Salpetriere were Conducted with great 
care, but the great majority of the subjects for experiment were women, 
and of these chiefly hysterical women or those in whom the nervous 
system was either in an abnormal or very highly excited condition were 
selected. 

But while analytic, the nineteenth century is above all else utilita- 
rian. Scarcely had Charcot and his scientific confreres formulated 
some of the leading rules and phenomena and to a certain extent de- 
fined the conditions of this extraordinary mental and nervous state, before 
advanced students began to ask whether the hypnotic condition might 
not be advantageously used in the treatment and cure of obscure and 
difficult disease and infirmities. The peculiarity of the hypnotic con- 
dition, or state, is that it makes the subject in that condition susceptible 
to suggestions from the mind or will of the operator, these suggestions 
completely overcoming the ordinary and normal sensations and ideas of 
the subject. These superinduced sensations, or ideas, are more or less 
affecting, or permanent and dependent on conditions as yet but little 
known. Charcot thus suggested to various of his hypnotized subjects 
that at certain definite times subsequent to their coming out of the hyp- 
notic state they should perform certain definite acts, and these experi- 
ments were extraordinarily successful. This is the indication that has 
been followed in the attempt to vise hypnotism as a remedial agent. Dr. 
Carl Sextus has been practicing this method for a year past in this city; 
and in a long interview the other day gave some highly interesting in- 
formation about this, strange, almost mysterious, curative agent. 



1 



294 PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 

According to Dr. Sextus, hypnotism is not a panacea for all ills; nor 
in the limited class of cases in which its use is indicated is it uniformly 
successful. 

"Not every one can be hypnotized," said the Doctor. " All somnam- 
bulists, and nearly all highly nervous and hysterical people are very 
easily hypnotized, but the strongest and least nervous hard-working 
laborer may be hypnotized in a very short time, while out of a dozen 
persons of apparently identical physical and nervous constitution not 
more than two or three may be susceptible to hypnotic sleep; or, on the 
other hand, they may all be thrown into the hypnotic state. The sus- 
ceptibility depends largely on physical conditions not as yet well under- 
stood, but a necessary preliminary is the inducing of a quiet, restful 
state of the nervous system. My method of procedure when I have 
several subjects is to seat each in an easy attitude. I place in the palm 
of the right hand a little zinc hemisphere painted black, in the center of 
which is a polished copper point — this for men; for women I often use a 
light wooden hemisphere, black, with a faceted crystal in its center. The 
right hand is curved across the body and the head slightly bent for- 
ward, with the eyes steadily fixed upon the bright point. Absolute im- 
mobility is urged, no twitching movements of the fingers or swallowing 
movements of the throat permitted. Presently, in successful cases, the 
right hand begins to waver, then there is a nervous tremor of the eye- 
lids. Then I make certain passes and the hypnotic sleep supervenes. 

" There are other methods, but they depend on these two conditions 
mainly — nervous and muscular immobility. Either of two conditions,, 
may present itself, the lethargic or the cataleptic; and in no case can it 
be foretold which of the two it will be. The former is the more com- 
mon, however. All the muscles are relaxed, the arms fall to the sides, 
the head droops forward or falls back, there is paleness and stertorous 
breathing, and unless the hypnotizer interferes the subject would fall on 
the floor. In the cataleptic condition the reverse obtains; the muscles 
become stiffened and tense, until the body becomes rigid as a bar of iron. 
In such cases persistence in inducing the hypnotic state simply increases 
this cataleptic condition, and there is nothing to be done but. to bring the 
subject out of the hypnotic sleep. In the lethargic sleep, however, tem- 
porary catalepsy can be produced at the will of the hypnotizer, main- 
tained as long as he sees fit, and then made to disappear. It may also be 
localized, so to speak, and some extraordinary results obtained. Thus, I 
have brought the last joint of a finger and that one nearest the hand 
into a sort of cataleptic condition, leaving the middle joint normal. If 
now I tell — suggest to — my subject that the affected joints are insensible 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 



295 



to pain, and that blood would not flow from a wound there inflicted, I 
can thrust needles through the flesh of those joints without pain to the 
subject, and no blood will flow, while the faintest prick of one of these 
needles on the middle joint will be attended by the usual sensation of 
pain and effusion of blood. Practically no trace of the wound remains 
after the subject is awakened, and no pain is felt, because I suggest to 
him that he shall not feel any on awakening. This principle of sugges- 
tion is what is available in hypnotism as a remedial agency. The dis- 
eases in which hypnotism is most useful and available are the various 
rheumatisms and rheumatic conditions, paralysis not dependent upon 
spinal lesions, nervous affections of the bladder, chronic affections, 
cephalalgic conditions, neuralgias, and so forth. It is particularly use- 
ful in dipsomania and morphine and cocoaine cases. The method em- 
ployed is practically the same in all cases. The hypnotic sleep once 
induced, it is suggested to the patient that in place of the disturbed 
nervous condition a quiet, healthy state shall exist. During the sleep 
this suggested healthy condition exists, and the suggestion that it shall 
continue to so exist after coming out of the hypnotic state prevails. 

" Let me give you some examples: Ordinary rheumatism is usually 
easily cured, but no amount of suggestion will ever avail to remove 
chalky deposits in the joints, if such have been formed. However, even 
then skillful massage movements, with the added suggestion, will aid in 
having even these occasionally absorbed. I had a case of a nervous 
paralytic not long since who had used crutches for years and then pro- 
gressed only by swinging his lower limbs bodily forward. I succeeded 
in throwing him into the hypnotic state, and while in that condition 
suggested to him that in five minutes he should stand up and walk 
across the room to his mother. He did so. I then suggested that he 
should thereafter persevere in this nervous state of ability to walk nat- 
urally. That man left me with his crutches under his arm, but you 
must recollect that in his case there was no organic injury of the spinal 
marrow, and his inability to walk was founded on a false nervous condi- 
tion which the hypnotic suggestion could overcome by restoring the 
normal nervous state. In the case of confirmed drunkards, morphine 
and cocaine consumers the rationale of the treatment is. similar. The 
hypnotic sleep is induced and it is then suggested to the hypnotized sub- 
ject that he abhor either drink or his favorite drug, as the case may be. 
He actually does abhor it then. Then it is suggested that this abhor- 
rence continue for some definite period. This is almost invariably suc- 
cessful. At the termination of the period assigned the subject is again 
thrown into hypnotic sleep and a longer period of abhorrence and ab- 



296 PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 

stinence suggested. These periods are made longer and longer, the 
system recovers its natural tone, and finally a complete cure results. 

" As you can see, we are in the infancy of the science. Its possibili- 
ties are immense for good where all else has failed. 

"There are many charlatans and many who, with a little knowledge, 
are yet ignorant of the force they employ; but medicine passed through 
this same stage, and the time will come when hypnotism, properly un- 
derstood and properly applied, will prove, perhaps, the grandest curative 
agency in the power of man to use — in certain cases. The hypnotizer 
is not a god, but a man, and his power is limited in well-defined bounds." 
— Col. Louis Ayme. 

Extract from a four-column article in T7ie Germania 
.Monthly Magazine of ^Chicago, March 7, 1890: 

EXPERIMENTS IN HYPNOTISM. 

Who has read of the wonderful power of the hypnotist without feel- 
ing a desire to see this power exercised? 

It is something mysterious and, being so, is extraordinarily attract- 
ive. We were, therefore, only too anxious to investigate when an op- 
portunity presented itself. Shortly after the appearance of the last 
issue of this paper we chanced to receive an introduction to Dr. Carl 
Sextus, " Hypnotist." We had scarcely heard of the gentleman and his 
successful experiments in the above named subject when we sought and 
were successful in obtaining an interview with him. He is a Dane by 
birth, and has been in this country only a short time. We soon came 
to the conclusion that the doctor was a learned and, above all, a very 
conscientious man; and on leaving him we expressed a desire to see 
some experiments in hypnotism shotild he desire to accommodate us 
with an exhibition of his power over the minds of others. 

We have since had the pleasure to be present at two private seances, 
given at his rooms for the benefit of the press, which was represented 
by the editor of Germania and reporters from the Chicago Herald and 
Tribune. 



Extract from the Religio-Philosophical ^Journal, February 
13, 1892: 

CURES EFFECTED BY HYPNOTISM. 

The reference to Dr. A. A. Liebeault's work was sug- 
gested to me by some similar cures to those which he relates, made by 
a young Danish hypnotist now in Chicago. Hypnotism in its remedial 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 297 

aspect is a matter of facts; so when they come directly under our eyes 
they naturally arouse an intenser interest than those read about. I be- 
lieve that epilepsy is considered beyond the means of our orthodox 
medical schools; yet right before me I have such a case radically cured 
by the mentioned hypnotist, Mr. Carl Sextus. Fortunately I personally 
know Miss M. M., and can testify to the facts. For six years or more 
was she a victim to this dreaded disease. Until her perfect restoration 
(from early childhood) she was subject to the most frightful headaches, 
sometimes coming on every other day, sometimes lasting for a week. 
Over three years ago chance took her to one of Mr. Sextus' hypnotic 
exhibitions. In a few treatments she was cured; at least not having had 
the slightest relapse to the present. 

Another case is that of Mr. E. M., a man of 57, very deaf and 
defective in the organs of speech. Besides this the right arm and leg 
were partially paralyzed. In seven treatments he was healed — medical 
treatment and massage both proving ineffectual. 

Mrs. A. J., suffering from nervous diseases, and very rheumatic, was 
perfectly cured in about six treatments. 

It is unnecessary to multiply cases. I simply desire to introduce him 
to the readers of the Journal as a man thoroughly worthy of their con- 
fidence, both in his specialty and as a man. As to what extent he is as- 
sisted by higher influences it is impossible for me to say ; but if thorough 
honesty is a magnet for such powers, Mr. Sextus may be considered 
well attended. His power does not lie alone in hypnotic treatment, but 
is efficacious in the magnetic passes. A sledge-hammer is not necessary 
to repair a watch — so the gentle but effective passes and manipulation 
will suffice for lesser cases. 

When, however, other means have failed and the patient is amenable 
to hypnotic influence, wonders can be expected which may be pro- 
nounced little less than miraculous. To such I heartily recommend 
Mr. Carl Sextus. ■ Joseph Singer. 



From the Progressive Th inker, January 28, 1892: 

DR. SEXTUS. 

Dr. Sextus gave some very pleasing experiments in hypnotism at 
the parlors of the Progressive Thinker a few evenings ago. They wers 
similar to those of which we made a full report a few weeks ago. He 
has made many subjects in this city, and is doing a good work. 



298 PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 

Extract from a four-column article in Nor disk Folkeblad^ 
Chicago, February 23, 1890: 

The editor of this paper has fresh in his mind all the wonderful ex- 
periments that have so frequently been spoken of in the Scandinavian, 
German, and American newspapers. It was with great interest he at- 
tended a private seance. Prof. Sextus had invited about one hundred 
ladies and gentlemen. He intended in this circle to show that he was 
deserving of all that had been said and written about him. 

Those invited seated themselves in the hall. Mr. Sextus requested 
some of the young gentlemen present to come upon the platform and 
allow him to try his power and influence of controlling them. Imme- 
diately twelve young men stepped up and offered themselves, willing to 
let Mr. Sextus experiment with them if they were susceptible. They 
were each placed on a chair with their backs to the audience. A metal 
button was placed in the palm of each of their right hands, with direc- 
tions to look intently on the point in the center, to keep their attention 
to it, and sit perfectly quiet. Then at a given signal from the hypno- 
tist the orchestra played a very solemn melody. 

Soon the hypnotist approached one of the young men, made some 
slow passes from his head down the center of his back and down his 
arms — with bent, outspread fingers, letting them slowly pass over the 
young man's body. The hypnotist's eyes, having a look of something 
supernatural in them, were concentrated on the subject. 

A painful stillness spread over the audience which awaited, with im- 
patience, what was going to happen. The orchestra continued to play 
the same melody. After about fifteen minutes' work the hypnotist had 
succeeded — five had gone to sleep — and the hypnotist had found his 
subjects. 

The scenes that followed were beyond description — so wonderful 
did it seem to the audience. The subjects were perfectly powerless in 
the hypnotist's hands. 

One was made to believe that it was raining very hard, and 
the sleeping man very carefully turned his pants up at the bottom to 
avoid getting them wet. The hypnotist then told him he had come to a 
big sea; he immediately pulled off his coat and vest, threw himself upon 
a table (that had been brought), and commenced to swim in the imag- 
inary sea. Several scenes were very comical, especially when Mr. Sex- 
tus gave a subject a pillow, telling him it was a little child and that he 
was its nurse. With a loving embrace the subject took the pillow and 
unbuttoned his vest — intending to nurse it — at the same time singing 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS, 299 

quite loudly, " Hush-a-bye, baby," etc., to it. A chair was handed to one 

of the subjects, the hypnotist telling him it was a very pretty young 
lady, and requesting the sleeping youth to kiss her right on her mouth. 
He kissed the back of the chair several times with a lover's fondness; 
then, lifting the chair up in his arms he began to waltz with his beloved, 
taking good care to keep time to the music, which was changed to a 
waltz for his benefit. In short, the subjects were powerless automata 
in the hypnotist's hands. The whole exhibition showed the sleepers 
that, instead of lying quietly in their beds, dreaming, they themselves 
performed the dreams in all their details. An act of sleep-walking fol- 
lowed, but without the painful aspects that generally occur at such 
scenes, and without any snoring sound whatever. It recalled to me 
Madame Ristori's loud snoring in the sleep-walking scene of "Macbeth," 
and I consequently expected to hear something similar; but in that I 
was mistaken. Instead of that the sleeping youths appeared to be per- 
fectly happy, and they gave no signs whatever of anything unpleasant. 
There was no indication of any nervous twitchings of their muscles; 
their eyelids were lowered and a slight paleness prevailed. One thing 
I took particular notice of was: The hypnotist raised one of the sub- 
jects' head up and, pointing to the ceiling, said: "See what beautiful 
angels are up there in the skies! Listen! How lovely their music 
sounds!" and the sleeping youth's face took on a spiritual and clear ex- 
pression; beseechingly he stretched both hands toward the imaginary 
angels. Surely he had never seen, in his normal condition, a more 
beautiful sight than this which the hypnotist now brought to his imag- 
ination. We must admit that the scenes were truly wonderful; yet still 
more wonderful experiments were performed later. 

One of the subject's arm was stretched out, the hypnotist made some 
passes along the muscles, and it became as rigid and stiff as a piece of 
wood. Dr. Bockstrom, who was present, was now asked to hold a 
lighted candle to the subject's eves. Dr. Bockstrom did as he was re- 
quested, without there being any twitching whatever or winking with 
the eyelids, something that would be impossible for any person in a wak. 
ing condition; thus Ave had undeniable proofs "oi actually having som- 
nambulism before us— and no fraud. The hypnotist now made it impos- 
sible for one of the subjects to remember his own name. Whenever 
Mr. Sextus stretched his hand toward the subject's forehead his knowl- 
edge of ever having had a name was completely gone; but, as soon as 
the operator took his hand away, the subject could not only remember 
his name but also write it down on paper. 



300 PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 

Yet still more singular experiments were performed. Two subjects 
were placed standing up with their backs to each other. Then by mak- 
ing some magnetic passes down the subjects' heads they were as if glued 
together, and by no power from any of the audience could they take 
their heads away; then the hypnotist said: "In five minutes, not be- 
fore, you can each take your head away" (the time was set by one of the 
audience). Watches were now brought out and the minutes counted. 
During this time the hypnotist was standing and quietly conversing 
with some of the gentlemen present, as unconcernedly as though he 
had nothing at all to do with the subjects. In exactly five minutes' time 
the two young men were able to take their heads apart; both subjects 
had, without knowing it, kept the time to the second. One subject was 
commanded to imitate everything the hypnotist did. With tight closed 
eyes, and unconscious, the subject stood with his back to the hypnotist 
imitating every motion and grimace the latter made, even to the ex- 
pressions of pleasure or anger, without there being any connection 
whatever between the hypnotist and his subject. Yet another singular 
experiment followed. Shortly before waking one of the subjects he 
was commanded that, five minutes after awaking (the time again be- 
ing set by one of the audience), he should tell the audience of having a 
severe headache in his right knee. The hypnotist then waked him up. 
Exactly five minutes afterward the subject said to Dr. Backstrom, who 
was still upon the platform, that he (the subject) felt splendid, only he 
had an awful headache in his right knee. This also was a proof of the 
subjects' obedience, even after being waked up — the suggestions' effects 
only leavirig them when the hypnotist's orders were completed. 
The wonderful experiments were thus closed. I could scarcely 
have believed my own eyes if there had not been others present 
(and amongst them a number of physicians of a very high standing) 
to confirm these hypnotic and somnambulistic phenomena. Mr. 
Sextus will also here in Chicago, as in other towns, after his 
public seances, give hypnotic and magnetic treatments, the latter being 
treatment by manipulations without the hypnotic sleep, by which Mr. 
Sextus has cured a number of people. Mr. Carl Sextus is a young man 
who devotes his life and soul to his art, and who never avoids any 
trouble to show the public the best and most available in the line of 
study and work which he has adopted. I will not endeavor to explain 
the dim and mysterious in the so-called animal magnetism for the rea- 
son that the phenomena are too little understood, at present, even in 
the most intellectual circles; still long articles about Mr. Sextus have 
been published in the bestand most prominent papers in England, Russia, 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS 3OI 

France, Germany, and the Scandinavian countries, where he has often 
appeared and made a great stir with his hypnotic experiments, 



Extract from a two-column article in the Chicago Inter 
Ocean, May 9, 18S9: 

A subject was found whose body was strong and robust if his will 
was not. The Professor made the heart of the subject beat fast or slow 
at will, Dr. Anderson testing the pulse. The pulsations were made to 
reach as high as 120 and as low as. 66 to the minute. A bottle of am- 
monia was placed at his nose. He was told that it was cologne, and he 
inhaled the pungent odor with as much delight as if it were the odor of 
sweet violets. Several men in the audience thought the bottle contained 
something else besides ammonia. They put their noses to it, but with- 
drew them as quickly as if they had been burned. The Professor then 
made him smell of his own hand, telling him that it was a bottle of am- 
monia, and the subject showed all the signs of having inhaled the burn- 
ing fumes of that liquid. The Professor then caused the subject's body 
to become perfectly rigid. His heels were placed on one chair and his 
head on another, with no support between them. Two men tried to 
bend the rigid body of the man by pressure upon his hips, but could 
not do so. 

Two women were willing to become subjects. One of them was very 
slight and the other heavy. The former was made to'pluck imaginary 
floAvers and inhale their imaginary odors, to see imaginary angels in an 
imaginary heaven, and to catch an imaginary bird and smooth its 
ruffled, imaginary feathers. 

But the fleshy woman furnished the fun. The Professor made her be- 
lieve she was a little school girl, and she jumped the rope with a juven- 
ility that was true to life. She also gave a tea-party on the stage to im- 
aginary guests, and acted the hostess with all the charm of one of 
Chicago's ".two hundred." 



Extract from Chicago Daily Herald, February 7, 1890: 

THOUGHT HE WAS PRESIDENT — A SINGULARLY INTERESTING EXHIBI- 
TION OF A HYPNOTIST'S POWER. 

A stalwart young butcher's apprentice walked into the Herald's local 
room last evening, inquired for the city editor, and announced himself 
as President Harrison. There was a slight glitter to his eyes, but his 



302 PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 

face was expressionless and the features almost rigid. Taking two car- 
rots from his overcoat he handed one to his host and put the other, 
small end foremost, between his lips just as a man would do with a 
cigar. Taking a box of matches from his pocket, he lighted one and 
proceeded to light his carrot. Almost immediately he relapsed into a 
trance, still standing as he was before; and his left arm gradually rose 
until it was at right angles and there remained. This condition lasted 
for over five and one-half minutes. In the meantime there had gath- 
ered about the hypnotic patient, for such the young man really was, 
Professor Carl Sextus, the hypnotist; Robert Lindblom, the well-known 
board of trade man; Howard Henderson, C. W. Fullerton, the lawyer, 
and Louis Pio, the Danish editor, and several others in the party who 
had set out from the hypnotist's house to follow the young butcher after 
he had been hypnotized, and instructed to do exactly as he did. 

At the expiration of five and a half minutes, which was the time 
agreed on, the hypnotic trance state continued but the arm sank to the 
side, the patient seemed less rigid in his muscles, and his pulse, which 
had been thumping away at 124 beats to the minute, became more nor- 
mal. The party accompanying the Professor was greatly interested in 
what they believe to be the most interesting and the least cultivated of 
all the branches of medical science and treatment. 



Extract from a four-column article in the Progressive 
Thinker, February 6, 1892, by Louis Pio, the well-known 
Danish editor : 

"Here is a cup of coffee and a good cigar. When I awaken you, 
drink the coffee, light the cigar and walk home through the streets. 
Your legs will be all right hereafter, and you may dispense with your 
crutches," said Dr. Sextus. , 

It is a very common mistake to think that only nervous diseases can 
be cured through hypnotism. Now, certainly, the nervous form a large 
percentage of the human troubles in our time, but still the very nature 
of the hypnotic power shows that it may be possible to influence a sick 
person, even if his nerves are all right. If, as we have shown, the will 
of the hypnotist is sufficient to retard or quicken the pulse, to prevent 
or cause blisters, to cause pain to disappear and so on, it may also be 
possible, by a suitably worded command, to stop a local inflammation or 
the formation of a cancer; to cure indigestion; nay, even to conquer the 
all-prevailing corn. Think of it, ladies and gentlemen! 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 303 

As soon as the hypnotizer is physician enough to know exactly what 
ails the patient, he can give the suggestion to the independent organs of 
the body and they will acknowledge his will as supreme and obey. 

Where lies the limit, no one can tell; but it looks really as if much- 
troubled humanity had found the "Universal Remedy;" and why not? 

What is hypnotism in this relation but using nature's own force to 
re-establish the natural pulsations and functions of life through the 
body ? 

The only seemingly unnatural thing is that this absolute power over 
the body of a man is not given to himself, but to another; but this state 
of things may, however, be changed by later discoveries. As it now 
stands, the new cure method may bring hope and realization of hope to 
many poor invalids whom the physicians have given up as incurable, or 
as marked victims of a near and painful death. 



Extract from a four-column article in the Chicago Sunday 
Herald^ August 17, 1890: 

HYPNOTISM. 

This science is being very thoroughly investigated in Europe by such 
prominent scientists as Deleuze, Charcot, Beaunis, Bernheim, Barety, 
Preyer, Gessmann and others who are striving to apply it to the treat- 
ment of nervous and mental diseases. It has been used for this purpose 
with great success abroad by the well-known Professor Carl Sextus, now 
of this city. He deserves more success than he has met with here, as 
he is a thorough master of this science, and is particularly adapted for 
its practice among those afflicted with above-mentioned complaints. 

H. J. B. 



Extract from the Daily Skandinaven, February 23, 1889: 

Carl Sextus, the hypnotist, delivered a public lecture upon Hyp- 
notism, accompanied by experiments, at Aurora Turner Hall, on last 
Wednesday evening. The seance was witnessed by a large 
audience; and we venture to scy that no one went away dissatisfied, 
Mr. Sextus received frequent and enthusiastic applause; and, finally, 
he had to appear after the seance was over. Those present were 
unanimous in the opinion that the seance was highly interesting in 
conduct and extremely brilliant in effects. 



3<H 



PUBLIC PRESS COMMENTS. 



Extract from a seven-column article in the Chicago Illus- 
treret Ugeblad^ February 28, 1889: 

I had both heard and read a good deal about Mr. Sextus before I 
met him, and I must confess that at the time I shook my head rather 
mistrustingly when I was told of his singular performances in other 
places. How surprised was I to find not a wizard, but a young man of 
pleasant countenance, winning manner, fluent speech and modest — 
perhaps a little too modest — appearance. Personally, he inspired con- 
fidence and sympathy; and there was in his smile something amiable, 
which promised, upon better acquaintance with him, an opportunity of 
getting nearer the secrets of his art. I therefore invited him to be my 
guest, and, by a private seance, to convince myself and some other 
infidels of the truth of his art, and he very willingly consented to my 
proposal. Dr. Carl Sextus is of medium height, his figure is powerful 
and well built, and signifies a strong constitution. His features are 
regular, inclined to be a little dark, but very healthy; his hair is black 
and his eyes are dark, intelligent and full of fire. His gaze has at times 
a piercing, sharp look — caused by frequent strain — but in the general 
conversation it only denotes life and good nature. 

The seance began. " Now you are a rooster," and the subject 
crowed as proudly as though he was calling all the chickens in the 
morning. " Laugh! Sing! Smile!" were the commands, one after the 
other; and they were immediately obeyed. 

The intellect stands still. The mind gives itself up. We were con- 
ducted to reward the hypnotist with what you might call a petrified 
astonishment, that was pictured on our faces. The hypnotist's power 
cannot be described — it must be witnessed. 

" That is a wonderful power you have," was the general remark to 
the hypnotist. 

"Yes," he replied, "so it is. I do not quite understand it myself. I 
work, day by day, trying to unravel and get to the bottom of this secret, 
of which it seems I have found the key. I am convinced that I have, 
at least, crossed the threshold and discovered many new truths in this 
hitherto much neglected realm of science." 



THE END. 



EXTRACTS FROM PRESS OPINIONS. 



The clearest, most comprehensive and in every way the best and 
most extensive treatise on "Hypnotism" for popular reading has 
been prepared by Carl Sextus, who for the past two or three years has 
confused and delighted the people of Chicago with his experiments in it. 
There is much in the book to interest investigators. The writer is a 
man who has given the subject undivided attention, whose fame has 
spread far and wide for the work he has done, and he tries, so far as he 
can, to explain everything connected with the phenomena. The book 
is full of anecdotes and reminiscenses. It was written more for the 
masses than for the physician. — New York World. 

* , * 
* 

An excellent treatise on hypnotism is Carl Sextus' work on the sub- 
ject, which has been well received by those interested. The chapter 
on somnambulism is extremely interesting. 

There is everything in the book to interest investigators. The writer 
is a man who has given the subject undivided attention. As he states 
in his preface, he has "done his best to explain, in as clear and signifi- 
cant a manner as he can, everything connected with the phenomena 
mentioned." Angels can do no more, and Mr. Sextus' book bears 
witness to his thoroughness, earnestnest and sincerity. — Chicago Herald. 

* . * 

The book here mentioned is indescribably interesting, for its subject 
matter, for its method of treatment and for its entire manner of com- 
pilation. 

It is handled with the simple dignity alone possible to one who 
understands from experience the resources of his subject, and the public 
has reason for gratitude to Mr. Sextus for his admirabi treatise, which 
will indeed greatly assist in bringing clearer and nearer thought to the 
mind of individual readers. The book is handsomely bound and printed 
and altogether possesses numerous elements of fascination. — Boston Ideas. 

(3°5) 



306 



EXTRACTS FROM PRESS OPINIONS. 



The author of this most interesting work brings out clearly the 
salient features of hypnotism, telepathy, clairvoyance, sleep-walking 
and magnetism. — San Francisco Chro?iicle. 

* ^ * 

Mr. Sextus' work can be confidently commended as a mine of inter- 
esting information. — Detroit Free Press. 

* 
As a treatise on the exceedingly important and .interesting subject 
of Hypnotism the book is unequalled. — Universal Truth, Chicago. 

* ,, * 

"Hypnotism," by Casl Sextus, is plainly the result of years of study 
and practice by one who both theoretically and practically is familiar 
with this interesting subject. — Philadelphia Press. 

* * * 

This work must really interest the public, and most particularly the 
medical profession in Hypnotism. — Light, Loudon. 

* * * 

An excellent treatise on hypnotism is Carl Sextus' work on the sub- 
ject, which has been well received by those interested. The chapter on 
somnambulism is extremely interesting. There is everything in the 
book to interest investigators. The writer is a man who has given the 
subject undivided attention. Mr. Sextus' book bears witness to his 
thoroughness, earnestness and sincerity. — Chicago Inter-Ocean. 

* * * 

Mr. Sextus is an authority on the subject. — Chicago Daily News. 

* ^ * 

A Valuable Work on Hypnotism. — The clearest, most compre- 
hensive and in every way the best extensive treatise on hypnotism for 
popular reading that I have seen, comes from the pen of Carl Sextus. 
It is a large and handsome book of over three hundred pages and will 
fill a real want .... I would say, it is in my judgment the best work for 
general readers, which has yet been written.— B. O. Flower, in The 
Arena, Boston. 

* * * 

The author attained considerable celebrity in Chicago a little more 
than three years ago. His experiments at the residences of prominent 
citizens were reported in the daily papers. — Chicago Tribune. 

* „ * 

"Hypnotism," by Carl Sextus, is a work of great interest in the light 
of the rapid increase of interest in the theories, which it exploits, — 
Chicago Times. 



EXTRACTS FROM PRESS OPINIONS. 307 

Mr. Carl Sextus has had a large experience in the field of hypnotism 
and in this work he has described a large number and variety of 
phenomena in relation to hypnotism and cognate subjects. — Religio- 
Philosophical Journal, Chicago. 

* o. * 

Another and very interesting addition to the library of works on 
hypnotism, is a book by Carl Sextus on that subject. The side issues of 
hypnotism, somnambulism and the like are skilfully handled. — Chicago 
Evening Post. 

* ^ * 

One of the main points of excellence in the work is its extreme sim- 
plicity. It was written for the masses, by one who thoroughly under- 
stands all that science has thus far mastered on the subject. It deserves 
a place in the library of every well-posted man. — Chicago Dispatch. 

* * 
* 

Decidedly an interesting and instructive book- by an author who 

has an experience of years in the study and practise of Hypnotism * * * 

Thousands are interested in these matters, and they will assuredly be 

benefited by a perusal of Mr. Sextus' work. Even those who have not 

yet given much thought to such matters may well turn to this book, for 

it is not only delightfully simple in style, but it also contains several 

notable anecdotes and reminiscences. — New York Herald. 

The most valuable work on "Hypnotism" which has come to my 
attention is that of Mr. Carl Sextus, of this city. Mr. Sextus is pioneer 
in hypnotic work here and especially in the adaptation of it to the 
treatment of disease. His book abounds in descriptions of actual experi- 
ments, concerning many of which he knows personally, having been 
the operator. At the same time, there is a thorough review of the past 
history of hypnotic experiments and many suggestive explanations of 
the phenomena. Other works which have come to my attention have 
commonly been wanting in one or more of these particulars, and the 
most valuable of them from the standpoint of intelligent scientific 
explanation were written by men who had little personal experience. 
I am suret hat you will find the work of Mr. Sextus very interesting 
and very instructive and most helpful to you in your investigations. — 
Miles M. Dawson, Sec'y. Chicago Branch American Psychical Society. 

Sextus' "Hypnotism" is instructive and entertaning * ******* 
liberally illustrated. — The City Argus,Sa.n Francisco. 



308 EXTRACTS FROM PRESS OPINIONS. 

Extract from a review in the People's Health Journal, of Chicago, by 
L. D. Rogers, A. M., M. D., Professor of Surgery in the National 
Homeopothic Medical College: "Carl Sextus' book on Hypnotism is 
by far the best work from which to obtain both a scientific and a practical 
knowledge of this wonderful subject, which is so rapidly coming into 
prominence, and upon which every intelligent person will find it to his 
or her advantage to be throughly posted." 

An interesting, instructive and valuable book upon this mysterious 
subject. — The New York Sun. 

This is a very interesting and valuable book. — Chicago Mail. 

He does not confine himself in this book to its specific theoretics, but 
devotes much space to its practical application. — Chieago Truth Gleaner. 

* * * 

As we read this book we almost forgot that this is a scientific work, 
so many are the brilliant and picturesque incidents chosen by the author 
to explain and demonstrate his claims. — The Danish Pioneer, Chicago. 

* ^ * 

Mr. Sextus is evidently an experienced and scientific hypnotist and 
his descriptions are graphic. — The Christian Metaphysician, Chicago. 

The author, who is a well-known practical hypnotist, has here given 
the result of his own long experience, and the sum of his own exten- 
sive investigation into the best literature on this subject. — Husbibliothek, 
Chicago. 

* * * 

This volume is a result of years of study and practical experiences 
by one of the most widely known hypnotists living .... Hypnotism is 
an important and interesting study, and this volume is the best written 
on the subject. — The Progressive Thinker, Chicago. 

The chief contention of the author for practical purposes is thathypno- 
tism falls within the physician's sphere. — Chicago Evening Journal. 

Mr. Sextus has gathered a mass of valuable information and from 
his book much is to be learned. — Skandinaven, Chicago. 

There is not a dull nor tedious page in the entire work, and it is well 
worth the perusal of everyone, no matter what may be his ideas and 
position in life. — Labor Advocate, Birmingham, Alabama. 



EXTRACTS FROM PRESS OPINIONS. 309 

It reveals not only the miracle, but also the miracle maker. In 
other words we learn how to work miracles. — Lucifer The Light Bearer, 
Topeka, Kansas. 

"Hypnotism" is an exhaustive work from the pen of Carl Sextus, 
who is acknowledged to be a leader among the exponents of that least 
understood of all sciences. — Chicago Daily Globe. 

* , * 

The celebrated hypnotist Carl Sextus has put his best efforts into h s 
new book on hypnotism and somnambulism. — Chicago Figaro. 

* # 

Mr. Sextus' book is the result of many years study and is a sincere 

and deep work. — Norden, Chicago. 

* , * 

We recommend Mr. Sextus' book as a clear, comprehensive and 
instructive work. — Sivedish American, Chicago. 

Mr. Sextus has related even the driest scientific facts in such an 
entertaining way that the interest during the reading is continually 
increased. — Nordlyset, New York. 

It was with a high degree of interest that we read this volume 
whose author is the famous hypnotist Carl Sextus. — Vesthysten, (West 
Coast), San Francisco. 

* ^ * 

This work is an interesting one throughout, being profusely illus- 
trated with diagrams and engravings relative to the subject under 
discussion. — Light of Truth, Cincinnati, Ohio. 

* ^ * 
* 

This is a highly interesting and instructive book. — Banner of Light t 
Boston. 

* * * 

We find that this book contains many interesting facts and has ■ 
been warmly received by investigators of hypnotism and its related 
sciences. — Messiah's Herald, Boston. 

* * * 

Advanced thinkers will find this volume full of interest and prac- 
tical value. — The Mionion Letter, Bangor, Maine. 

In the second review in The Arena, the editor says: "The author of 
this work, being one of the most succesful hypnotizers in Amerika, 
speaks with authority. ***** I am rejoiced that so valuable a work 
in the line has appeared, and can conscientiously recommend it. * * * *" 






-t' 



»• 



.#• ■% 



•^,#' : 









'- "%. <? * 






v- V" 



•tf 



^ ' 



%<(?' 



4$> '^ 



>* «*> 



- 



.& 









^ ,^ 



^ / 



c 6 ^'*v y ^ V V: ^v 



1 * ,\y t/>. 












^ v ; 









// 






.V ^ 



< 



.^v 



,0o 



^' 


<v "" 








** % 


- 






O ' 








'/• 






' 




■>■* 


V 






o 


o x 






Q^ 


-K, 



V cP, 



# y >■ 






■£*. 
























%4- 








*<■ 


% .* x 



& 















r ' '%- 









,0o 






